Experion PKS

Control Hardware Installation Guide

EPDOC-XX21-en-430A
December 2013

Release 430
 Document Release Issue Date
EPDOC-XX21-en-430A 430 0 December 2013

Disclaimer
This document contains Honeywell proprietary information. Information contained herein is to be used solely
for the purpose submitted, and no part of this document or its contents shall be reproduced, published, or
disclosed to a third party without the express permission of Honeywell International Sàrl.
While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell disclaims the implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness for a purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated
in its written agreement with and for its customer.
In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any direct, special, or consequential damages. The information
and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice.
Copyright 2013 - Honeywell International Sàrl

2 www.honeywell.com
Contents

1 About this document ........................................................................................................................... 17

2 Pre-installation Considerations .......................................................................................................... 19
2.1 Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) Function Guidelines ................................................................. 20
2.2 Wire selection criteria ....................................................................................................................................... 22
2.3 Protective Earth (PE) ground guidelines .......................................................................................................... 23
2.4 Ground bus connection guidelines .................................................................................................................... 25
2.5 Control hardware hazardous location classification ......................................................................................... 26
2.6 About hazardous (classified) locations ............................................................................................................. 27
2.6.1 Classifications .................................................................................................................................... 27
2.6.2 Divisions ............................................................................................................................................ 27
2.6.3 Groups ................................................................................................................................................ 27
2.6.4 Methods of Protection ........................................................................................................................ 28
2.7 Control hardware temperature classification guidelines ................................................................................... 29
2.7.1 Temperature Identification Numbers/Codes ...................................................................................... 29
2.8 Control hardware component handling guidelines ........................................................................................... 30
2.8.1 To begin installing your Control hardware ........................................................................................ 30
2.8.2 To begin installing individual Control hardware components ........................................................... 30
3 Enclosure Installation .......................................................................................................................... 33
3.1 Moving by Fork Lift ......................................................................................................................................... 34
3.2 Moving by Mobile Lifter .................................................................................................................................. 35
3.3 Moving by Rollers ............................................................................................................................................ 38
3.4 Moving by Crane - Using a Transport Skid ...................................................................................................... 39
3.5 Moving by Crane - Using Eyebolts .................................................................................................................. 41
3.6 Leveling and Bolting Down Enclosures ........................................................................................................... 42
3.6.1 Leveling ............................................................................................................................................. 42
3.6.2 Bolt Down .......................................................................................................................................... 42
3.7 Installing the Internal Infrastructure ................................................................................................................. 43
3.7.1 Installing DIN-rails ............................................................................................................................ 43
4 Chassis Installation .............................................................................................................................. 45
4.1 Mounting Space Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 47
4.2 Chassis-mounting Dimensions ......................................................................................................................... 48
4.3 Installing the Controller Chassis ....................................................................................................................... 50
4.4 Post Chassis Installation Tasks ......................................................................................................................... 52
4.4.1 Attach power supply and install modules .......................................................................................... 52
4.4.2 Make ground connections .................................................................................................................. 52
5 Controller Module Installation and Removal ..................................................................................... 53
5.1 Installing the Control Processor Module .......................................................................................................... 54
5.2 Installing, Connecting, or Removing the CPM Battery .................................................................................... 55
5.3 Installing the Control Processor Battery ........................................................................................................... 56
5.4 Post CPM Installation Checks .......................................................................................................................... 58
5.4.1 Problems, Failures, and Faults during Operation of C200E .............................................................. 58
5.4.2 Install other modules .......................................................................................................................... 59
5.4.3 Load personality image ...................................................................................................................... 59
5.5 Removing the Control Processor Module ......................................................................................................... 60

3
CONTENTS

5.6 Installing a Replacement CPM ......................................................................................................................... 61

5.7 Removing the Control Processor Battery ......................................................................................................... 62
6 Redundancy Module Installation and Removal ................................................................................. 65
6.1 Installing the Redundancy Module ................................................................................................................... 66
6.2 Installing the Redundancy Cable ...................................................................................................................... 67
6.3 Wiring the Status Contact Interface connector ................................................................................................. 70
6.4 Post RM Installation Tasks ............................................................................................................................... 73
6.5 Removing the Status Contact Interface Cable .................................................................................................. 74
6.6 Removing the Redundancy Cable .................................................................................................................... 75
6.7 Post RM Cable Removal Considerations ......................................................................................................... 78
6.7.1 Check and reconfigure Controllers .................................................................................................... 78
6.7.2 Remove Redundancy Module ............................................................................................................ 78
6.8 Removing the Redundancy Module ................................................................................................................. 79
6.9 Installing a Replacement RM ........................................................................................................................... 80
7 I/O Module Installation, Wiring, and Removal ................................................................................... 81
7.1 Installing I/O Modules ...................................................................................................................................... 85
7.2 Keying the Removable Terminal Blocks (RTBs) ............................................................................................. 87
7.3 Post I/O Module Installation Task .................................................................................................................... 89
7.3.1 Wire the RTB ..................................................................................................................................... 89
7.4 Preparing to Connect Field Wiring ................................................................................................................... 90
7.5 Connecting Field Wiring to RTB ...................................................................................................................... 91
7.6 Installing the RTB ............................................................................................................................................. 93
7.6.1 Installing the RTB on a module ......................................................................................................... 93
7.7 Other Related Installation Considerations ........................................................................................................ 95
7.7.1 Review Remote Termination Panel (RTP) use .................................................................................. 95
7.7.2 Install other modules .......................................................................................................................... 95
7.8 Using Remote Termination Panels (RTPs) ....................................................................................................... 96
7.8.1 RTP models ........................................................................................................................................ 96
7.9 Removing I/O Modules .................................................................................................................................... 98
7.10 Installing a Replacement I/O Module ........................................................................................................... 101
8 Serial Interface Module Installation and Removal ........................................................................... 103
8.1 Installing the Serial Interface Module ............................................................................................................ 104
8.2 Installing the Power Adapter .......................................................................................................................... 106
8.3 Post SIM Installation Tasks ............................................................................................................................ 110
8.3.1 Install other modules ........................................................................................................................ 110
8.3.2 Load personality image .................................................................................................................... 110
8.4 Removing the Serial Interface Module ........................................................................................................... 111
8.5 Installing a Replacement SIM ......................................................................................................................... 113
8.6 Removing the Power Adapter ......................................................................................................................... 114
8.6.1 Removing the Power Adapter from a DIN Rail ............................................................................... 115
8.7 Installing a replacement Power Adapter ......................................................................................................... 116
9 ControlNet Communication Module Installation and Removal ...................................................... 117
9.1 Installing the ControlNet Module ................................................................................................................... 119
9.2 Connecting ControlNet Network Cables ........................................................................................................ 121
9.3 Post ControlNet Module Installation Tasks .................................................................................................... 123
9.3.1 Check ControlNet parameters .......................................................................................................... 123
9.4 Removing the ControlNet Module ................................................................................................................. 124
9.5 Installing a Replacement ControlNet module ................................................................................................. 125
10 Ethernet Communication Module Installation and Removal ........................................................ 127
10.1 Installing the Ethernet Module ..................................................................................................................... 128
10.2 Making Ethernet Network Connections ....................................................................................................... 130
10.3 Post Ethernet module Installation Tasks ....................................................................................................... 132

4 www.honeywell.com
 CONTENTS

10.3.1 Install other modules ...................................................................................................................... 132

10.4 Removing the Ethernet Module .................................................................................................................... 133
10.5 Installing a Replacement Ethernet module ................................................................................................... 135
11 Battery Extension Module Installation and Removal .................................................................... 137
11.1 Installing the Battery Extension Module ...................................................................................................... 138
11.2 Wiring the BEM Status Contact ................................................................................................................... 141
11.3 Removing the Battery Extension Module ..................................................................................................... 142
11.4 Installing a Replacement BEM or Battery .................................................................................................... 143
12 Power Supply Installation and Removal ........................................................................................ 145
12.1 Installing the Power Supply .......................................................................................................................... 146
12.1.1 Installing a DIN rail power supply ................................................................................................ 146
12.1.2 Installing a Phoenix contact redundancy module .......................................................................... 147
12.1.3 Installing a Phoenix power supply module .................................................................................... 148
12.1.4 Installing a Meanwell redundancy module .................................................................................... 148
12.1.5 Installing a Meanwell power supply module ................................................................................. 149
12.1.6 Replacing a power supply module ................................................................................................. 150
12.1.7 Installing on a chassis .................................................................................................................... 153
12.1.8 Connecting power wiring .............................................................................................................. 155
12.2 Preparing for Operation ................................................................................................................................ 157
12.3 Removing the Power Supply ........................................................................................................................ 158
12.4 Installing a Replacement Power Supply ....................................................................................................... 159
13 I/O Link Interface Module Installation and Removal ..................................................................... 161
13.1 PM I/O architecture ...................................................................................................................................... 162
13.2 IOLIM Features ............................................................................................................................................ 163
13.3 Control Builder serves as common configuration tool ................................................................................. 164
13.4 Station provides centralized operator interface ............................................................................................ 165
13.5 Planning Considerations ............................................................................................................................... 166
13.5.1 Experion system references ........................................................................................................... 166
13.5.2 Installation declaration ................................................................................................................... 166
13.5.3 I/O module allowance .................................................................................................................... 166
13.5.4 PM I/O Component References ..................................................................................................... 166
13.5.5 Intrinsically safe applications ........................................................................................................ 167
13.6 Installing IOLIM Model TC-IOLI01 ............................................................................................................ 168
13.6.1 Setting I/O link physical address ................................................................................................... 168
13.6.2 Setting I/O link interface cable shield ground ............................................................................... 169
13.6.3 Inserting module into chassis ......................................................................................................... 170
13.6.4 Connecting I/O link interface cable to module .............................................................................. 171
13.6.5 Loading IOLIM firmware .............................................................................................................. 172
13.7 Monitoring PM I/O Functions Using Station Displays ................................................................................ 173
13.7.1 Using Station Detail displays ......................................................................................................... 173
13.7.2 Using Station Event Summary display .......................................................................................... 174
14 Process Manager I/O Installation and Wiring ................................................................................ 177
14.1 Experion PM I/O hardware ........................................................................................................................... 178
14.2 IOLIM module allowance ............................................................................................................................. 180
14.3 Intrinsically safe applications ....................................................................................................................... 181
14.4 Preparing to Install Process Manager I/O Hardware .................................................................................... 182
14.4.1 PM I/O Processor (IOP) and FTA Model Numbers ...................................................................... 183
14.4.2 Additional PM I/O hardware components ..................................................................................... 189
14.4.3 Remote I/O Hardware .................................................................................................................... 190
14.4.4 Check PM I/O Components ........................................................................................................... 191
14.4.5 Check PM Cabinet configuration .................................................................................................. 191
14.5 FTA Installation Considerations ................................................................................................................... 192

5
CONTENTS

14.5.1 FTA selection and mounting considerations .................................................................................. 192

14.5.2 FTA mounting sizes ....................................................................................................................... 192
14.5.3 Galvanically Isolated FTAs ........................................................................................................... 193
14.5.4 Field wiring terminal types ............................................................................................................ 193
14.5.5 Standard FTAs ............................................................................................................................... 193
14.5.6 FTA mounting channel requirements ............................................................................................ 196
14.5.7 Vertical FTA mounting channels ................................................................................................... 196
14.5.8 Vertical bus bar .............................................................................................................................. 197
14.5.9 Horizontal FTA mounting channel ................................................................................................ 197
14.5.10 Horizontal bus bar ........................................................................................................................ 198
14.6 Installing Standard FTAs .............................................................................................................................. 199
14.6.1 Rules for FTA installation and process wiring .............................................................................. 199
14.6.2 Special considerations and wiring rules ........................................................................................ 200
14.6.3 Separate wiring to standard FTAs and galvanically isolated FTAs ............................................... 200
14.6.4 Remote FTA installation ................................................................................................................ 201
14.7 Field wiring to FTA terminals ...................................................................................................................... 203
14.8 Installing Galvanically Isolated FTAs .......................................................................................................... 204
14.8.1 Auxiliary connector ....................................................................................................................... 205
14.8.2 Additional hardware used with galvanically isolated FTAs .......................................................... 205
14.8.3 FTA mounting considerations ........................................................................................................ 206
14.8.4 FTA mounting channel requirements ............................................................................................ 206
14.8.5 Both FTA mounting channels types permitted .............................................................................. 207
14.8.6 Marshalling Panel mounting .......................................................................................................... 208
14.8.7 Combiner Panel mounting ............................................................................................................. 208
14.8.8 Power Distribution Assembly ........................................................................................................ 208
14.8.9 Power Distribution Assembly mounting ....................................................................................... 209
14.8.10 Field wiring connections .............................................................................................................. 209
14.8.11 Cable shield connection ............................................................................................................... 210
14.8.12 Terminal connectors ..................................................................................................................... 210
14.8.13 Compression-type terminal connector ......................................................................................... 210
14.8.14 Crimp pin-type terminal connectors ............................................................................................ 211
14.8.15 Field wire and cable routing ........................................................................................................ 212
14.8.16 Additional Power System ............................................................................................................ 212
14.9 Installing PM IOP Card Files ....................................................................................................................... 213
14.9.1 Installing 7-Slot and 15-Slot card files .......................................................................................... 214
14.9.2 Typical IOP card file Installations ................................................................................................. 215
14.10 I/O Link Address Pinning ........................................................................................................................... 217
14.10.1 Jumper method example .............................................................................................................. 218
14.10.2 Zero-ohm resistor jumper pinning example ................................................................................ 219
14.11 Installing PM I/O Processor Cards ............................................................................................................. 221
14.11.1 Installing IOP card assemblies ..................................................................................................... 221
14.12 Installing Remote I/O ................................................................................................................................. 222
14.12.1 Two types of I/O link extenders - standard and long distance ..................................................... 222
14.12.2 Standard I/O Link Extender Installation ...................................................................................... 222
14.12.3 Nonredundant installation example for remote I/O ..................................................................... 222
14.12.4 Redundant installation example ................................................................................................... 223
14.12.5 I/O link extender card installation and link termination .............................................................. 224
14.12.6 Link A and link B selection ......................................................................................................... 225
14.12.7 I/O Interface cable installation ..................................................................................................... 226
14.12.8 Fiber optic coupler module installation remote I/O ..................................................................... 226
14.12.9 Two couplers types ...................................................................................................................... 226
14.12.10 I/O link extender adapter kit ...................................................................................................... 226
14.12.11 Fiber optic cable installation ...................................................................................................... 227
14.12.12 After fiber optic cable Installation ............................................................................................. 228

6 www.honeywell.com
 CONTENTS

14.12.13 Long distance I/O link extender ................................................................................................ 229

14.12.14 Nonredundant installation example ........................................................................................... 229
14.12.15 Redundant IOP installation ........................................................................................................ 229
14.12.16 I/O link extender card installation, link selection and link termination .................................... 230
14.12.17 I/O Interface cable installation ................................................................................................... 231
14.12.18 Fiber optic coupler module installation ..................................................................................... 232
14.12.19 Fiber optic cable installation ...................................................................................................... 232
14.12.20 Installation requirements ........................................................................................................... 232
14.12.21 After fiber optic cable Installation ............................................................................................. 232
14.13 Installing Power Systems ............................................................................................................................ 234
14.13.1 Power system load requirements ................................................................................................. 234
14.13.2 AC only power system ................................................................................................................. 235
14.13.3 Provide adequate power ............................................................................................................... 236
14.13.4 Mounting location ........................................................................................................................ 236
14.13.5 Power distribution ........................................................................................................................ 238
14.13.6 Power distribution backpanel, Model MU-PSRX04 ................................................................... 238
14.14 Cable Installation ........................................................................................................................................ 240
14.14.1 Installing Power Cables ............................................................................................................... 240
14.14.2 Fifteen-Slot IOP Card File Backpanel Connections .................................................................... 241
14.14.3 Installing I/O Link Interface cable ............................................................................................... 242
14.14.4 Cabling Requirements ................................................................................................................. 242
14.14.5 Power surge protection for the I/O link interface ........................................................................ 243
14.14.6 New and upgraded subsystems only ............................................................................................ 243
14.14.7 I/O Link interface cables in adjacent cabinets ............................................................................. 243
14.14.8 I/O Link interface cable installation ............................................................................................ 243
14.14.9 Typical I/O Link and power cable connection ............................................................................. 244
14.14.10 I/O Link interface cable shield grounding ................................................................................. 244
14.14.11 Installing IOP to FTA Cables ..................................................................................................... 245
15 Appendix A - I/O Module Wiring Reference ................................................................................... 247
15.1 Analog Input Module Wiring ....................................................................................................................... 248
15.1.1 TC-IAH061/TK-IAH061 - 6-point High-level analog input module ............................................ 248
15.1.2 TC-IAH161/TK-IAH161 - 16 -point high-level voltage/current analog input module ................. 250
15.1.3 TC-IXL061/TK-IXL061 - 6-point/Thermocouple input module .................................................. 251
15.1.4 TC-IXL062/TK-IXL062 - 6-point/Thermocouple input module .................................................. 252
15.1.5 TC-IXR061/TK-IXR061 - 6-point/RTD input module ................................................................. 254
15.2 Analog Output Module Wiring ..................................................................................................................... 256
15.2.1 TC-OAH061/TK-OAH061 - 6-point/4 to 20 mA analog output module ...................................... 256
15.2.2 TC-OAV061/TK-OAV061 - 6-point/10 Vdc analog output module ............................................. 257
15.2.3 TC-OAV081/TK-OAV081 - 8-point High level voltage/current analog output module ............... 257
15.3 Discrete AC Input Module Wiring ............................................................................................................... 258
15.3.1 TC-IDA161/TK-IDA161 - 16-point/120(79-132) Vac discrete AC input module ........................ 258
15.3.2 TC-IDK161/TK-IDK161 - 16-point / 120(79-132) Vac Isolated discrete AC input module ........ 259
15.3.3 TC-IDW161/TK-IDW161 - 16-point/220(159-265) Vac Isolated discrete AC input module ...... 261
15.3.4 TC-IDX081/TK-IDX081 - 8-point/120(79-132) Vac Diagnostic .................................................. 262
15.4 Discrete AC Output module Wiring ............................................................................................................. 264
15.4.1 TC-ODA161/TK-ODA161 - 16-point/120/220(74-265) Vac ........................................................ 264
15.4.2 TC-ODK161/TK-ODK161 - 16-point/120/220(74-265) Vac Isolated .......................................... 265
15.4.3 TC-ODX081/ TK-ODX081 - 8-point/120(17-132) Vac Diagnostic ............................................. 267
15.5 Discrete DC Input Module Wiring ............................................................................................................... 269
15.5.1 TC-IDD321/TK-IDD321 - 32-point/24(10-30) Vdc ..................................................................... 269
15.5.2 TC-IDJ161/TK-IDJ161 - 16-point/24(10-30) Vdc Isolated .......................................................... 270
15.5.3 TC-IDX161/TK-IDX161 - 16-point/24(10-30) Vdc Diagnostic ................................................... 272
15.6 Discrete DC Output Module Wiring ............................................................................................................. 274
15.6.1 TC-ODD321/TK-ODD321 - 32-point/24(10-31) Vdc .................................................................. 274

7
CONTENTS

15.6.2 TC-ODJ161/TK-ODJ161 - 16-point/24 (10-30) Vdc Isolated ...................................................... 275

15.6.3 TC-ODX161/TK-ODX161 - 16-point/24(19-30) Vdc Diagnostic ................................................ 277
15.7 Contact/Relay Module Wiring ...................................................................................................................... 279
15.7.1 TC-ORC161/TK-ORC161 - 16-point/10-265 Vac, 5-150 Vdc Isolated Contact .......................... 279
15.7.2 TC-ORC081/TK-ORC081 - 8-point (8 Normally Open, 8 Normally Closed)/10-265 Vac,
5-150 Vdc Isolated Relay .................................................................................................................... 280
15.8 Pulse Input Module Wiring ........................................................................................................................... 282
15.8.1 TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081 - 8-point/5-24 Vdc Pulse Input Module ............................................ 282
16 Appendix B ....................................................................................................................................... 283
16.1 CSA Hazardous Location Approval ............................................................................................................. 284
16.1.1 CSA Certification .......................................................................................................................... 284
16.1.2 Temperature Ratings ...................................................................................................................... 284
16.1.3 Notices ........................................................................................................................................... 284
16.2 Approbation d'utilisation dans des environments dangereux par la CSA .................................................... 286
16.2.1 La certification CSA ...................................................................................................................... 286
16.2.2 Autour de temperature ................................................................................................................... 286
16.2.3 Discerner ........................................................................................................................................ 286
17 Appendix C - PM I/O FTA Reference ............................................................................................... 289
17.1 Analog Input (AI) FTA Wiring ..................................................................................................................... 290
17.1.1 Low Level Analog Input (LLAI) FTAs ......................................................................................... 290
17.1.2 IOP compatibility ........................................................................................................................... 291
17.1.3 Thermocouple and RTDs inputs can be mixed .............................................................................. 292
17.1.4 Reference junction signal for model MU-TAIL01 and MU/MC-TAIL02 FTAs ........................... 292
17.1.5 Reference junction signal for model MU/MC-TAIL03 CE Compliant FTA ................................. 292
17.1.6 Shield bus connections .................................................................................................................. 292
17.1.7 Thermocouple cable shield grounding ........................................................................................... 292
17.1.8 RTD cable shield grounding .......................................................................................................... 293
17.1.9 Local code requirements ................................................................................................................ 293
17.1.10 Thermocouple lead wire resistance ............................................................................................. 293
17.1.11 Allow proper warm up time ......................................................................................................... 293
17.1.12 Types of thermocouples and extension wires .............................................................................. 294
17.1.13 Model MU-TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 low level analog input FTA with thermocouple connection
diagram-non-CE compliant ................................................................................................................. 295
17.1.14 Model MU-TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 low level analog input FTA with RTD connection
diagram-non-CE compliant ................................................................................................................. 296
17.1.15 Model MU-TAIL03 low level analog input FTA with thermocouple connection diagram-CE
compliant ............................................................................................................................................. 297
17.1.16 Model MU-TAIL03 low level analog input FTA with RTD connection diagram -CE
compliant ............................................................................................................................................. 298
17.1.17 Model MU-TAIL02 low level analog input FTA assembly layout -non-CE compliant .............. 299
17.1.18 Model MU-TAIL03 low level analog input FTA assembly layout -CE compliant ..................... 300
17.1.19 RTD Lead Resistance .................................................................................................................. 300
17.1.20 Maximum allowable RTD resistance ........................................................................................... 301
17.1.21 Low Level Analog Input Multiplexer (LLMux) FTAs ................................................................ 301
17.1.22 LLMux FTAs and associated hardware ....................................................................................... 301
17.1.23 LLMux IOP ................................................................................................................................. 303
17.1.24 IOP to Power Adapter Cabling .................................................................................................... 303
17.1.25 Non-CE Compliant applications of CE Compliant hardware ...................................................... 303
17.1.26 Power Adapter mounting location ............................................................................................... 304
17.1.27 Power Adapter to FTA cabling .................................................................................................... 304
17.1.28 MU-KLXxxx cable shield grounding .......................................................................................... 305
17.1.29 Power Adapter to FTA cable specifications ................................................................................ 305
17.1.30 Power Adapter configuration ....................................................................................................... 307
17.1.31 Thermocouple (TC) LLMux FTAs .............................................................................................. 308

8 www.honeywell.com
 CONTENTS

17.1.32 Model MU-TAMT02 thermocouple LLMux FTA with local CJR connection diagram ............. 310
17.1.33 Model MU-TAMT03 thermocouple LLMux FTA with local CJR connection diagram ............. 311
17.1.34 Model MU-TAMT12 thermocouple LLMux FTA with remote CJR connection diagram .......... 312
17.1.35 Model MU-TAMT13 thermocouple LLMux FTA with remote CJR connection diagram .......... 313
17.1.36 Model MU-TAMT02 thermocouple LLMux FTA assembly layout ............................................ 314
17.1.37 Model MU-TAMT03 thermocouple LLMux FTA assembly layout ............................................ 315
17.1.38 Model MU-TAMT12 thermocouple LLMux FTA assembly layout ............................................ 316
17.1.39 Model MU-TAMT13 thermocouple LLMux FTA assembly layout ............................................ 317
17.1.40 Remote CJR installation .............................................................................................................. 318
17.1.41 Resistive Temperature Device (RTD) LLMux FTAs ................................................................... 318
17.1.42 Open wire detection ..................................................................................................................... 319
17.1.43 CE Compliance for field wiring .................................................................................................. 319
17.1.44 Model MU-TAMR02 RTD LLMux FTA connection diagram .................................................... 319
17.1.45 Model MU-TAMR03 and MC-TAMR04 RTD LLMux FTA connection diagram ..................... 320
17.1.46 Model MU-TAMR02 RTD LLMux FTA assembly layout .......................................................... 321
17.1.47 Model MU-TAMR03 and MC-TAMR04 RTD LLMux FTA assembly layout ........................... 322
17.1.48 Remote Hardened Multiplexer (RHMUX) FTA .......................................................................... 322
17.1.49 Intrinsic Safety ............................................................................................................................. 322
17.1.50 RHMUX assemblies .................................................................................................................... 323
17.1.51 RHMUX Power Adapter mounting ............................................................................................. 323
17.1.52 RHMUX FTA mounting .............................................................................................................. 323
17.1.53 Power Adapter to remote FTA cable length ................................................................................ 324
17.1.54 Intrinsically Safe RHMUX application ....................................................................................... 324
17.1.55 Nonincendive RHMUX application ............................................................................................ 325
17.1.56 Model MU/MC-GRPA01 assembly layout .................................................................................. 325
17.1.57 Model MU/MC-TRPA01 assembly layout .................................................................................. 326
17.1.58 Model MC-GRMT01 assembly layout ........................................................................................ 327
17.1.59 RHMUX FTA enclosure .............................................................................................................. 328
17.1.60 IOP to Power Adapter Cabling .................................................................................................... 329
17.1.61 Power Adapter to RHMUX FTA Cabling ................................................................................... 329
17.1.62 Indoor environment FTA to Power Adapter cabling ................................................................... 330
17.1.63 Model MU-KLXxxx cable specifications ................................................................................... 330
17.1.64 Emission control for CE Compliant applications ........................................................................ 330
17.1.65 Cable shield grounding for non CE Compliant or CE Compliant ............................................... 331
17.1.66 Outdoor environment Power Adapter to FTA cabling ................................................................. 331
17.1.67 Model MU-KLO305 cable specifications ................................................................................... 331
17.1.68 Emission control for CE Compliant applications ........................................................................ 331
17.1.69 IS Power Adapter to FTA cabling ................................................................................................ 332
17.1.70 Cable shield grounding for non CE Compliant or CE Compliant ............................................... 332
17.1.71 NI Power Adapter to FTA cabling ............................................................................................... 332
17.1.72 Isolation of outdoor cable shield from armor cladding ............................................................... 333
17.1.73 RHMUX Thermocouple (TC) FTA Field Wiring ........................................................................ 334
17.1.74 Model MC-GRMT01 connection diagram .................................................................................. 334
17.1.75 High Level Analog Input (HLAI) FTAs ...................................................................................... 334
17.1.76 HLAI IOP compatibility and redundancy .................................................................................... 337
17.1.77 Smart Transmitter devices support .............................................................................................. 338
17.1.78 Model MU-TAIH22/23/62 FTAs ................................................................................................. 338
17.1.79 Two-wire 4-20 mA transmitters ................................................................................................... 339
17.1.80 Current limiting resistors ............................................................................................................. 339
17.1.81 Zener barriers ............................................................................................................................... 339
17.1.82 AI Adapter applications for the models MU-TAIH22, MU-TAIH23, and MU-TAIH62 HLAI 339
17.1.83 Vertical bus bar ............................................................................................................................ 340
17.1.84 Self-powered transmitters ............................................................................................................ 340
17.1.85 Smart Transmitter Interface IOPs ................................................................................................ 340

9
CONTENTS

17.1.86 External power source ................................................................................................................. 340

17.1.87 Model MU-TAIH01 high level analog input FTA connection diagram ...................................... 341
17.1.88 Model MU-TAIH02 high level analog input FTA connection diagram ...................................... 342
17.1.89 Model MU-TAIH03 high level analog input FTA connection diagram ...................................... 343
17.1.90 Model MU-TAIH04 HART-compatible HLAI FTA assembly and connection drawing ............ 344
17.1.91 Model MU-TAIH12 high level analog input FTA connection diagram ...................................... 345
17.1.92 Model MU-TAIH13 high level analog input FTA connection diagram ...................................... 346
17.1.93 Model MU-TAIH14/15 HART-compatible HLAI FTA assembly and connection drawing ....... 347
17.1.94 Model MU-TAIH22 enhanced power HLAI FTA connection diagram ...................................... 348
17.1.95 Model MU-TAIH23 enhanced power HLAI FTA connection diagram ...................................... 349
17.1.96 Model MU-TAIH52 high level analog input FTA connection diagram ...................................... 350
17.1.97 Model MU-TAIH53 high level analog input FTA connection diagram ...................................... 351
17.1.98 Model MU-TAIH54 HART-compatible HLAI FTA assembly and connection drawing ............ 352
17.1.99 Model MU-TAIH62 enhanced power HLAI FTA connection diagram ...................................... 353
17.1.100 AI Adapter applications ............................................................................................................. 353
17.1.101 Model MU-TAIH02 high level analog input FTA assembly layout .......................................... 354
17.1.102 Model MU-TAIH03 high level analog input FTA assembly layout .......................................... 355
17.1.103 Model MU-TAIH12 high level analog input FTA assembly layout .......................................... 355
17.1.104 Model MU-TAIH13 high level analog input FTA assembly layout .......................................... 356
17.1.105 Model MU-TAIH22 enhanced power high level analog input FTA assembly layout ............... 357
17.1.106 Model MU-TAIH23 enhanced power high level analog input FTA assembly layout ............... 358
17.1.107 Model MU-TAIH52 high level analog input FTA assembly layout .......................................... 359
17.1.108 Model MU-TAIH53 high level analog input FTA assembly layout .......................................... 360
17.1.109 Model MU-TAIH62 enhanced power high level analog input FTA assembly layout ............... 361
17.1.110 Analog Input Open Wire Detection ........................................................................................... 361
17.1.111 Connecting 3-Wire and 4-Wire Transmitters to HLAI FTAs ..................................................... 362
17.1.112 Allowable Field Wiring Resistance ........................................................................................... 363
17.1.113 Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) Applications ........................................................................ 364
17.1.114 Model MU-TAIH22/23/62 FTAs ............................................................................................... 364
17.1.115 Maximum allowable field resistance ......................................................................................... 365
17.1.116 Model MU-TAIH01 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications connection diagram ......... 365
17.1.117 Model MU-TAIH02 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications connection diagram ......... 366
17.1.118 Model MU-TAIH12 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications connection diagram ......... 367
17.1.119 Model MU-TAIH22 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications connection diagram ......... 368
17.1.120 Model MU-TAIH52 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications connection diagram ......... 369
17.1.121 Model MU-TAIH62 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications connection diagram ......... 370
17.1.122 Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) FTA Wiring ......................................................................... 370
17.1.123 STI FTAs and associated hardware ........................................................................................... 371
17.1.124 STI_MV IOP ............................................................................................................................. 371
17.1.125 Connection diagrams and assembly layout ................................................................................ 371
17.1.126 Self-powered transmitters .......................................................................................................... 372
17.1.127 Model MU-TSTX03 smart transmitter interface (STI) FTA connection diagram .................... 372
17.1.128 Model MU-TSTX13 smart transmitter interface (STI) FTA connection diagram .................... 373
17.1.129 Model MU-TSTX53 smart transmitter interface (STI) FTA connection diagram .................... 374
17.1.130 Model MU-TSTX03 smart transmitter interface (STI) FTA assembly layout .......................... 375
17.1.131 Model MU-TSTX13 smart transmitter interface (STI) FTA assembly layout .......................... 376
17.1.132 Model MU-TSTX53 smart transmitter interface (STI) FTA assembly layout .......................... 377
17.2 Analog Output (AO) FTA wiring ................................................................................................................. 378
17.2.1 Standby Manual device connectors ............................................................................................... 382
17.2.2 HART connector, MU/MC-THAO11 only .................................................................................... 383
17.2.3 Model MU-TAOX01/MU-TAOX02 analog output FTA connection diagram .............................. 383
17.2.4 Model MU-TAOX12 analog output FTA connection diagram ...................................................... 384
17.2.5 Model MU-TAOX52 analog output FTA connection diagram ...................................................... 385
17.2.6 Model MU-TAOX02 analog output FTA assembly layout ........................................................... 386

10 www.honeywell.com
 CONTENTS

17.2.7 Model MU-TAOX12 analog output FTA assembly layout ........................................................... 387
17.2.8 Model MU-TAOX52 analog output FTA assembly layout ........................................................... 388
17.2.9 Model MU-TAOY22 analog output FTA connection diagram (non-CE compliant) .................... 389
17.2.10 Model MU-TAOY22 analog output FTA connection diagram (CE compliant) (Reference for
MU-TAOY24 and MU-TAOY25 HART-compatible FTAs) ............................................................... 390
17.2.11 Model MU-TAOY23 analog output FTA connection diagram (non-CE compliant) ................... 391
17.2.12 Model MU-TAOY52 analog output FTA connection diagram (non-CE compliant) .................. 392
17.2.13 Model MU-TAOY52 analog output FTA connection diagram (CE compliant) (Reference for
MU-TAOY54 and MU-TAOY55 HART-compatible FTAs) ............................................................... 393
17.2.14 Model MU-TAOY53 analog output FTA connection diagram (non-CE compliant) .................. 394
17.2.15 Model MU-TAOY22 analog output FTA assembly layout (CE compliant) (Reference for
MU-TAOY24 and MU-TAOY25 HART-compatible FTAs) ............................................................... 395
17.2.16 Model MU-TAOY23 analog output FTA assembly layout (non-CE compliant) ........................ 396
17.2.17 Model MU-TAOY52 analog output FTA assembly layout (non-CE compliant) ........................ 397
17.2.18 Model MU-TAOY52 analog output FTA assembly layout (CE compliant) (Reference for
MU-TAOY54 and MU-TAOY55 HART-compatible FTAs) ............................................................... 398
17.2.19 Model MU-TAOY53 analog output FTA assembly layout (non-CE compliant) ........................ 399
17.2.20 Model MU-THAO11 analog output FTA connection diagram (CE compliant) .......................... 400
17.2.21 Model MU-THAO11 analog output FTA assembly layout (CE compliant) ............................... 401
17.3 Digital Input (DI) FTA Wiring ..................................................................................................................... 402
17.3.1 24 Vdc Digital Input (DI) FTAs .................................................................................................... 402
17.3.2 Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly .................................................................................. 403
17.3.3 Model MU-TDPR02 assembly layout ........................................................................................... 405
17.3.4 Model MU-TDPR02 assembly schematic ..................................................................................... 406
17.3.5 Connection diagrams and assembly layouts .................................................................................. 406
17.3.6 Model MU-TDID11/12/52/72 FTAs .............................................................................................. 407
17.3.7 24 Vdc power source connections ................................................................................................. 407
17.3.8 Vertical bus bar for field wiring cable shield grounding ............................................................... 407
17.3.9 Model MU-TDID11, 24 Vdc digital input FTA connection diagram ............................................ 408
17.3.10 Model MU-TDID12, 24 Vdc digital input FTA connection diagram .......................................... 409
17.3.11 Model MU-TDID52/72, 24 Vdc digital input FTA connection diagram ..................................... 410
17.3.12 Model MU-TDID12, 24 Vdc digital input FTA assembly layout ............................................... 411
17.3.13 Model MU-TDID52, 24 Vdc digital input FTA assembly layout ............................................... 412
17.3.14 Model MU-TDID72, 24 Vdc digital input FTA assembly layout ............................................... 413
17.3.15 Model MU-TDIY22/62 FTAs ...................................................................................................... 413
17.3.16 Model MU-TDIY22, 24 Vdc digital input FTA connection diagram .......................................... 414
17.3.17 Model MU-TDIY62, 24 Vdc digital input FTA connection diagram .......................................... 415
17.3.18 Model MU-TDIY22, 24 Vdc digital input FTA assembly layout ............................................... 416
17.3.19 Model MU-TDIY62, 24 Vdc digital input FTA assembly layout ............................................... 417
17.3.20 120 Vac Digital Input FTAs ......................................................................................................... 417
17.3.21 CE Compliance for 120 Vac Digital Input FTAs ......................................................................... 417
17.3.22 IOP compatibility for 120 Vac Digital Input FTAs ...................................................................... 418
17.3.23 Connection diagrams and assembly layouts for 120 Vac Digital Input FTAs ............................. 418
17.3.24 Proper cabling for 120 Vac Digital Input FTAs ........................................................................... 419
17.3.25 Vertical bus bar usage .................................................................................................................. 419
17.3.26 Excessive cable capacitance ........................................................................................................ 419
17.3.27 Model MU-TDIA11, 120 Vac digital input FTA connection diagram ........................................ 420
17.3.28 Model MU-TDIA12, 120 Vac digital input FTA connection diagram ........................................ 421
17.3.29 Model MU-TDIA52, 120 Vac digital input FTA connection diagram ........................................ 422
17.3.30 Model MU-TDIA72, 120 Vac digital input FTA connection diagram ........................................ 423
17.3.31 Model MU-TDIA12, 120 Vac digital input FTA assembly layout .............................................. 424
17.3.32 Model MU-TDIA52, 120 Vac digital input FTA assembly layout .............................................. 425
17.3.33 Model MU-TDIA72, 120 Vac digital input FTA assembly layout .............................................. 426
17.3.34 Cable Capacitance ....................................................................................................................... 426
17.3.35 240 Vac Digital Input FTAs ......................................................................................................... 427

11
CONTENTS

17.3.36 CE Compliance for 240 Vac Digital Input FTAs ......................................................................... 427
17.3.37 IOP compatibility for 240 Vac Digital Input FTAs ...................................................................... 428
17.3.38 Connection diagrams and assembly layouts for 240 Vac Digital Input FTAs ............................. 428
17.3.39 Model MU-TDIA21, 240 Vac digital input FTA Connection Diagram ...................................... 429
17.3.40 Model MU-TDIA22, 240 Vac digital input FTA Connection Diagram ...................................... 430
17.3.41 Model MU-TDIA62, 240 Vac digital input FTA Connection Diagram ...................................... 431
17.3.42 Model MU-TDIA22, 240 Vac digital input FTA assembly layout .............................................. 432
17.3.43 Model MU-TDIA62, 240 Vac digital input FTA assembly layout .............................................. 433
17.4 Digital Output (DO) Wiring ......................................................................................................................... 434
17.4.1 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output (DO) FTAs ............................................................................ 434
17.4.2 CE Compliance for 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output (DO) FTAs ............................................ 434
17.4.3 IOP compatibility for 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output (DO) FTAs ........................................ 435
17.4.4 Recommended installation practices ............................................................................................. 435
17.4.5 Signals internally referenced to ground ......................................................................................... 436
17.4.6 Diode suppression .......................................................................................................................... 436
17.4.7 Field circuit fuses ........................................................................................................................... 436
17.4.8 Use approved cable ........................................................................................................................ 436
17.4.9 24 Vdc connections ........................................................................................................................ 436
17.4.10 TB1-18 connection ...................................................................................................................... 436
17.4.11 Model MU-TDON11/MU-TDON12, 24 Vdc nonisolated DO FTA connection diagram ........... 437
17.4.12 Model MU-TDON52, 24 Vdc nonisolated digital output FTA connection diagram ................... 438
17.4.13 Model MU-TDON12, 24 Vdc nonisolated digital output FTA assembly layout ........................ 439
17.4.14 Model MU-TDOA52, 24 Vdc nonisolated digital output FTA assembly layout ........................ 440
17.4.15 24 Vdc Isolated Digital Output FTAs .......................................................................................... 440
17.4.16 External 24 Vdc power source ..................................................................................................... 441
17.4.17 FTA fuse protection ..................................................................................................................... 441
17.4.18 Model MU-TDOY22, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA connection diagram ......................... 442
17.4.19 Model MU-TDOY62, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA connection diagram ......................... 443
17.4.20 Model MU-TDOY22, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA assembly layout .............................. 444
17.4.21 Model MU-TDOY62, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA assembly layout .............................. 445
17.4.22 3-30 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output (DO) FTAs ........................................................................ 445
17.4.23 Model MU-TDOD11/MU-TDOD12, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection
diagram ................................................................................................................................................ 447
17.4.24 Model MU-TDOD13, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram ................. 448
17.4.25 Model MU-TDOD14, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram ................. 449
17.4.26 Model MU-TDOD52, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram ................. 450
17.4.27 Model MU-TDOD53, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram ................. 451
17.4.28 Model MU-TDOD54, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram ................. 452
17.4.29 Model MU-TDOD12, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout ....................... 453
17.4.30 Model MU-TDOD13, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout ....................... 454
17.4.31 Model MU-TDOD14, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout ....................... 455
17.4.32 Model MU-TDOD52, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout ....................... 456
17.4.33 Model MU-TDOD53, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout ....................... 457
17.4.34 Model MU-TDOD54, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout ....................... 458
17.4.35 31-200 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output (DO) FTAs .................................................................... 458
17.4.36 Observe polarity ........................................................................................................................... 459
17.4.37 Signals subject to electrical codes ............................................................................................... 459
17.4.38 Vertical bus bars ........................................................................................................................... 460
17.4.39 Cable shield connections ............................................................................................................. 460
17.4.40 Connection schemes .................................................................................................................... 460
17.4.41 Model MU-TDOD21/MU-TDOD22, 31-200 Vdc SS DO FTA connection diagram ................. 461
17.4.42 Model MU-TDOD23, 31-200 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram ............. 462
17.4.43 Model MU-TDOD62, 31-200 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram ............. 463
17.4.44 Model MU-TDOD63, 31-200 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram ............. 464
17.4.45 Model MU-TDOD22, 31-200 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout ................... 465

12 www.honeywell.com
 CONTENTS

17.4.46 Model MU-TDOD23, 31-200 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout ................... 466
17.4.47 Model MU-TDOD62, 31-200 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout ................... 467
17.4.48 Model MU-TDOD63, 31-200 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout ................... 468
17.4.49 120/240 Vac Solid-State Digital Output (DO) FTAs ................................................................... 468
17.4.50 Power phase ................................................................................................................................. 470
17.4.51 Surge current and recovery time .................................................................................................. 470
17.4.52 Solid-state relay ratings ............................................................................................................... 470
17.4.53 Power Factor calculation ............................................................................................................. 470
17.4.54 Vertical bus bar ............................................................................................................................ 471
17.4.55 Model MU-TDOA11/MU-TDOA12, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA connection
diagram ................................................................................................................................................ 471
17.4.56 Model MU-TDOA13, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram ............ 472
17.4.57 Model MU-TDOA52, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram ............ 473
17.4.58 Model MU-TDOA53, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram ............ 474
17.4.59 Model MU-TDOA12, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout .................. 475
17.4.60 Model MU-TDOA13, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout .................. 476
17.4.61 Model MU-TDOA52, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout .................. 477
17.4.62 Model MU-TDOA53, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout .................. 478
17.4.63 120 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Digital Output (DO) FTAs .................................................................... 478
17.4.64 IOP compatibility ......................................................................................................................... 479
17.4.65 Electrical codes ............................................................................................................................ 479
17.4.66 Out of phase power ...................................................................................................................... 480
17.4.67 Vertical bus bar ............................................................................................................................ 480
17.4.68 Cable shield grounding ................................................................................................................ 480
17.4.69 Contact Arc Suppression ............................................................................................................. 480
17.4.70 Normally open/closed relay contact selection ............................................................................. 480
17.4.71 Model MU-TDOR11/MU-TDOR12, 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA connection
diagram ................................................................................................................................................ 481
17.4.72 Model MU-TDOR52, 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA connection diagram ............. 482
17.4.73 Model MU-TDOR12, 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly layout -non-CE
compliant ............................................................................................................................................. 483
17.4.74 Model MU-TDOR12, 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly layout -CE
compliant ............................................................................................................................................. 484
17.4.75 Model MU-TDOR52, 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly layout -non-CE
compliant ............................................................................................................................................. 485
17.4.76 Model MU-TDOR52, 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly layout -CE
compliant ............................................................................................................................................. 486
17.4.77 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Digital Output (DO) FTAs .................................................................... 486
17.4.78 Electrical codes ............................................................................................................................ 487
17.4.79 Vertical bus bar and cable shield grounding ................................................................................ 487
17.4.80 Contact Arc Suppression ............................................................................................................. 487
17.4.81 Model MU-TDOY23/63 FTAs .................................................................................................... 487
17.4.82 FTA configuration pinning .......................................................................................................... 487
17.4.83 FTA cabling diagram ................................................................................................................... 488
17.4.84 Normally open/closed relay contact selection ............................................................................. 488
17.4.85 Reverse voltage suppression ........................................................................................................ 489
17.4.86 Model MU-TDOY23, 240 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA connection diagram ............. 490
17.4.87 Model MU-TDOY63, 240 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA connection diagram ............. 491
17.4.88 Model MU-TDOY23, 240 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly layout ................... 492
17.4.89 Model MU-TDOY63, 240 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly layout ................... 493
17.4.90 Contact Arc Suppression ............................................................................................................. 493
17.4.91 Contact arc suppressor selection .................................................................................................. 494
18 Appendix D - GI FTA Reference ...................................................................................................... 497
18.1 High Level Analog Input (HLAI) GI FTA Wiring ....................................................................................... 498

13
CONTENTS

18.1.1 FTA Compatibility ......................................................................................................................... 498

18.1.2 Field wiring input signals for High Level Analog Input (HLAI) .................................................. 499
18.1.3 Model MU-GAIH12/82 high level analog input GI FTA assembly layout ................................... 500
18.1.4 Model MU-GAIH12/82 high level analog input GI FTA connection diagram ............................. 501
18.1.5 Model MU-GAIH13/83 high level analog input GI FTA assembly layout ................................... 502
18.1.6 Model MU-GAIH13/83 high level analog input GI FTA connection diagram ............................. 503
18.1.7 Model MU-GAIH14/84 high level analog input GI FTA assembly layout ................................... 504
18.1.8 Model MU-GAIH14/84 high level analog input GI FTA connection diagram ............................. 505
18.1.9 Model MU-GAIH22/92 high level analog input GI FTA assembly layout ................................... 506
18.1.10 Model MU-GAIH22/92 high level analog input GI FTA connection diagram ........................... 507
18.2 Analog Output (AO) GI FTA Wiring ........................................................................................................... 508
18.2.1 Field wiring input signals for Analog Output (AO) ...................................................................... 508
18.2.2 Model MU-GAOX02, MU-GAOX72, MU-GAOX12 and MU-GAOX82 analog output GI
FTA assembly layout ........................................................................................................................... 510
18.2.3 Model MU-GAOX02 and MU-GAOX72 analog output GI FTA connection diagram ................. 511
18.2.4 Model MU-GAOX12 and MU-GAOX82 analog output GI FTA connection diagram ................ 512
18.2.5 Model MC-GHAO11 and MU-GHAO11 FTAs ............................................................................ 512
18.2.6 Model MU-GHAO11 analog output/HART GI FTA connection diagram -CE compliant ............ 513
18.2.7 Model MU-GHAO11 analog output/HART GI FTA assembly layout -CE compliant ................. 514
18.2.8 Model MC-GHAO21 and MU-GHAO21 FTAs ............................................................................ 514
18.2.9 MU/MC-GHAO21 analog output/HART GI FTA assembly layout and connection diagram -
CE compliant ....................................................................................................................................... 515
18.3 Digital Input (DI) GI FTA Wiring ................................................................................................................ 516
18.3.1 Input signal phase and FTA features .............................................................................................. 516
18.3.2 Field wiring input signals .............................................................................................................. 517
18.3.3 Model MU-GDID12 and MU-GDID82 digital input GI FTA assembly layout ............................ 518
18.3.4 Model MU-GDID12 and MU-GDID82 digital input GI FTA connection diagram ...................... 519
18.3.5 Model MU-GDID13 and MU-GDID83 digital input GI FTA assembly layout ............................ 520
18.3.6 Model MU-GDID13 and MU-GDID83 digital input GI FTA connection diagram ...................... 521
18.4 Digital Output (DO) GI FTA Wiring ............................................................................................................ 522
18.4.1 Field wiring output signals ............................................................................................................ 523
18.4.2 Model MU-GDOD12 and MU-GDOD82 digital output GI FTA assembly layout ....................... 523
18.4.3 Model MU-GDOD12 and MU-GDOD82 digital output GI FTA connection diagram ................. 524
18.4.4 Model MU-GDOL12 and MU-GDOL82 digital output GI FTA assembly layout ........................ 525
18.4.5 Model MU-GDOL12 and MU-GDOL82 digital output GI FTA connection diagram .................. 526
18.5 Combiner Panel, Model MU-GLFD02 ......................................................................................................... 527
18.5.1 Combiner panel assembly layout ................................................................................................... 527
18.5.2 LFD input connectors .................................................................................................................... 527
18.5.3 IOP output connectors ................................................................................................................... 527
18.6 Marshalling Panel, Model MU-GMAR52 .................................................................................................... 528
18.6.1 Marshalling panel assembly layout ............................................................................................... 528
18.6.2 Marshalling panel cabinet interconnection .................................................................................... 529
18.6.3 Signals available at screw terminals .............................................................................................. 529
18.6.4 High level analog input FTAs ........................................................................................................ 529
18.6.5 4-20 mA HLAI FTA signals .......................................................................................................... 530
18.6.6 Digital input FTAs ......................................................................................................................... 532
18.6.7 Digital output FTAs ....................................................................................................................... 533
18.6.8 Model MU-GDOL12/82 configuration ......................................................................................... 534
18.7 Power Distribution Assembly, Model MU-GPRD02 ................................................................................... 536
18.7.1 Power Cables ................................................................................................................................. 536
18.7.2 CE Compliant power cable ............................................................................................................ 537
18.7.3 Power cable model list summary ................................................................................................... 537
18.7.4 Power distribution assembly mounting ......................................................................................... 537
19 Notices .............................................................................................................................................. 539

14 www.honeywell.com
 CONTENTS

19.1 Documentation feedback .............................................................................................................................. 540

19.2 How to report a security vulnerability .......................................................................................................... 541
19.3 Support and other contacts ............................................................................................................................ 542
19.4 Training classes ............................................................................................................................................. 545

15
CONTENTS

16 www.honeywell.com
1 About this document

This document provides information about installing and wiring the C200/C200E Controller chassis and chassis
mounted components including the Series A Chassis I/O Modules. It also includes information about installing
and wiring the Process Manager I/O components.

Revision history
Revision Date Description
A December 2013 Initial release of document.

17
1 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

18 www.honeywell.com
2 Pre-installation Considerations

Experion Control hardware is an umbrella term used to refer to all the chassis-mounted components, including
the chassis, which can be supplied with an Experion system. This includes the Control Processor module
(CPM), the Redundancy Module (RM) and all the Chassis Input/Output Modules just to mention a few.
The C200E Controller is an enhanced C200 Controller with additional user memory and an enhanced function
block set. The C200E Controller provides increased user memory from 4 MB to 16 MB.

Attention
This equipment shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC), ANSI/
NFPA 70, or the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC), C22.1. It is supplied as “open equipment” that is intended to be
mounted on a sub-panel within an enclosure. The suitability of the enclosure and installed system shall be acceptable
to the local “authority having jurisdiction,” as defined in the NEC, or “authorized person” as defined in the CEC.

19
2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

2.1 Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) Function Guidelines

The Series A chassis control hardware modules, as well as the Series A and Series H Rail I/O modules, are
designed so that removal and insertion under power will not result in damage to the module hardware. Given the
wide variety of process control equipment configurations and site-specific control strategies, users are
responsible for determining the possible impact of using RIUP on their process and facilities. The following
sections list some things you must consider before initiating a RIUP of any module.

WARNING
Unless the location is known to be non-hazardous, as determined by a combustible gas detector, do not:
• connect or disconnect cables,
• connect or disconnect Removable Terminal Blocks (RTBs), and
• remove or insert modules under power.

Consider the following while using RIUP:

• Removal and insertion under power may be associated with direct mechanical wear as well as electrical
arcing which in turn may cause excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector.
Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation. The module connectors are
rated for a total of 50 insertions under power for the entire life of the unit.
• It is difficult to predict if or when a RIUP operation may trigger an unexpected reaction, fault or reset in
another module. The user may not have anticipated the effect that removal of a module may have on a
running control strategy. Modules in the same chassis, as well as peer modules in other chassis, which
expect the presence of the removed module, may react adversely to a module RIUP.
• While the probability of problems occurring during RIUP is less than five percent, the severity of the
problem could be high, such as the loss of another module in the chassis. For example, RIUP of a
Redundancy Module could affect the C200 controller.
• Given the preceding considerations, never use RIUP as the preferred method for resetting an individual
module, triggering a switchover, or exiting the synchronized state in a redundant controller chassis.
• If you do RIUP a module, be sure you fully re-insert the module so it is flush with the chassis to avoid errors
due to poor backplane connections.
The following table lists any special considerations for RIUP of a given module.

If Module Type Is . . . Then, Consider This . . .

Battery Extension Module (BEM) Be sure line power is supplied to the chassis or CPM battery is installed.
C200/C200E (CPM) Be sure process is in a safe operating mode.
ControlNet Interface Module (CNI) • Removal of a communications module will affect the process.
• Be sure to insert the CNI gently to allow it to power up properly. This usually is
not an issue for a CNI inserted in the secondary chassis of a redundant chassis
pair.
Ethernet Communication Module Removal of a communications module will affect the process.
Fault Tolerant Ethernet Module Removal of a communications module will affect the process.
(FTEB)
I/O Link Interface Module (IOLIM) Removal of an I/O interface module will affect the process.
Peer Control Data Interface Module Removal of a communications module will affect the process.
(PCDI)
PROFIBUS Interface Module Removal of an I/O interface module will affect the process.
(PIFM)

20 www.honeywell.com
 2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

Redundancy Module (RM) • Place the chassis containing the RM in the secondary role
• Remove power from the chassis prior to removing and replacing the module
• With power off, remove and replace the Redundancy Module
Removable Terminal Block (RTB) • Shock hazard exists. If the RTB is installed onto the module while the field-side
power is applied, the RTB will be electrically live. Do not touch the RTB's
terminals. Failure to observe this caution may cause personal injury.
• When you remove or insert an RTB with field-side power applied, loss of
process control can occur. Exercise extreme caution when using this feature.
We recommend that field-side power be removed before installing the RTB onto
the module.
Serial Interface Module (SIM) Removal of a communications module will affect the process.
Series A Chassis I/O Module (IOM) The removal of an individual I/O module will break communications with that
module alone and will affect a running process control strategy.
Series A Rail I/O Gateway Removal of an I/O gateway module will affect the process.
Series A Rail I/O Module • Always remove field-side power before removing or inserting a Series A Rail
I/O module.
• The removal of an individual Rail I/O module will break communications with
that module alone and will affect a running process control strategy.
Series H Rail I/O Gateway Removal of an I/O gateway module will affect the process.
Series H Rail I/O Module • Always remove field-side power before removing or inserting a Series H Rail
I/O module.
• The removal of an individual Rail I/O module will break communications with
that module alone and will affect a running process control strategy.

21
2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

2.2 Wire selection criteria

• Supply wiring shall be copper conductors per NEC Table 310-16 or CEC Table 3, as applicable.
• Remote control and signal I/O wiring shall be Class 1, 75 0C (167 0F) copper conductors.
Since cable routes can vary from using plenum air returns to being buried underground, we suggest that you
work with a cable manufacturer to select the wiring that meets your particular installation requirements. If you
have access to the Internet, you can visit the Belden Wire and Cable Company web site at http://
www.belden.com for helpful technical data on a wide variety of wire and cable types.

22 www.honeywell.com
 2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

2.3 Protective Earth (PE) ground guidelines

A PE ground provides protection against fire and electric shock hazards.
A wire shall be connected from the ground terminal on the chassis power supply to the PE ground bolt attached
to the chassis. A wire shall be connected from the PE ground bolt attached to the chassis to the PE ground on
the power source to provide the PE (safety) ground for the Experion system. See the following figures for
typical PE ground connections for single and multiple chassis installations, respectively.
Observe the following rules when making PE ground connections.
• Use an eight- inch length of 14 AWG (2.1 mm2) wire, color coded green with one or more yellow stripes,
with a #8 lug for the connection between the chassis power supply ground and the PE ground bolt.
• Use a suitable length of 14 AWG (2.1 mm2) wire, color coded green with one or more yellow stripes, with a
#8 lug for the connection between the chassis PE ground bolt and power source PE ground conductor.
• Use a nut with captive star washer to secure the PE ground lug.
• Tighten the nut on the terminal to a torque of 12 inch-pounds (1.36 Newton-meters).
• Strip 1/4-inch of insulation from end for ground wire for power supply terminal connection.
• For a multiple chassis installation, the PE ground conductors shall be suitably terminated at the terminal
block for the power source service.

Figure 1: Typical ground connections for single-chassis installation.

23
2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

Figure 2: Typical ground connections for multiple-chassis installation.

24 www.honeywell.com
 2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

2.4 Ground bus connection guidelines

If a ground bus has not been supplied with the enclosure, you will have to supply your own. Connect each
functional chassis-ground conductor directly from each chassis to an individual bolt on the ground bus, as
shown in Figure 2. Use 8 AWG (8.3 mm2) wire or 1-inch (25.4 mm) copper braid for the conductor. The ground
bus is also connected to the PE ground terminal on the power source terminal block by a suitable length of 14
AWG (2.1 mm2) wire, color coded green with one or more yellow stripes.

CAUTION
Connect each ground wire to the ground bus individually. Do not stack one ground lug directly on top of the other
since:
• this connection can become loose due to compression of the metal lugs; and
• later removal of a chassis and its ground wire may require other ground wires to be temporarily removed;
interrupting those chassis ground connections.

Refer to the Planning for Bonding and Grounding section in the Control Hardware Planning Guide for more
information about chassis ground connections.

25
2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

2.5 Control hardware hazardous location classification

The Experion Control hardware is CSA Certified and FM Approved Nonincendive Equipment for installation in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C & D Hazardous (Classified) Locations. It is the user's responsibility to insure
that all parts of the system, and any other equipment in the Division 2 area, are listed for installation in a Class I,
Division 2 Hazardous (Classified) Location.

26 www.honeywell.com
 2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

2.6 About hazardous (classified) locations

Installation of electrical apparatus within hazardous (classified) locations of the United States is conducted
under the provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 500; and within Canada,
under the provisions of the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) C22.1, Part 1, Section 18.

2.6.1 Classifications
In both the United States and Canada, hazardous locations are classified into one of these three classes.

Class Description of Hazardous Location

I Presence of flammable gases or vapors may be present in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or
ignitable mixtures.
II Presence of combustible dusts, powders or grains.
III Presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings.

2.6.2 Divisions
The classes listed above are further classified into one of the following divisions based upon the level of risk
present.

Division Description of Risk

1 Locations in which hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors, or combustible dust in
suspension are continuously, intermittently or periodically present under normal operating conditions.
2 Locations in which flammable gases or vapors are present, but normally confined within closed containers
or systems from which they can escape only under abnormal or fault conditions. Combustible dusts are not
normally in suspension nor likely to be thrown into suspension.

For example, A Class III, Division 1 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers or material
processing combustible flyings are handled, manufactured or used. A Class III, Division 2 location is a location
in which easily ignitable fibers are stored or handled.

2.6.3 Groups
Flammable gases, vapors and ignitable dusts, fibers and flyings are classified into one of the following groups
according to the energy required to ignite the most easily-ignitable mixture within air.

Class I Description of Atmosphere

Group
A Atmospheres containing acetylene.
B Atmospheres containing hydrogen, fuel and combustible process gases containing more than 30 percent
hydrogen by volume, or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard.
C Atmospheres such as ethyl ether, ethylene, or gasses or vapors of equivalent hazard.
D Atmospheres such as acetone, ammonia, benzene, butane, cyclopropane, ethanol, gasoline, hexane,
methanol, methane, natural gas, naphtha, propane or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard.
Class II Description
Group
E Atmospheres containing combustible metal dusts including aluminum, magnesium, and their commercial
alloys, and other metals of similarly hazardous characteristics.

27
2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

Class I Description of Atmosphere

Group
F Atmospheres containing combustible carbonaceous dusts including carbon black, charcoal, coal or other
dusts that have been sensitized by other materials so that they present an explosion hazard.
G Atmospheres containing combustible dusts not included in Group E or F, including flour wood, grain, and
other dusts of similarly hazardous characteristics.

2.6.4 Methods of Protection

The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use in given locations.

Protection Concept Designation Permitted Use Principle

Explosionproof XP Division 1 & 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame.
Intrinsic Safety IS Division 1 & 2 Limit energy of sparks under normal and
fault conditions.
Pressurized Type X and Y Division 1 Keeps flammable gas out.
Pressurized Type Z Division 2 Keeps flammable gas out.
Nonincendive NI Division 2 No arcs, sparks or hot surfaces under
normal conditions

28 www.honeywell.com
 2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

2.7 Control hardware temperature classification guidelines

The temperature classification and marking of the Control hardware modules, and other equipment installed in
the Class I, Division 2 Hazardous (Classified) Location, shall not exceed the ignition temperature of the specific
gas or vapor to be encountered.
For information regarding ignition temperatures of gases and vapors, see the Manual for Classification of Gases,
Vapors, and Dusts for Electrical Equipment in Hazardous (Classified) Locations, NFPA 497M, and the Guide to
Fire Hazard Properties of Flammable Liquids, Gases, and Volatile Solids, NFPA 325.
The Control hardware is rated for use in a 60 0C (140 0F) ambient unless otherwise marked on a module.

Attention
The temperature classification for the Control hardware is determined by the “worst case” temperature classification
for any module installed in the system. Each module is marked with a temperature identification number or “T” code.
The lowest “T” code or highest maximum temperature determines the temperature classification for the system. It is
the user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the Control hardware, and any other apparatus in the same area,
for installation in a Class I, Division 2 Hazardous (Classified) Location based on the worst case temperature
classification.

2.7.1 Temperature Identification Numbers/Codes

Electric equipment suitable for ambient temperatures exceeding 40 0C (104 0F) shall be marked with both the
maximum ambient temperature and the operating temperature or temperature range at that ambient temperature.
The temperature range shall be marked in identification numbers or “T” codes, as shown in NEC Article 500,
Table 500-3(d), CEC Section 18, and Rule 18-052. The following table lists the identification numbers per the
NEC Table 500-3(d) for reference.

Temperature Maximum Temperature

Identification Number Degrees C Degrees F
T1 450 842
T2 300 572
T2A 280 536
T2B 260 500
T2C 230 446
T2D 215 419
T3 200 392
T3A 180 356
T3B 165 329
T3C 160 320
T4 135 275
T4A 120 248
T5 100 212
T6 85 185

29
2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

2.8 Control hardware component handling guidelines

Electrostatic discharge
Electrostatic discharge can damage integrated circuits or semiconductors if you touch backpanel connector pins.
Follow these guidelines when you handle a module:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge static potential
• Wear an approved wrist-strap grounding device
• Do not touch the backpanel connector or connector pins
• Do not touch circuit components inside the module
• If available, use a static safe workstation
• When not in use, keep the module in its static shield box or bag

The procedures in this Guide assume that:

• You have completed all pertinent planning activities as outlined in the Control Hardware Planning Guide.
• You have reviewed the Pre-installation Considerations in this Guide.
• You have received, unpacked, and checked your Control hardware.
• You have common everyday tools and hardware on hand.
• Only technically qualified personnel will install the equipment.
• You are responsible for adhering to all National Codes and local ordinances that govern the installation of
equipment at your facility.
• All equipment will be installed in its unpowered state.

2.8.1 To begin installing your Control hardware

If your Control hardware… Then…

has been pre-installed in enclosures by follow the procedures for moving and installation as outlined in “Enclosure
Honeywell, Installation” on page 33 in this guide.
has been pre-installed in enclosures by follow the procedures for moving and installing as outlined by their
someone other than Honeywell, documentation. (Note: “Enclosure Installation” on page 33 in this guide can
also serve as a guide for this operation.)
has been ordered as individual first install your enclosure as defined in your site/project and equipment-
components, supplier engineering documentation. Use the procedures defined in this
document for specific installation tasks, but first review “To begin installing
individual Control hardware components” on page 30.

2.8.2 To begin installing individual Control hardware components

If you are installing… Then…

Chassis, Follow the “Chassis Installation” on page 45 procedures in this guide.
Controller Modules, Follow the appropriate “Controller Module Installation and Removal” on
page 53 procedures in this guide.
Redundancy Modules, Follow the “Redundancy Module Installation and Removal” on page 65
procedures in this guide.
I/O Modules, Follow the appropriate “I/O Module Installation, Wiring, and Removal” on
page 81 or “Process Manager I/O Installation and Wiring” on page 177
procedures in this guide.

30 www.honeywell.com
 2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

If you are installing… Then…

Serial Interface Modules, Follow the “Serial Interface Module Installation and Removal” on page 103
procedures in this guide.
ControlNet Communication Modules, Follow the appropriate “ControlNet Communication Module Installation and
Removal” on page 117 procedures in this guide.
Ethernet Communication Modules, Follow the appropriate “Ethernet Communication Module Installation and
Removal” on page 127 procedures in this guide.
Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge Modules Refer to the Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge Implementation Guide for
information.
Battery Extension Modules Follow the “Battery Extension Module Installation and Removal” on page 137
procedures in this guide.
Power Supplies, Follow the appropriate “Power Supply Installation and Removal” on page 145
procedures in this guide.
I/O Link Interface Module Follow the appropriate “I/O Link Interface Module Installation and Removal”
on page 161 procedures in this guide.

31
2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

32 www.honeywell.com
3 Enclosure Installation

Your enclosure(s) may be moved one of four ways:

• “Moving by Fork Lift” on page 34,
• “Moving by Mobile Lifter” on page 35,
• “Moving by Rollers” on page 38, or
• Crane, see “Moving by Crane - Using a Transport Skid” on page 39 or “Moving by Crane - Using Eyebolts”
on page 41.

CAUTION
Please note the following precautions:
• Follow any specific procedures or requirements provided by your enclosure supplier.
• When moving an enclosure, use lifters with a capacity of 1100 kg (2500 pounds) or more.
• If your enclosure doors are not recessed, tilting the unit more than 45 degrees, front or back, may damage the
doors.

Related topics
“Moving by Fork Lift” on page 34
“Moving by Mobile Lifter” on page 35
“Moving by Rollers” on page 38
“Moving by Crane - Using a Transport Skid” on page 39
“Moving by Crane - Using Eyebolts” on page 41
“Leveling and Bolting Down Enclosures” on page 42
“Installing the Internal Infrastructure” on page 43

33
3 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

3.1 Moving by Fork Lift

The equipment, on the original shipping skid, is moved by forklift to the final location as outlined in the
following procedure.
1 Move the equipment to the electronics room by forklift; remove the forklift.
2 Open the cabinet doors. Locate the skid bolts, and remove them.
3 Stack lumber against the pallet to a matching height.

4 Manually move the equipment onto the lumber.

5 Tip the cabinet weight onto the lumber, and then pull out the skid.
6 Tip the cabinet off the lumber and onto the floor; remove the lumber.
7 Manually move the cabinet to the exact and final position.

34 www.honeywell.com
 3 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

3.2 Moving by Mobile Lifter

The equipment is removed from the shipping skid, then placed on a transport skid made from angle iron. It is
then moved with a mobile lifter using the procedure in the table below.
1 Remove any steel bands, turnbuckles, and cables securing the equipment to the shipping skid.
2 Open the cabinet doors, and locate the bolts holding the cabinets to the shipping skid; remove them, and
close the doors.
3 One side at a time, tilt the equipment slightly; slide-out one of the angle irons used to make up a transport
skid underneath the cabinet.

4 Repeat Steps 1-3 for the other angle.

5 Insert a strip of heavy cardboard between each angle-iron and the equipment finish.
6 Tighten the angle irons against the cabinet by tapping slightly.
7 Insert and tighten two 12 mm (1/2 in.) minimum, threaded cross-rods as illustrated.

35
3 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

8 Spread the lifter forks to 0.8 m (32 in.) centers and put them under each cross rod. Place the fork dowel
between the cross-rods and the cabinet, just touching the cross-rods as illustrated.

9 Place wooden spacer blocks along the forks. They should be long enough to press the cross-rods against the
fork dowels.
10 Position a protective plate, using braces as illustrated. Be sure that the plate does not press against handles or
other cabinet hardware.
11 Raise both lifter forks evenly until the equipment clears the shipping skid; pull the skid out of the way.
12 Wheel the equipment to the final position in the electronics room; lower it to the floor.

36 www.honeywell.com
 3 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

13 Pull out the mobile lifters. Dismantle and remove the angle-iron transport skid.
14 Manually place the cabinet in the exact and final position.

37
3 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

3.3 Moving by Rollers

The cabinet is moved to its final destination with pipe rollers under a transport skid made from angle iron. Use
the procedure outlined in the table below.
1 Use one of the previous methods to move the cabinet to a location where rollers are to be used.
2 Build the angle-iron transport skid as illustrated.
3 Roll the cabinet to the final location. A minimum of three pipes must be under the transport skid at all times.

4 When the cabinet is near its final location, tilt it back, then remove the pipes. Remove the middle pipe last.
5 Dismantle the transport skid, and position the cabinet manually to the exact and final location.

38 www.honeywell.com
 3 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

3.4 Moving by Crane - Using a Transport Skid

In this method, the cabinet is lifted into place with a crane; an angle-iron transport skid is used under each
cabinet. This procedure is described in the table below. See “Moving by Crane - Using Eyebolts” on page 41 in
this section for that procedure.
1 Remove any steel bands, turnbuckles, and cables securing the equipment to the shipping skid.
2 Open the cabinet's door and locate the bolts holding the cabinets to the shipping skid; remove them and close
the doors.
3 Tilt the equipment slightly, and slide one of the angle irons used to make up a transport skid underneath the
cabinet.
4 Repeat Steps 1-3 for the other angle.
5 Insert a strip of heavy cardboard between each angle iron and the equipment finish.
6 Tighten the angle irons against the cabinet by tapping slightly.
7 Insert and tighten two 12 mm (1/2 in.) minimum diameter, threaded cross-rods as illustrated.

8 Attach the appropriately sized spreader and cables as illustrated.

39
3 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

9 Lift and move the cabinet to near its final location.

10 Disconnect the crane's cables and spreader. Dismantle and remove the angle-iron transport skid.
11 Manually move the cabinet to its exact and final position.

40 www.honeywell.com
 3 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

3.5 Moving by Crane - Using Eyebolts

In this method, the cabinet is lifted into place with a crane, using lifting eyebolts you have installed on each
cabinet. This procedure is described in the table below. See “Moving by Crane - Using a Transport Skid” on
page 39 in this section for that procedure.
1 Remove any steel bands, turnbuckles, and cables securing the equipment to the shipping skid.
2 Open the cabinet doors, and locate the bolts holding the cabinets to the shipping skid; remove them, and
close the doors.
3 Attach the appropriately sized cables as illustrated

4 Lift and move the cabinet to near its final location.

5 Disconnect the crane's cables, and if necessary, manually move the cabinet to its exact and final position.

41
3 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

3.6 Leveling and Bolting Down Enclosures

3.6.1 Leveling
Many enclosures do not include levelers. It may be necessary to hand-fit shims underneath the cabinet in order
to make it sit solidly. Refer to any documentation that accompanied your enclosure.

3.6.2 Bolt Down

A cabinet typically has holes in the bottom for bolting it to a floor. Both filled and partially filled cabinets
should be bolted down. Cabinets that are bolted together are not easily moved, and may not require bolting
down.

42 www.honeywell.com
 3 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

3.7 Installing the Internal Infrastructure

Before proceeding, check to determine if any system infrastructure components, such as power and ground
buses (field-wire terminal panels or strips) and ControlNet taps and drop cables, need to be installed.
If Honeywell did not preconfigure your enclosure(s), you may need to install the following internal
infrastructure components yourself
• ground buses
• DIN-rails
• field-wiring terminal panels or strips
• ControlNet taps and drop cables
• power buses
• cabinet circuit breakers (not permitted in Class 1, Division 2 locations)
• cooling equipment (as required by application)
All of the previously mentioned system infrastructure components, except DIN-rails, should have been installed
during system cabling and wiring. For DIN-rail installation, refer to “Installing DIN-rails” on page 43 in this
guide.

3.7.1 Installing DIN-rails

One or more DIN-rails may be required in your enclosure to provide a mounting location for certain
components. Among other possible components, ControlNet taps are designed to optionally mount to a DIN-
rail. If your enclosure:
• Specified DIN-rails, then they should have been installed by your supplier or control system integrator
(CSI).
• Did not specify DIN-rails, then you may need to install them yourself. Refer to your enclosure and DIN-rail
supplier's documentation for installation details.

43
3 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

44 www.honeywell.com
4 Chassis Installation

Be sure you have reviewed the Pre-installation Considerations in this Guide and confirmed that you are
installing the chassis in the correct enclosure.
Check that the enclosure meets the minimum size requirements listed in Table 1 for the given chassis model to
ensure compliance with all approval body standards.

Attention
Be sure you provide proper thermal management inside all enclosure configurations to meet the ambient temperature
requirement for your application. The Control hardware is rated for use in a 60 0C (140 0F) ambient unless otherwise
marked on a module. Refer “Control hardware temperature classification guidelines” on page 29 in this document for
more information. Thermal management considerations include:
• Adhering to minimum enclosure size recommendations.
• Observing minimum spacing requirements for all hardware.
• Routing cables and wire trays so they are outside the unobstructed space around the hardware and not laying
cables on top of any hardware.
Using cooling equipment, such as fans and heat exchangers, as required to keep the temperature of the air exiting from
within one inch (25 mm) above the chassis from exceeding 70 0C (158 0F).

In addition to the chassis, make sure you have:

• M4 or M5 (#10 or #12) hardware - phillips screw and star washer or SEM screw (phillips screw with
attached star washer) - for chassis-mounting tabs (see Table 1)
• Phillips screwdriver
• Drill
• All Honeywell and site-specific documentation for your chassis

Table 1: Chassis-mounting tabs and fasteners and minimum enclosure sizes

This Model Chassis Has Requiring And, Minimum Enclosure

Size (W x H x D) is . . .
TC-FXX041or 4 mounting tabs 4 screws/washers or SEMs 50.7 x 50.7 x 20.3 cm
TC-FXX042 20 x 20 x 8 in
TC-FXX071 or 4 mounting tabs 4 screws/washers or SEMs 50.7 x 70 x 20.3 cm
TC-FXX072 20 x 24 x 8 in
TC-FXX101 or 6 mounting tabs 6 screws/washers or SEMs 76.2 x 50.7 x 20.3 cm
TC-FXX102 or 30 x 20 x 8 in
TK-FXX102
TC-FXX131 or 8 mounting tabs 8 screws/washers or SEMs 76.2 x 70 x 20.3
TC-FXX132 or 30 x 24 x 8 in
TK-FXX132

45
4 CHASSIS INSTALLATION

This Model Chassis Has Requiring And, Minimum Enclosure

Size (W x H x D) is . . .
TC-FXX171 or 8 mounting tabs 8 screws/washers or SEMs 82.2 x 76.2 x 20.3 cm
TC-FXX172 36 x 30 x 8 in

Related topics
“Mounting Space Requirements” on page 47
“Chassis-mounting Dimensions” on page 48
“Installing the Controller Chassis” on page 50
“Post Chassis Installation Tasks” on page 52

46 www.honeywell.com
 4 CHASSIS INSTALLATION

4.1 Mounting Space Requirements

Attention
Make sure you meet the minimum spacing requirements illustrated in Figure 3, when mounting your chassis.

Figure 3: Minimum chassis-mounting space requirements

47
4 CHASSIS INSTALLATION

4.2 Chassis-mounting Dimensions

Chassis Model Dimensions

All models -
Right-Side View

TC-FXX041
TC-FXX042
(With Power
Supply installed)

TC-FXX071
TC-FXX072
(With Power
Supply installed)

48 www.honeywell.com
 4 CHASSIS INSTALLATION

Chassis Model Dimensions

TC-FXX101
TC-FXX102
TK-FXX102
(With Power
Supply installed)

TC-FXX131
TC-FXX132
TK-FXX132
(With Power
Supply installed)

TC-FXX171
TC-FXX172
(With Power
Supply installed)

49
4 CHASSIS INSTALLATION

4.3 Installing the Controller Chassis

Use the following procedure to install the chassis on the back panel of the enclosure.

Attention
Your chassis may be mounted with either bolts or welded studs.

CAUTION
During the following procedure:
• If the chassis-mounting tabs do not lay flat before the screws are tightened, use additional washers as shims.
This will ensure that tightening the screws does not warp the chassis. Warping a chassis could damage the
backpanel, and cause poor connections.
• Do not drill holes for a chassis above an already installed chassis. Metal chips from drilling can damage or
short the backpanel, and short the backpanel card-edge connectors.

1 Reference the appropriate chassis mounting dimensions and measure and mark the location of the mounting
tab holes on the back panel. Or, if you have help, position the chassis in the desired location on the back
panel and use a center punch to mark the location of the mounting tab holes.
2 Using the marks made in Step 1, drill tap holes in the back panel of the enclosure for #10 (M4) or #12 (M5)
mounting screws.

3 Scrape paint off of the back panel so that continuity will exist between the back panel and the installed
chassis.
4 Put a split lock-washer and flat washer on a phillips screw and screw it into a top mounting hole so it is
secure, but not tight against the panel. Repeat as required for the remaining top mounting holes.

5 Align the chassis top mounting tab holes with the installed screws, slip the tabs over the screws, and slide
the chassis behind the washers, so it rests on the screws. Tighten the screws.

50 www.honeywell.com
 4 CHASSIS INSTALLATION

6 Leaving the far-left bottom tab open for functional ground connection, install the remaining bottom
mounting tab screw(s).

7 If your plan calls for Redundant Controllers, repeat this procedure to install the second chassis of the
redundant pair as well as the remote I/O chassis.

51
4 CHASSIS INSTALLATION

4.4 Post Chassis Installation Tasks

Following are the post chassis installation tasks:

Related topics
“Attach power supply and install modules” on page 52
“Make ground connections” on page 52

4.4.1 Attach power supply and install modules

Unless you ordered your chassis pre-configured from the factory, please attach the power supply and install the
modules as outlined in applicable sections of this Guide. Refer to Planning Your Chassis Configurations in the
Control Hardware Planning Guide for more information about chassis configuration, including default module
placement and redundant Controller considerations.

Attention
Users are responsible for checking that all components have the appropriate firmware and setting initial network
parameters for any chassis that they configure. This includes verifying that all Control hardware components pass their
powerup diagnostics.

4.4.2 Make ground connections

In conjunction with power and field wiring, you are responsible for making functional and Protective Earth (PE)
ground connections from the chassis and power supply to the ground source. Please refer to the Protective Earth
(PE) ground guidelines and Ground bus connection guidelines in this Guide for general grounding
recommendations. Also, refer to Planning for Bonding and Grounding in the Control Hardware Planning Guide
for additional grounding information.

52 www.honeywell.com
5 Controller Module Installation and Removal

Be sure you have reviewed the Pre-installation Considerations in this Guide and confirmed that you have taken
steps to minimize Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
Check that no power is applied to the chassis.
• For installing a C200 Controller, verify that you have a C200 Control Processor module (CPM) model TC-
PRS021. This can be used with both non-redundant and redundant Controller configurations.
• For installing a C200E Controller, verify that you have a C200E Controller model Tx-PRS022.
The installation procedures are identical for both models.

Table 2: CPM model number reference

Module Type Model Number Description

C200 CPM TC-PRS021 Chassis-based controller with plug-in modules for
Control Processor, I/O Link Interface,
Redundancy, FTE interface, Fieldbus, other I/O
and control modules. Provides user memory of 4
MB. It can be used with non-redundant or
redundant Controller configurations.
C200E CPM Tx-PRS022 An enhanced C200 Controller with increased user
memory from 4 MB to 16 MB.
Note: The alphabet “x” in the model numbers can be the following:
• “C” for uncoated PWAs (Printed Wiring Assembly).
• “K” for conformally coated PWAs.

Confirm the selected chassis slot location for mounting the CPM. The default location is slots 1 and 2. Be sure
your planned chassis configuration complies with the configuration rules outlined in Planning Your Chassis
Configurations in the Control Hardware Planning Guide.
For specific information concerning the:
• Planning of your system configuration, refer to System Configuration Examples Using ControlNet in the
Control Hardware Planning Guide.
• Operation of redundant controllers, refer to Basic Redundancy Design Concepts and Implications for
Control Builder Functions in the Experion Control Builder Components Theory.

53
5 CONTROLLER MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

5.1 Installing the Control Processor Module

Use the following procedure to insert the CPM into the chassis. This procedure assumes that this is the initial
installation of a CPM in an unpowered chassis.
1 Position the module at the desired chassis slots location. The default location is slots 1 and 2.
(Remember that slot numbering is zero-based and the left most slot is number “0”.)
2 Align the module's circuit board with the top and bottom chassis guides.

3 Slide the module into the chassis until the module tabs “click” into position.

4 If you are configuring a Redundant Chassis Pair, repeat this procedure to install the second CPM in the other
chassis of the redundant pair.

54 www.honeywell.com
 5 CONTROLLER MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

5.2 Installing, Connecting, or Removing the CPM Battery

The CPM contains a non-rechargeable lithium battery that is accessible when its front cover is open. The battery
provides backup power for Random Access Memory (RAM) retention during a power interruption.

CAUTION
The battery used in the CPM may present a risk of fire or chemical burn, if mistreated. Do not recharge,
disassemble, heat above 100 degrees C (212 degrees F), or incinerate. Replace the battery with a Honeywell model
TC-BATT01 battery only. Using another battery may present the risk of fire or explosion.

The battery is disconnected to protect it during shipment and storage. Refer to the following section Installing
the Control Processor Battery to connect the battery plug to the battery terminal pins on the CPM or install a
replacement battery.

Attention
If your chassis configuration also includes a Battery Extension Module (BEM), you can leave the CPM battery
installed and connected. But, the BAT LED on the front of the CPM will turn Red instead of Green after powerup to
show that the startup diagnostics has detected both batteries.

55
5 CONTROLLER MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

5.3 Installing the Control Processor Battery

Use the following procedure to install the CPM battery or just connect the battery plug to the battery terminal
pins on the CPM, if the battery is already installed.
1 Open the front door on the Control Processor.

2 Align and press the plug on the battery's two-wire lead onto the module battery terminal pins.

3 Insert the end of the battery away from the lead wires into the recessed area in the module. Make sure the
black retaining tab, located next to the battery lead terminal, clicks and secures the battery in its holder.

Tip
Put a label on the back of the module's front door that lists the date the battery was installed to provide a
convenient reference for determining how long the battery has been in service.

4 Close the Control Processor module's front door.

56 www.honeywell.com
 5 CONTROLLER MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

5 If you are configuring a Redundant Chassis Pair, repeat this procedure to install/connect the battery in the
second CPM in the other chassis of the redundant pair.

57
5 CONTROLLER MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

5.4 Post CPM Installation Checks

When a C200E Controller is powered on, it executes a thorough set of diagnostics to ensure that the hardware is
ready to support the following:
• Load and execution of boot and application images.
• Subsequent load and execution of control strategies.
The diagnostic tests that comprise POST are executed sequentially. Before each diagnostic test executes, a code
corresponding to that test is displayed on the front panel. If a diagnostic test fails, the associated code remains
‘frozen’ on the front panel display indicating a problem.

Attention
If POST diagnostics note an error, the problem is almost invariably an issue of failed hardware that requires a
replacement of the unit.

Related topics
“Problems, Failures, and Faults during Operation of C200E” on page 58
“Install other modules” on page 59
“Load personality image” on page 59

5.4.1 Problems, Failures, and Faults during Operation of C200E

After successful startup of the C200E Controller, failures and faults can occur during normal operation.
Following are some of the failures or faults that can occur during the operation:

Hardware Failures - Online Diagnostics

The C200E Controller periodically executes a suite of diagnostic tests on the hardware. This suite of diagnostics
tests that execute during normal, post-startup operation of the controller are the online diagnostics. These
diagnostics permit detection of any failures that develop after execution of POST and impair the following:
• Ability of the controller to execute control strategies.
• Ability of the controller to provide operators with a reliable view of the operation of the controller and/or the
process that it controls.
The diagnostic test interval is eight hours. All the elements of the entire suite of tests are scheduled to be
performed at least once every eight hours when the controller is powered and operating.
The online diagnostics test the following components of the C200E Controller:
• RAM integrity (through error detection and correction circuits).
• Uncorrectable RAM errors (soft error scrub) - Soft Failure.
• Controller Flash memory (image checksums, parity checking).
• Data bus integrity (parity checking).
• RAM Error detection and correction circuitry (explicit tests to insure that errors can be detected).
• Internal programmable logic integrity (FPGA readback-verify).
• Memory backup battery voltage - Soft Failure.

Software Faults
Software faults must never occur in an operating controller. The C200E controller's operating software includes
checks for conditions that are dangerous and must never occur in the course of operation of the software. If such
a condition occurs, controller reboots into the FAIL state. This same action occurs when the online diagnostics
detect a fatal (hardware) failure.

58 www.honeywell.com
 5 CONTROLLER MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

The Hardware Watchdog Timer

A hardware watchdog timer ensures that the controller reboots into the FAIL state in the event of failures that
disrupt the execution timing or the proper stream of instruction execution internally. However, certain
catastrophic hardware or software faults cause the CPU to halt immediately. In such cases, the displays become
blank and the Status LED becomes solid Red. In either case, the other chassis residents are notified through the
backplane about the failure. The Redundancy Module uses this indication to switchover from a failed/faulted
primary.

5.4.2 Install other modules

Install the other modules planned for the chassis configuration as outlined in applicable sections of this Guide.
Refer to Planning Your Chassis Configurations in the Control Hardware Planning Guide for more information
about chassis configuration, including default module placement and redundant Controller considerations.

5.4.3 Load personality image

Attention
If the CPM is not installed and pre-configured by the factory, users must load the CPM’s personality image (firmware)
to make it fully operational. This is also true for any replacement CPM ordered separately from the factory.

Once the Controller is installed and system communications are established, refer to Loading CPM personality
image - Optional in the Startup and Shutdown Guide to update the CPM's firmware.

59
5 CONTROLLER MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

5.5 Removing the Control Processor Module

WARNING
Be sure your process is “Off Control” before you remove a CPM. This means the CPM should be in its idle state.

Use the following procedure to remove the CPM from the chassis.

Attention
If the CPM battery is not installed or it is discharged, the CPM will not retain its database after power is removed.

1 Open the door on the power supply and flip the power switch to its OFF position.
2 Push in the top and bottom locking tabs.

3 Pull the module out of the chassis.

60 www.honeywell.com
 5 CONTROLLER MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

5.6 Installing a Replacement CPM

Refer to the previous Installing the Control Processor Module procedure in this Guide to insert the replacement
CPM into the chassis.
Once the replacement CPM is installed, refer to the Loading CPM personality image - Optional in the Startup
and Shutdown Guide to update the CPM's firmware.

Attention
Users are responsible for checking that replacement modules have the appropriate firmware. This includes verifying
that replacement modules pass their power up diagnostics.

61
5 CONTROLLER MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

5.7 Removing the Control Processor Battery

Use the following procedure to remove the CPM battery from the CPM.

Attention
The CPM will not retain its database, if power is lost while the battery is removed.

1 Open the front door on the Control Processor.

2 Disconnect the plug on the battery's two-wire lead from the CPM's battery terminal pins.

3 Push the black tab (located next to the battery lead terminal) securing the battery in its holder to the right and
pull the battery from the recessed area in the module.

62 www.honeywell.com
 5 CONTROLLER MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

4 If you are:
• Replacing the battery, refer to Installing the Control Processor Battery, “Installing the Control Processor
Battery” on page 56 in this Guide.
• Not replacing the battery, continue with Step 5.
5 Close the Control Processor module's front door.

63
5 CONTROLLER MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

64 www.honeywell.com
6 Redundancy Module Installation and Removal

Be sure you have reviewed the Pre-installation Considerations in this Guide and confirmed that you have taken
steps to minimize Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
Check that both chassis for the Redundant Chassis Pair (RCP) are installed and they include C200/C200E
CPMs.
Check that no power is applied to either chassis.
Verify that you have two Redundancy Modules (RM) and a redundancy cable of sufficient length to connect
between the two installed modules as listed in Table 3.

Table 3: RM and Redundancy Cable Model Number Reference

Module Type Model Number Description

Redundancy Module TC-PRR021 Two-slot module
Redundancy Cables GN-KRR011 1 meter redundant fiber optic
GN-KRR031 3 meter redundant fiber optic
GN-KRR101 10 meter redundant fiber optic

Confirm the selected chassis slot location for mounting the RM in each chassis. The default location is slots 5
and 6 in a 10- or 17-slot chassis or slots 4 and 5 in other chassis models. Be sure your planned chassis
configuration complies with the configuration rules outlined in the Process controller chassis configuration in
the Control Hardware Planning Guide.
Check that shielded, twisted pair cable size AWG 22 to 14 is available to wire the Status Contact Interface
connector on the RM, if this function is to be used in your application.

65
6 REDUNDANCY MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

6.1 Installing the Redundancy Module

Use the following procedure to insert an RM into the chassis.
1 Position the module at the desired chassis slots location. The default location is slots 5 and 6 in a 10- or 17-
slot chassis or slots 4 and 5 in other chassis models.
(Remember that slot numbering is zero-based and the left most slot is number “0”.)
2 Align the module's circuit board with the top and bottom chassis guides.

3 Slide the module into the chassis until the module tabs “click” into position.

4 Repeat this procedure to install the second RM in the other chassis in the redundant pair.
5 Go to the next section Installing the Redundancy Cable.

66 www.honeywell.com
 6 REDUNDANCY MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

6.2 Installing the Redundancy Cable

Use the following procedure to connect the redundancy cable between the RMs in the RCP.
1 Open the front door on one of the Redundancy modules in the RCP.

2 Remove the protective cap from module's Redundancy cable port.

67
6 REDUNDANCY MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

3 Remove the protective caps from one end of the Redundancy cable.

4 Connect the Redundancy cable to the terminal.

5 Route the Redundancy cable out the bottom of the module and close the door.

68 www.honeywell.com
 6 REDUNDANCY MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

6 Observing good wiring practices, route the other end of the redundancy cable to the RM in the other chassis
of the redundant pair.
7 Repeat Steps 1to 5 to connect the other end of the redundancy cable to the second RM.
8 If applicable, wire the Status Contact interface connector as outlined in the next section with the same title.

69
6 REDUNDANCY MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

6.3 Wiring the Status Contact Interface connector

Attention
Some earlier versions of the Redundancy Module do not have a Status Contact Interface connector.

The Redundancy Module includes an optically-isolated, solid state relay that is wired to a Status Contact
Interface connector on the front of the module. This normally-open relay contact remains closed when the RM
is operating as a primary and opens when the RM switches to secondary/backup status or loses power.
A user can connect an external circuit through the Status Contact Interface connector to monitor the status of the
RM. Schematics of typical user supplied monitoring circuits are shown in Figure 4.

Table 4: Typical user-supplied Status Contact Interface monitoring circuits

Use the following procedure to wire the Status Contact Interface connector to your external monitoring circuit.

To wire the connector

1 Open the front door to the Redundancy module.

70 www.honeywell.com
 6 REDUNDANCY MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

2 Remove the cable plug from the Status Contact Interface connector

3 Connect the signal wires from your external circuit to terminals 1 and 2 on the cable plug. The connector
pins are not polarized, so a dc powered load can be connected without regard to polarity. For an inductive
load, such as the coil of another relay, use a diode or other voltage limiting device across the coil to protect
the RM's solid state relay contact from transient over-voltage (over 40Volts). See Figure 4 for typical
monitoring circuit schematics.

4 Connect the insulated shield for the Status Contact Interface cable to terminal 3. Do not connect the shield
to ground at the load end of the cable.
5 Insert the wired cable plug into the Status Contact Interface connector, route the Status Contact Interface
cable out the bottom of the module, and close the door.

71
6 REDUNDANCY MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

6 Repeat this procedure for the other RM in the RCP, if desired.

72 www.honeywell.com
 6 REDUNDANCY MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

6.4 Post RM Installation Tasks

Install the other modules planned for the RCP configuration as outlined in applicable sections of this Guide.
Refer Process controller chassis configuration in the Control Hardware Planning Guide for more information
about chassis configuration, including default module placement and redundant Controller considerations.

WARNING
Do not install I/O modules in a redundant Controller chassis, since their data could be lost during a switchover to
the backup Controller.

73
6 REDUNDANCY MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

6.5 Removing the Status Contact Interface Cable

Use the following procedure to remove the Status Contact Interface cable from an RM.
1 Open the front door on the Redundancy module.

2 Pull the cable plug from the Status Contact Interface connector.

3 Remove the cable wires from the plug and return the plug to the Status Contact Interface connector, so it is
available for future use.
4 Remove the user-supplied external monitoring circuit.

74 www.honeywell.com
 6 REDUNDANCY MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

6.6 Removing the Redundancy Cable

Attention
Removing the redundancy cable from either the Primary or Backup (Secondary) RM immediately puts the Backup
(Secondary) Controller into its Disqualified state. This functionally changes the Primary Controller into a non-
redundant Controller.

Use the following procedure to remove the redundancy cable from between the RMs in an RCP.
1 Open the front door to the Redundancy module.

2 Disconnect the Redundancy cable from the terminal.

75
6 REDUNDANCY MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

3 Replace the protective cap on the modules Redundancy cable terminal.

4 Replace the protective cap on the exposed Redundancy cable connector.

76 www.honeywell.com
 6 REDUNDANCY MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 for the second RM.

6 Remove the Redundancy cable from its routing path between the two Controllers.

77
6 REDUNDANCY MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

6.7 Post RM Cable Removal Considerations

Consider the following for Post RM Cable Removal

Related topics
“Check and reconfigure Controllers” on page 78
“Remove Redundancy Module” on page 78

6.7.1 Check and reconfigure Controllers

Once you remove the redundancy cable, the Controllers no longer function as an RCP. You must make the
appropriate Controller and database configuration changes to operate the Controllers as two separate non-
redundant Controllers. This function is beyond the scope of this documentation. Refer to the appropriate
Experion documents for more information.

6.7.2 Remove Redundancy Module

Remove the Redundancy Module as outlined in the next section with the same title.

78 www.honeywell.com
 6 REDUNDANCY MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

6.8 Removing the Redundancy Module

Use the following procedure to remove an RM from the chassis.
1 If RM is operating as the Primary, initiate Controller switchover, so it is operating as the Backup before you
remove it.
2 Open the door on the power supply of the Secondary chassis and flip the power switch to its OFF position.
3 Push in the top and bottom locking tabs.

4 Pull the module out of the chassis.

79
6 REDUNDANCY MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

6.9 Installing a Replacement RM

Refer to the previous Installing the Redundancy Module procedure in this Guide to insert the replacement RM
into the chassis.
Once the RM is installed, refer to the section NetworkTools, Firmware Upgrades in the Troubleshooting and
Maintenance Guide to update the RM's firmware.

Attention
Users are responsible for checking that replacement modules have the appropriate firmware. This includes verifying
that replacement modules pass their power up diagnostics.

80 www.honeywell.com
7 I/O Module Installation, Wiring, and Removal

Be sure you have reviewed the Pre-installation Considerations in this Guide and confirmed that you have taken
steps to minimize Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
Check that no power is applied to the chassis.
Check that the chassis is not part of a Redundant Chassis Pair.
Verify that you have appropriate Chassis I/O Modules for your application as listed in Table 4.

Attention
• If you are installing HART I/O modules (TC/TK-HAI081, or TC/TK-HAO081) in a process controller chassis, see
HART I/O Implementation Guide for procedures.
• Model numbers beginning with the prefix “TK” are for a coated version of the I/O module.

Table 5: Chassis I/O Modules Model Number Reference

Module Type Model Number Description

Analog Input TC-IAH061 or TK- 6-point, High-Level, 10 Vdc and 20 mA
IAH061
TC-IAH161 or TK-IAH161 16-point, High-Level,
10 Vdc and 20 mA,
Non-Isolated
TC-IXL061 or TK-IXL061 6-point,
Thermocouple
TC-IXL062 or TK-IXL062 6-point,
Thermocouple
(Replacement for
IXL061 model)
TC-IXR061 or TK-IXR061 6-point, RTD
Analog Output TC-OAH061 or TK- 6-point, 4-20 mA
OAH061
TC-OAV061 or TK-OAV061 6-point, 10 Vdc
TC-OAV081 or TK-OAV081 8-point, 10 Vdc and
4-20 mA, Non-
Isolated
Discrete AC Input TC-IDA161 or TK- 16-point, 120 Vac
IDA161
TC-IDK161 or TK-IDK161 16-point, 120 Vac,
Isolated
TC-IDW161or TK-IDW161 16-point, 220 Vac,
Isolated
TC-IDX081 or TK-IDX081 8-point, 120 Vac,
Diagnostic

81
7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

Module Type Model Number Description

Discrete AC Output TC-ODA161 or TK- 16-point, 120/220 Vac
ODA161
TC-ODK161 or TK-ODK161 16-point, 120/220
Vac, Isolated
TC-ODX081 or TK-ODX081 8-point, 120 Vac,
Diagnostic
Discrete Digital Input TC-IDD321 or TK- 32-point, 24 Vdc
IDD321
TC-IDJ161 or TK-IDJ161 16-point, 24 Vdc,
Isolated
TC-IDX161 or TK-IDX161 16-point, 10-30 Vdc,
Diagnostic
Discrete Digital Output TC-ODD321 or TK- 32-point, 24 Vdc
ODD321
TC-ODJ161 or TK-ODJ161 16-point, 24 Vdc,
Isolated
TC-ODX161 or TK-ODX161 16-point, 10-30 Vdc,
Diagnostic
Isolated Contact Module TC-ORC161 or TK- 16-point, 10-265 Vac, 5-150 Vdc, Isolated
ORC161
Isolated Relay Module TC-ORC081 or TK- 8-point, 10-265 Vac, 5-150 Vdc, Isolated
ORC081
Pulse Input Module TC-MDP081 or TK- 8-point, 5-24 Vdc Pulse Input Module
MDP081
Miscellaneous TC-XXXXX1 Blank Slot Covers (2 per model number)

Check module components

All I/O modules share a similar set of common components, as illustrated below. The basic module foot print is
identical, as shown in the side view. Two variations of the Removable Terminal Block (RTB) connector (20- and
36-pin) provide the only significant difference in the front panel. RTB's are ordered separately and include an
RTB door label (in 20 or 36 position format as appropriate) for terminal/field wiring identification. You can also
order optional Remote Termination Panels including an RTB with a pre-wired cable. Please refer to “Using
Remote Termination Panels (RTPs)” on page 96 in this Guide for more information.

Common Components

82 www.honeywell.com
 7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

All I/O modules contain these basic components.

Unique Components
The TC-IXL061/TK-IXL061 Thermocouple Input Module includes a Cold Junction Sensor for use when connecting the
field-wiring directly to the module rather than employing a Remote Termination Panel (RTP) you supply yourself.

CAUTION
If using or installing a Remote Termination Panel (RTP), it is your responsibility to ensure the selected RTP meets
all applicable specifications and requirements.

Optional Components

83
7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

A Remote Termination Panel with pre-wired cable in standard length of 1 m (3 ft) or 2.5 m (8 ft) is available for most I/O
modules listed in Table 4. Please see the section “Using Remote Termination Panels (RTPs)” on page 96 for more
information

Check chassis configuration

Confirm the chassis configuration for your I/O module components. Be sure your planned chassis configuration
complies with the configuration rules outlined in the Planning Your Chassis Configurations in the Control
Hardware Planning Guide. And, check the I/O Module planning restrictions and recommendations outlined in
the Planning Your I/O Modules and Remote Termination Panels in the Control Hardware Planning Guide.

WARNING
Do not install I/O modules in a redundant Controller chassis, since their data could be lost during a switchover to
the backup Controller.

84 www.honeywell.com
 7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

7.1 Installing I/O Modules

Use the following general procedure to install an I/O module in the chassis.
1 Align the module's circuit board with the top and bottom chassis guide for the desired slot location.
(Remember that slot numbering is zero-based and the left most slot is number “0”, and it is reserved for the
ControlNet Interface module.)

2 Slide the module into the chassis until the module tabs “click” into position.

85
7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

3 Go to the next Section Keying the Removable Terminal Blocks (RTBs).

86 www.honeywell.com
 7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

7.2 Keying the Removable Terminal Blocks (RTBs)

CAUTION
Use a unique keying pattern for each module - RTB combination. This inhibits the RTB/field wiring from being
connected to the wrong I/O module.
Refer to your site documentation for any predefined keying patterns or conventions.

Every RTB/module combination should be keyed so that each RTB can only be installed on the module for
which it was intended. This inhibits field wiring coming from one group of devices from being connected to the
wrong I/O module.
RTB's include a series of slots that accept keying tabs. Similarly, I/O modules accept keying bands. As outlined
in the following procedure, you insert a keying band(s) onto the module where no keying tab will be installed
on the RTB. You then insert keying tabs onto the RTB in the unkeyed module positions. This then permits only
the RTB that is intended for a given I/O module to be connected.

To key the RTB to a module

1 Insert the U-shaped keying band with the longer side near the terminals in the positions that correspond to
the unkeyed RTB positions. Push the band onto the module until it snaps into place.

2 Insert the wedge-shaped keying tab, rounded edge first, into the RTB positions that correspond to the
“unkeyed” module positions. Push the tab into the RTB, until it stops.

87
7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

88 www.honeywell.com
 7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

7.3 Post I/O Module Installation Task

Following are the Post I/O Module Installation tasks:

Related topics
“Wire the RTB” on page 89

7.3.1 Wire the RTB

It is easier to make field wiring connections to the RTB before it is installed on the front of the module. Proceed
to the next section Preparing to Connect Field Wiring in this Guide to begin the wiring task.

89
7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

7.4 Preparing to Connect Field Wiring

Observe the following guidelines for connecting field wiring to an RTB or optional RTP.
• Use 22 to 14 AWG shielded wire, such as Belden 8761, for field connections. Users are responsible for
selecting the wire that is appropriate for their application and that meets National Codes and local
ordinances.
• Remove field side power before making connections to the RTB.
• Strip 8.0 to 8.3 mm (0.31 to 0.33 in) of insulation from the wire end to be connected to the RTB terminal.
• Begin wiring the RTB from the bottom terminals and move up.
• Use a tie-wrap to secure the wires in the strain relief area of the RTB.
• Connect shields to ground at the field side, whenever possible. If not possible, connect shield to the chassis
functional ground.
The tools required are:
• Flat-blade screwdriver with maximum blade width of 3.2 mm (1/8 in.).
• Wire stripper/cutter.

90 www.honeywell.com
 7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

7.5 Connecting Field Wiring to RTB

Use the following general procedure to connect field wiring to terminals on a 20-position (TC-TBNH) or 36-
position (TC-TBCH) RTB before installing it on the module.
1 Refer to “Appendix A - I/O Module Wiring Reference” on page 247 to determine the specific field wiring
connections for the given I/O module model. Users are responsible for routing the wiring to the RTB,
labeling the wiring for identification, and connecting the wiring to the correct RTB terminals.
2 Strip 8.0 to 8.3 mm (0.31 to 0.33 in) of insulation from the wire end to be inserted into an RTB terminal.

Attention
There have been connector failures due to excessive removal of insulation from wires:
• With excessive insulation removed it is possible to push the wire down into the cavity that the IO connector
pin occupies.
• This will cause the wire to press against the spring portion of the contact resulting in intermittent contacts.

3 Using a screwdriver, loosen the designated terminal screw for the given wire connection.
4 Insert the stripped wire end into the open terminal, and tighten the screw to secure the wire.

5 Repeat Steps 2 to 4 until wiring for all field devices is connected to the correct terminals on the RTB.
6 Were you able to connect wire cable shields to ground at the field side?
• If the answer is Yes, go to Step 12.
• If the answer is No, go to Step 7 to connect shield to chassis functional ground.
7 If required, remove enough cable jacket to expose a sufficient length of the drain wire to reach the chassis
functional ground.
8 Separate the foil shield and bare drain wire from the insulated cable.

91
7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

9 Twist the foil shield and drain wire together to form a single strand.

10 Attach a wire lug, then apply heat shrink tubing to the exit area, when the drain wire is doubled-back along
the insulated cable.

11 Remove the screw from a bottom chassis mounting tab and connect the drain wire lug as shown below, after
the RTB is installed on the module.
(Note that this step assumes that the chassis is grounded as shown in Figure 1 or 2).

12 After field-side wiring is complete, secure the wires in the strain relief area with a cable tie.
13 Go to the next section Installing the RTB.

92 www.honeywell.com
 7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

7.6 Installing the RTB

Use the following procedure to assemble the wired RTB in its housing.
1 Align the grooves at the bottom of each side of the housing with the side edges of the RTB.
2 Slide the RTB into the housing, until it snaps into place.

3 Go to the next procedure Install RTB on module.

7.6.1 Installing the RTB on a module

Use the following procedure to install the RTB on the front of the I/O module.
1 Align the top, bottom and left-side guides of the RTB with the guides on the module.

93
7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

2 Press quickly and evenly to seat the RTB on the module, until the latches snap into place.
3 Slide the locking tab down to lock the RTB onto the module.

94 www.honeywell.com
 7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

7.7 Other Related Installation Considerations

Following are the other related installation considerations:

Related topics
“Review Remote Termination Panel (RTP) use” on page 95
“Install other modules” on page 59

7.7.1 Review Remote Termination Panel (RTP) use

Since an optional RTP can be used in place of an RTB to connect field wiring to an I/O module, refer to the
Using Remote Termination Panels (RTPs) in this Guide for more information on using an RTP instead of an
RTB.

7.7.2 Install other modules

Install the other modules planned for the chassis configuration as outlined in applicable sections of this Guide.
Refer to Planning Your Chassis Configurations in the Control Hardware Planning Guide for more information
about chassis configuration, including default module placement and redundant Controller considerations.

95
7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

7.8 Using Remote Termination Panels (RTPs)

Remote Termination Panels (RTPs) allow you to connect I/O modules to termination strips by connecting one
end of a cable to the front of the I/O module and the other end to a DIN rail mounted Interface Module (IFM).
You can then connect your field wiring to the IFM terminal strip.

7.8.1 RTP models

The following table lists the available RTP and associated RTP cable options for each I/O module. For complete
information on installation and setup of an RTP, refer to the documentation that accompanies the RTP.

I/O Model # RTP Model # RTP Cable Options Comment

Analog Input
TC-IAH061 or TK- 1492-AIFM6S-3 1492-HWACAB010X 1492- Current
IAH061 HWACAB025X
1492-AIFM6S-3 1492-HWACAB010Y 1492- Voltage
HWACAB025Y
TC-IAH161 or TK- 1492-AIFM16-F-5 1492-HWACAB010UA 1492- Voltage
IAH161 HWACAB025UA
1492-AIFM16-F-5 1492-HWACAB010UB 1492- Current
HWACAB025UB
TC-IXL061 or TK- 1492-AIFM6TC-3 1492-HWACAB010Y 1492- Thermo-couple
IXL061 HWACAB025Y
TC-IXL062 or TK- 1492-AIFM6TC-3 1492-HWACAB010YT 1492- Thermo-couple
IXL062 HWACAB025YT
TC-IXR061 or TK- 1492-AIFM6S-3 1492-HWACAB010Z 1492- RTD
IXR061 HWACAB025Z
Analog Output
TC-OAH061 or TK- 1492-AIFM6S-3 1492-HWACAB010Y 1492- Current
OAH061 HWACAB025Y
TC-OAV061 or TK- 1492-AIFM6S-3 1492-HWACAB010Y 1492- Voltage
OAV061 HWACAB025Y
TC-OAV081 or TK- 1492-AIFM8-3 1492-HWACAB010WA 1492- Voltage
OAV081 HWACAB025WA
1492-AIFM8-3 1492-HWACAB010WB 1492- Current
HWACAB025WB
AC Input
TC-IDA161 or TK- 1492-IFM20D120A-2 1492-HWCAB010X 1492- 120 Vac
IDA161 HWCAB025X
TC-IDK161 or TK- 1492-IFM40DS120A-4 1492-HWCAB010Y 1492- 120 Vac
IDK161 HWCAB025Y
TC-IDW161 or TK- 1492-IFM40DS240A-4 TBD 240 Vac
IDW161
TC-IDX081 or TK- 1492-IFM20F-2 1492-HWCAB010U 1492- 120 Vac
IDX081 HWCAB025U
AC Output
TC-ODA161 or TK- 1492-IFM20F-F120-2 1492-HWCAB010X 1492- 120 Vac
ODA161 HWCAB025X

96 www.honeywell.com
 7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

I/O Model # RTP Model # RTP Cable Options Comment

1492-IFM20F-F240-2 TBD 240 Vac
TC-ODX081 or TK- 1492-IFM20F-2 1492-HWCAB010U 1492- 120 Vac
ODX081 HWCAB025U
TC-ODK161 or TK- 1492-IFM40F-FS120-4 1492-HWCAB010Y 1492- 120 Vac
ODK161 HWCAB025Y
1492-IFM40F-FS240-4 TBD 240 Vac
DC Input
TC-IDD321 or TK- 1492-IFM40D24A-2 1492-HWCAB010Z 1492- Voltage
IDD321 HWCAB025Z
TC-IDJ161 or TK- 1492-IFM40DS24A-4 1492-HWCAB010Y 1492- Voltage
IDJ161 HWCAB025Y
TC-IDX161 or TK- 1492-IFM40DS24A-4 1492-HWCAB010Y 1492- Voltage
IDX161 HWCAB025Y
DC Output
TC-ODD321 or TK- 1492-IFM40F-F24-2 1492-HWCAB010Z 1492- Voltage
ODD321 HWCAB025Z
TC-ODJ161 or TK- 1492-IFM40F-FS24-2 1492-HWCAB010Y 1492- Voltage
ODJ161 HWCAB025Y
TC-ODX161 or TK- 1492-IFM40F-2 1492-HWCAB010Y 1492- Voltage
ODX161 HWCAB025Y
Contact/Relay Output
TC-ORC161 or TK- 1492-IFM40DS24-4 1492-HWCAB010Y Voltage
ORC1611
1492-IFM40DS120-4 1492-HWCAB025Y
1492-IFM40FS-2
1492-IFM40F-FS24-2
1492-IFM40F-FS24-4
1492-IFM40F-FS120-2
1492-IFM40F-FS120-4
1492-IFM40F-FS240-4
TC-ORC081 or TK- Same as Above Same as Above Voltage
ORC081

1Do not use a model 1492 IFM with a model TC/TK-ORC161 module in any application that requires agency
certification of the Experion system. Use of the IFM violates the UL, CSA and FM certifications of this product.

97
7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

7.9 Removing I/O Modules

WARNING
We recommend that you remove field-side power before removing the RTB from the module. If you must remove
or insert an RTB with field-side power applied, please note:
• The RTB will be electrically live. Do not touch the RTB's terminals.
• Unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur.

Use the following procedure to remove the RTB from an I/O module.
1 Unlock the locking tab at the top of the module.

2 Open the RTB door, using the bottom tab.

3 If a shield for field wiring is connected to a bottom chassis mounting tab, disconnect it now.
4 Hold the spot marked Pull Here, and pull the RTB off the module.

98 www.honeywell.com
 7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

5 Go to the next procedure Remove the module.

Use the following procedure to remove the I/O module from the chassis, once the RTB is removed as
outlined in the previous procedure.
1 Open the door on the power supply and flip the power switch to its OFF position.
2 Push in the top and bottom locking tabs.

3 Pull the module out of the chassis.

99
7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

100 www.honeywell.com
 7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

7.10 Installing a Replacement I/O Module

Refer to the previous Installing I/O Modules procedure in this Guide to insert the replacement I/O module into
the chassis.
Once the I/O Module is installed, refer to NetworkTools, Firmware Upgrades in the Troubleshooting and
Maintenance Guide to update the I/O module's firmware.

Attention
Users are responsible for checking that replacement modules have the appropriate firmware. This includes verifying
that replacement modules pass their power up diagnostics.

101
7 I/O MODULE INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND REMOVAL

102 www.honeywell.com
8 Serial Interface Module Installation and Removal

Be sure you have reviewed the Pre-installation Considerations in this Guide and confirmed that you have taken
steps to minimize Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
Check that no power is applied to the chassis.
Review the Serial Interface Module Implementation Guide for general background and details on installing the
Serial Interface Field Termination Assembly (FTA).
Verify that you have the Serial Interface Module (SIM), power adapter, FTA(s), and cables needed to enable bi-
directional, serial-protocol communications between the Experion Control Processor and your qualified third-
party devices as listed in Table 5.

Table 6: SIM and Associated Component Model Number Reference

Component Model Number

Serial Interface Module, 2 Channel TC-MUX021/TK-MUX021
SIM-to-Power Adapter Cable (3 meters) TC-KSM003
SIM FTA Power Adapter 24 Vdc, or TC-SMPD01
SIM FTA Power Adapter 85-265 Vac TC-SMPC01
Power Adapter-to-FTA Internal Cabinet Cable, or MU-KLAMxx (where xx identifies length)
Power Adapter-to-FTA External Cabinet Cable MU-KSXxxx (where xxx identifies length)
Modbus FTA (Supports standard MODBUS remote terminal MC-TSIM12
unit (RTU) RS232 or RS422/485 communications with
MU-TSIM13
address support up to 9,999)
MC-TSIM13
Modbus FTA (Supports standard MODBUS remote terminal
unit (RTU) RS232 or RS422/485 communications with MC-TSIA12
address support up to 65,535 (99,999))
Allen-Bradley DF1 FTA (supports A-B DF1 serial protocol
(EIA-232 only) communications)

Confirm the chassis configuration for your Serial Interface Module (SIM). Be sure your planned chassis
configuration complies with the configuration rules outlined in the Planning Your Chassis Configurations in the
Control Hardware Planning Guide. And, check the Serial Interface Module (SIM) planning restrictions and
recommendations outlined in the Planning Your I/O Modules and Remote Termination Panels in the Control
Hardware Planning Guide.
The tools required are:
• Philips screwdriver
• Drill (only for panel mounting power adapter and/or FTA)

103
8 SERIAL INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

8.1 Installing the Serial Interface Module

Use the following procedure to install the SIM in the chassis and connect the SIM-to-power adapter cable.
1 Position the module at the planned chassis slot location. For example, slots 3 and 4.
(Remember that slot numbering is zero-based and the left most slot is number “0”.)
2 Align the module's circuit board with the top and bottom chassis guides.

3 Slide the module into the chassis until the module tabs “click: into position.

4 Connect the SIM to Power Adapter cable assembly.

104 www.honeywell.com
 8 SERIAL INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

5 Go to the next section Installing the Power Adapter.

105
8 SERIAL INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

8.2 Installing the Power Adapter

Attention
Your Power Adapter may be either DIN Rail mounted or mounted directly to a flat surface.

CAUTION
During the following procedure:
• Do not drill holes for a Power Adapter above an already installed chassis. Debris from the drilling can damage
or short the chassis backpanel, and short the backpanel card-edge connectors.
• If the Power Adapter does not lay flat before the screws are tightened, use additional washers as shims. This
will ensure that the circuit board is not warped or crack by tightening the screws. Warping a Power Adapter
could cause a malfunction and prevent proper operation.

Use the following procedure to mount the Power Adapter on a flat surface, such as the back panel of an
enclosure.
1 Position the Power Adapter on the mounting surface. While holding it in place, use a pencil or center punch
to mark the four mounting hole locations on the surface.
2 Remove the Power Adapter and drill tap holes at the marked locations.

3 Using the screws provided, mount the Power Adapter to the surface.

4 Connect the SIM-to-Power Adapter cable to terminal connector J1 on the Power Adapter.

106 www.honeywell.com
 8 SERIAL INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

CAUTION
Be sure the 24Vdc power supply that you use to power the TC/TK-SMPD01 SIM FTA Power Adapter is
dedicated to powering only that Power Adapter and is not used to power any other equipment. The power
supply must also be a floating power source, such as a DIN rail-mounted Phoenix Contact (MCR-PS-24DC/
24DC/200) power supply with floating 24Vdc output. Otherwise, voltage transients on the user-supplied
24Vdc to the Power Adapter may damage the associated TC/TK-MUX021 SIM in the chassis. You can also
use the ac-powered TC/TK-SIMPC01 SIM FTA Power Adapter instead of the dc-powered version, as an
alternative.

5 Perform the following:

• For Vdc model, connect leads from 24 Vdc power supply to J5 terminals on the adapter, observing
polarity.
• For Vac model, connect leads from 120/240 Vac line to J4 terminals L1, L2, and GND.

6 Refer to the Serial Interface Module Implementation Guide for details on installing the Modbus or Allen-
Bradley FTA and making the Power Adapter to FTA cable connections, as well as field device connections
to the FTA.

Attention
Users are responsible for supplying and installing the DIN rails.

To mount the Power Adapter on the user supplied DIN rail, perform the following steps.
1 Install the supplied rail mount adapters on the bottom of the Power Adapter.

107
8 SERIAL INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

2 Snap the Power Adapter on to the DIN Rail

3 Connect the SIM-to-Power Adapter cable to terminal connector J1 on the Power Adapter.

• For Vdc model, connect leads from 24 Vdc power supply to J5 terminals on the adapter, observing
polarity.
• For Vac model, connect leads from 120/240 Vac line to J4 terminals L1, L2, and GND.

108 www.honeywell.com
 8 SERIAL INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

4 Refer to the Serial Interface Module Implementation Guide for details on installing the Modbus or Allen-
Bradley FTA and making the Power Adapter to FTA cable connections as well as field device connections to
the FTA.

109
8 SERIAL INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

8.3 Post SIM Installation Tasks

Following are the post installation tasks:

Related topics
“Install other modules” on page 59
“Load personality image” on page 110

8.3.1 Install other modules

Install the other modules planned for the chassis configuration as outlined in applicable sections of this Guide.
Refer to Planning Your Chassis Configurations in the Control Hardware Planning Guide for more information
about chassis configuration, including default module placement and redundant Controller considerations.

8.3.2 Load personality image

Attention
If the SIM is not installed and pre-configured by the factory, users must load the SIM's personality image (firmware)
to make it fully operational. This is also true for any replacement SIM ordered separately from the factory.

Once the SIM is installed and system communications are established, refer to Loading SIM personality image -
Optional in the Startup and Shutdown Guide to update the SIM's firmware.

110 www.honeywell.com
 8 SERIAL INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

8.4 Removing the Serial Interface Module

WARNING
We recommend that you take your process “Off Control” before removing any control hardware component. This
means the CPM should be in its idle state. Any time you remove a module from the chassis of an on-control
process system, the potential for unintended machine motion or loss of process control exists.

Use the following procedure to remove the SIM from the chassis.
1 Open the door on the power supply of the chassis and flip the power switch to its OFF position.
2 Remove the SIM to Power Adapter cable assembly.

3 Push in the top and bottom locking tabs.

4 Pull the SIM out of the chassis.

111
8 SERIAL INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

112 www.honeywell.com
 8 SERIAL INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

8.5 Installing a Replacement SIM

Refer to the previous Installing the Serial Interface Module procedure in this Guide to insert the replacement
SIM into the chassis.
Once the SIM is installed, refer to SIM personality image - Optional in the Startup and Shutdown Guide to
update the SIM's firmware.

Attention
Users are responsible for checking that replacement modules have the appropriate firmware. This includes verifying
that replacement modules pass their power up diagnostics.

113
8 SERIAL INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

8.6 Removing the Power Adapter

1 Turn Off the power source.
2 Remove power cable leads from ac or dc power connector.

3 Disconnect the SIM-to-Power Adapter, and the Power Adapter-to-FTA cables.

4 Remove the screws that hold the Power Adapter to the surface. Be sure you are holding the Power Adapter
when you remove the last screw.

114 www.honeywell.com
 8 SERIAL INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

8.6.1 Removing the Power Adapter from a DIN Rail

Use the following procedure to remove a Power Adapter from a DIN rail.
1 Turn Off the power source.
2 Remove power cable leads from ac or dc power connector.

3 Disconnect the SIM-to-Power Adapter and the Power Adapter-to-FTA cables.

4 Grasp both rail mount adapters on the tapered side and pull forward slightly to pop the Power Adapter off
the rail. Be sure you hold onto the Power Adapter, so it does not fall on the floor.

115
8 SERIAL INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

8.7 Installing a replacement Power Adapter

Refer to the previous Mounting Power Adapter on a flat surface or Mounting Power Adapter on a DIN rail
procedure in this Guide to mount the replacement Power Adapter on a surface or DIN rail.

Attention
If you are removing the SIM and its associated components from the control strategy, you are responsible for making
the required changes in your control database.

116 www.honeywell.com
9 ControlNet Communication Module Installation and
Removal

Be sure you have reviewed the Pre-installation Considerations in this Guide and confirmed that you have taken
steps to minimize Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
Check that no power is applied to the chassis.
Be aware that this section does not apply to the Peripheral Component Interconnect Communication (PCIC)
interface card in the Experion Server(s). Please refer to Installing the PCIC Card in the ControlNet Installation
Guide for installation details.

CAUTION
If a model CCN012/CCR012 or CCN013/CCR013 fails in a redundant chassis pair (RCP), you must replace both
partner modules with the new model CCN014/CCR014 Series E ControlNet module. Both partner modules in a
RCP must be the same type. Synchronization is allowed one time from the backup to the primary. Failure to
replace the older CNI module will disable synchronization.

Verify that you have the ControlNet modules needed to support the planned Supervisory and I/O ControlNet
networks for your Experion system, as listed in Table 6.

Attention
The model numbers beginning with the prefix “TK” are for the coated version of the ControlNet module.

Table 7: ControlNet module Model Number Reference

Model Number Description Notes

TC-CCN014 Single-Media (Non-Redundant) ControlNet This model supersedes models TC-CCN013, TC-
Interface (Series E) CCN012 and TC-CCN011. It supports redundant
Controllers and is required for optional Fieldbus
communications support.
TC-CCR014, Dual-Media (Redundant) ControlNet This model supersedes models TC-CCR013, TC-
Interface (Series E) CCR012 and TC-CCR011. It supports redundant
TK-CCR014
Controllers and is required for optional Fieldbus
communications support.
TC-CCN013 Single-Media (Non-Redundant) ControlNet TC-CCN014 supersedes this model. This model
Interface (Series D) supersedes models TC-CCN012 and TC-CCN011.
(Obsolete)
It supports redundant Controllers and is required for
optional Fieldbus communications support.
TC-CCR013, Dual-Media (Redundant) ControlNet TC-CCR014 supersedes this model. This model
Interface (Series D) supersedes models TC-CCR012 and TC-CCR011. It
TK-CCR013
supports redundant Controllers and is required for
(Obsolete) optional Fieldbus communications support.

117
9 CONTROLNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

Model Number Description Notes

TC-CCN012 Single-Media (Non-Redundant) ControlNet TC-CCN013 and TC-CCN014 supersede this
Interface (Series C) model. This model supersedes model TC-CCN011
(Obsolete)
and supports redundant Controllers. Firmware
version 4.11 or higher does support the Fieldbus
communications option.
TC-CCR012, Dual-Media (Redundant) ControlNet TC-CCR013 and TC-CCR014 supersede this
Interface (Series C) model. This model supersedes model TC-CCR011
TK-CCR012
and supports redundant Controllers. Firmware
(Obsolete) version 4.11 or higher does support the Fieldbus
communications option.
TC-CCN011 Single-Media (Non-Redundant) ControlNet TC-CCN012, TC-CCN013 and TC-CCN014
Interface (Series A) supersede this model. It does not support redundant
(Obsolete)
Controllers or the Fieldbus communications option.
TC-CCR011 Dual-Media (Redundant) ControlNet TC-CCR012, TC-CCR013 and TC-CCR014
Interface (Series A) supersede this model. It does not support redundant
(Obsolete)
Controllers or the Fieldbus communications option.

Attention
The TC-CCN013 or TC-CCN014 and TC-CCR013 or TC-CCR014 models are required for Fieldbus communications
support within a redundant Controller configuration for the Experion system. These models are qualified for use with
scheduled traffic concurrent with Controller redundancy.

Confirm the chassis configuration for your ControlNet module(s) and the ControlNet network addressing
configuration for your system. Be sure your planned chassis configuration complies with the configuration rules
outlined in the Planning Your Chassis Configurations in the Control Hardware Planning Guide. And, check the
ControlNet configuration planning details outlined in the ControlNet Configuration in the Control Hardware
Planning Guide.
The tools required are:
• Jeweler's screwdriver

118 www.honeywell.com
 9 CONTROLNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

9.1 Installing the ControlNet Module

Attention
Users are responsible for making the correct ControlNet address assignments for the ControlNet modules used in their
planned Supervisory and I/O ControlNet networks. Valid ControlNet module addresses range from 1 to 24 for
Supervisory ControlNet and 1 to 20 for I/O ControlNet.
Assign 23 as the address for the Server. This reserves address 24 for an optional redundant partner Server
Note that 24 can be extended up to 32, if your system has more than 24 nodes present.
For details regarding ControlNet addressing, refer to Planning Your ControlNet Addressing in the Control Hardware
Planning Guide.

Use the following procedure to set the ControlNet module's network address and insert the ControlNet module
into the chassis.
1 Use your fingers or a jeweler's screwdriver to set the module's network address switches to the planned
ControlNet network address for this ControlNet module.

2 Align the module's circuit board with the top and bottom chassis guides for the planned slot location.
Typically, slot 0 is reserved for the ControlNet module.
(Remember that slot numbering is zero-based and the left most slot is number “0”.)

119
9 CONTROLNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

3 Slide the module into the chassis, until the module tabs “click” into position.

4 Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to install other ControlNet modules, as required.

5 Go to the next section Connecting ControlNet Network Cables.

120 www.honeywell.com
 9 CONTROLNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

9.2 Connecting ControlNet Network Cables

Attention
Procedures for network cable installation can be found in the Control Hardware Planning Guide.
The following procedures assume that network cabling has been run, and is available at the chassis.

WARNING
Unless the location is known to be non-hazardous, do not:
• connect or disconnect cables,
• connect or disconnect Removable Terminal Blocks (RTBs),
• install or remove modules,
while the Control system is powered.

CAUTION
You must connect your Supervisory ControlNet drop-cables and I/O ControlNet drop-cables to the correct
ControlNet modules. Intermixed connections can have unexpected and undesirable results, including potential loss
of control. For more information regarding drop-cable identification, refer to the Control Hardware Planning
Guide, Planning for drop-cable identification.

Attention
You can install redundant (dual) media ControlNet module models in either a redundant or non-redundant Controller
configuration. In both cases, you have the option of using “dual” (redundant) or “single” (non-redundant) -media
ControlNet networks. When using a dual-media ControlNet module in a single-media network, always connect the
drop cables to tap “A.” This provides consistency across your network, and will facilitate migration to a redundant
network in the future.

To connect the ControlNet trunk cable to the ControlNet module, perform the following steps.

Single Media ControlNet module

• Attach the drop cable from the trunk cable tap to the single-media module's connector.

Redundant media ControlNet module

1 Attach the drop cable from the “A” trunk cable tap to the dual-media modules “A” connector.

121
9 CONTROLNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

2 Attach the drop cable from the “B” trunk cable tap to the dual-media module's “B” connector.

3 Repeat the single-media or redundant-media ControlNet module Steps to complete network connections, as
required.

122 www.honeywell.com
 9 CONTROLNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

9.3 Post ControlNet Module Installation Tasks

Install the other modules planned for the chassis configuration as outlined in applicable sections of this Guide.
Refer to Planning Your Chassis Configurations in the Control Hardware Planning Guide for more information
about chassis configuration, including default module placement and redundant Controller considerations.

Related topics
“Check ControlNet parameters” on page 123

9.3.1 Check ControlNet parameters

Once the ControlNet modules are installed and system communications are established, refer to NetworkTools,
ControlNet Parameters in the Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide to check the ControlNet module
“keeper” values. Be aware that the default keeper values listed in the referenced document are different for
applications that include fiber optic media or the Fieldbus Linking Device.

123
9 CONTROLNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

9.4 Removing the ControlNet Module

WARNING
We recommend that you take your process “Off Control” before removing any Control hardware component. This
means the CPM should be in its idle state. Any time you remove a module from the chassis of an on-control
process system, the potential for unintended machine motion or loss of process control exists.

Use the following procedure to remove the ControlNet module from the chassis.
1 Open the door on the power supply of the chassis and flip the power switch to its OFF position.
2 Disconnect the ControlNet drop-cable(s) from A and B connectors on the bottom of the module, as
applicable for single- or dual-media.
3 Push in the top and bottom locking tabs and pull the ControlNet module from its chassis slot.

124 www.honeywell.com
 9 CONTROLNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

9.5 Installing a Replacement ControlNet module

Refer to the previous Installing the ControlNet Interface Module procedure in this Guide to insert the
replacement ControlNet module into the chassis.
Once the ControlNet module is installed, refer to NetworkTools, Firmware Upgrades in the Troubleshooting and
Maintenance Guide to update the ControlNet module module's firmware. Also, refer to Check ControlNet
Parameters in this Guide to confirm the module's “keeper” values.

Attention
Users are responsible for checking that replacement modules have the appropriate firmware. This includes verifying
that replacement modules pass their power up diagnostics.

125
9 CONTROLNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

126 www.honeywell.com
10 Ethernet Communication Module Installation and
Removal

Be sure you have reviewed the Pre-installation Considerations in this Guide and confirmed that you have taken
steps to minimize Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
Check that no power is applied to the chassis.
Be aware that this section does not apply to the Network Interface Card (3COM Fast Etherlink XL 100MBps)
in the Experion Server(s). Please refer to the manufacturer's documentation for installation details.
Verify that you have the Ethernet modules TC-CEN021 needed to support the planned Supervisory Ethernet
networks for your Experion system.

Attention
The model TC-CEN021 Ethernet module is a direct replacement for the previous TC-CEN011 model. However, the
TC-CEN021 module does not include an Access Unit Interface (AUI) type connector nor a front panel door, and its
RJ-45 port is located on the bottom of the module. If you are currently using a TC-CEN011 module with an AUI type
connection, you will have to convert to a RJ-45 type connection to replace it with a model TC-CEN021 module.

Confirm the chassis configuration for your Ethernet module(s) and the Ethernet network addressing
configuration for your system. Be sure your planned chassis configuration complies with the configuration rules
outlined in the Planning Your Chassis Configurations in the Control Hardware Planning Guide.

127
10 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

10.1 Installing the Ethernet Module

Attention
Users are responsible for making the correct IP address assignments for the Ethernet modules used in their planned
Supervisory Ethernet networks.

Use the following procedure to insert the Ethernet module into the chassis.
1 Align the module's circuit board with the top and bottom chassis guides for the planned slot location.
Typically, slot 0 is reserved for the Ethernet module.
(Remember that slot numbering is zero-based and the left most slot is number “0”.)

2 Slide the module into the chassis, until the module's locking tabs “click” into position. The module is fully
installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules.

128 www.honeywell.com
 10 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to install other Ethernet modules, as required.

4 Go to the next Section Making Ethernet Network Connections.

129
10 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

10.2 Making Ethernet Network Connections

WARNING
Unless the location is known to be non-hazardous, do not:
• connect or disconnect cables,
• install or remove modules,
while the Control system is powered.

The Ethernet module has a RJ-45 socket for network cable connections, as shown in Figure 5.

Figure 4: Front view of Ethernet module with view of RJ-45 connector.

Use the following procedure to connect the network cable between the switch port and the Ethernet module
port.
1 Be sure the cable connector is wired as shown in the following diagram.

130 www.honeywell.com
 10 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

2 Plug the RJ-45 cable plug into the socket on the bottom of the module, so it locks in place.

3 Connect the other end of the cable to the Ethernet switch port. Be sure to make all Supervisory Ethernet
network connections.

131
10 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

10.3 Post Ethernet module Installation Tasks

The Ethernet module uses the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) suite of protocols for
Ethernet communications. An Ethernet Supervisory network is a packet switched network. It transmits
information between the Experion Server and the Process Controller on the network in small segments called
data packets.
The TCP/IP protocol suite defines the specific communication characteristics based on an international Open
Systems Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The actual communication between nodes depends upon the
physical (hardware) addresses and internet (IP) addresses specific to a given network.
Each Ethernet module comes with a factory assigned hardware address. The address is a 48-bit address that
consists of six hexadecimal digits separated by dots. It is printed on a label on the front of the module.
The IP address identifies each node on the IP network (or system of connected networks). Each TCP/IP node on
a network (including the Ethernet module) must have a unique IP address.
Check to be sure all network addresses are configured before you put the Ethernet module into operation.
For more information about TCP/IP and internetworking, refer to:
• Internetworking with TCP/IP - Vol. 1, 2nd ed., by Douglas E Comer (ISBN 0-13-216987-8)
• The Ethernet Management Guide - Keeping The Link (ISB 0-07-046320-4)
• An Introduction to TCP/IP (ISBN 3-540-96651-X)
• Computer Networks by Andrew S. Tanenbaum (ISBN 0-13-162959-X)

Related topics
“Install other modules” on page 59

10.3.1 Install other modules

Install the other modules planned for the chassis configuration as outlined in applicable sections of this Guide.
Refer to Planning Your Chassis Configurations in the Control Hardware Planning Guide for more information
about chassis configuration, including default module placement and redundant Controller considerations.

132 www.honeywell.com
 10 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

10.4 Removing the Ethernet Module

WARNING
We recommend that you take your process “Off Control” before removing any Control hardware component. This
means the CPM should be in its idle state. Any time you remove a module from the chassis of an on-control
process system, the potential for unintended machine motion or loss of process control exists.

Use the following procedure to remove the Ethernet module from the chassis.
1 Open the door on the power supply of the chassis and flip the power switch to its OFF position.
2 Disconnect the RJ45 cable plug from the connector on the front of the module.
3 Push in the top and bottom locking tabs.

4 Pull the Ethernet module from its chassis slot.

133
10 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

134 www.honeywell.com
 10 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

10.5 Installing a Replacement Ethernet module

Refer to the previous Installing the Ethernet Module procedure in this Guide to insert the replacement Ethernet
module into the chassis.
Once the Ethernet module is installed, refer to NetworkTools, Firmware Upgrades in the Troubleshooting and
Maintenance Guide to check the modules IP addresses. Also, be sure to enter the replacement module's new
Ethernet hardware address.

Attention
Users are responsible for checking that replacement modules have the appropriate firmware. This includes verifying
that replacement modules pass their power up diagnostics.

135
10 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

136 www.honeywell.com
11 Battery Extension Module Installation and Removal

Be sure you have reviewed the “Pre-installation Considerations” on page 19 in this Guide and confirmed that
you have taken steps to minimize Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
Check that no power is applied to the chassis.
Verify that you have the Battery Extension Modules (BEMs) model TC-PPD011 (uncoated) or TK-PPD011
(coated) needed to support the planned Controller chassis configuration for your Experion system. Be sure you
have the battery for the module, since the module is shipped without the battery installed.
Confirm the chassis configuration for your Battery Extension Module(s). Be sure your planned chassis
configuration complies with the configuration rules outlined in the Planning Your Chassis Configurations in the
Control Hardware Planning Guide.
The tools required are:
• Small flat-blade screwdriver

Related topics
“Installing the Battery Extension Module” on page 138
“Wiring the BEM Status Contact” on page 141
“Removing the Battery Extension Module” on page 142
“Installing a Replacement BEM or Battery” on page 143

137
11 BATTERY EXTENSION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

11.1 Installing the Battery Extension Module

Attention
We suggest that you remove or disconnect the battery in the CPM, when you install a BEM. While both batteries can
be present at the same time, the BAT LED on the front of the CPM will turn Red instead of Green after power up to
show that the startup diagnostics has detected both batteries..

Use the following procedure to install the battery in the BEM and the BEM in the chassis.
1 Remove the screws securing the cover to the Battery Extension Module.

2 Remove the cover for the Battery Extension Module.

3 Insert the battery into the battery holder.

4 Connect the battery cable to the port.

138 www.honeywell.com
 11 BATTERY EXTENSION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

5 Install the cover and secure with the screws removed in Step 1.
6 Position the module at planned chassis slot location. Default location is slot 4 in a 10- or 17-slot chassis, or
slot 6 in a 7- or 13-slot chassis.
(Remember that slot numbering is zero-based and the left most slot is number “0”.)
7 Align the module's circuit board with the top and bottom chassis guides.

8 Slide the module into the chassis until the module tabs “click” into position.

139
11 BATTERY EXTENSION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

9 Go to the next section Wiring the BEM Status Contact.

140 www.honeywell.com
 11 BATTERY EXTENSION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

11.2 Wiring the BEM Status Contact

The BEM normally-open relay contact remains closed (and the normally-closed contact remains open) when the
BEM is able to provide 3.0 to 3.6 Vdc battery backup power. The BEM normally-open relay contact opens (and
the normally-closed contact closes) when the BEM is not able to provide at least 3.0 Vdc battery backup power.
Use the following procedure to connect an external user supplied annunciator circuit to an integral BEM
normally open or normally closed contact.
1 Unplug the connector from the Battery Extension Module socket.

Attention
The maximum voltage and current ratings for the alarm relay contacts are 30 Vac/Vdc and 100 mA, respectively.

2 Insert the user supplied wiring and tighten the screws.

• Terminals 1 and 2 provide a normally-open relay contact that OPENS when the battery output drops
below 3.0 Vdc.
• Terminals 3 and 4 provide a normally-closed relay contact that CLOSES when the battery output drops
below 3.0 Vdc.

3 Plug the connector into the Battery Extension Module socket.

141
11 BATTERY EXTENSION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

11.3 Removing the Battery Extension Module

CAUTION
The CPM will not retain its RAM, if power is lost while the BEM is removed from the chassis and the CPM
battery is not connected.

Use the following procedure to remove the BEM from the Chassis.
1 With CPM battery installed and connected, open the door on the power supply of the chassis and flip the
power switch to its OFF position.
2 If a user-supplied circuit is wired to the BEM status connector, unplug the connector from the Battery
Extension Module socket.
3 Push in the top and bottom locking tabs.

4 Pull the module out of the chassis.

142 www.honeywell.com
 11 BATTERY EXTENSION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

11.4 Installing a Replacement BEM or Battery

Refer to the previous Installing the Battery Extension Module in this Guide to insert the replacement BEM into
the chassis. Or, adapt the procedure to remove and replace the battery and re-install the BEM.

143
11 BATTERY EXTENSION MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

144 www.honeywell.com
12 Power Supply Installation and Removal

Be sure you have reviewed the Pre-installation Considerations in this Guide and confirmed that you have taken
steps to minimize Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).

CAUTION
Since power output ratings vary for given approval bodies, be sure the specified load capacity and temperature
rating for the power supply will not be exceeded in your application.
For applicable power output rating specifications, refer to the Experion specifications. The Experion specifications
can be found on the Honeywell website https://www.honeywellprocess.com/support. Just follow the Experion
product links.

Verify that you have the Power Supply model needed to match your power source output, as listed in the
following table.

Table 8: Power supply model number reference

Voltage Type Model Number Nominal Power Rating

Vac TC-FPCXX1 (Obsolete) 120/240Vac
TC-FPCXX2/TK-FPCXX2 120/240Vac
Vdc TC-FPDXX1 (Obsolete) 24Vdc
TC-FPDXX2/TK-FPDXX2 24Vdc

The tools required are:

• 1/8-inch flat-blade screwdriver
• 1/4-inch flat-blade (#2) or phillips screwdriver
• Needle-nose pliers

145
12 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

12.1 Installing the Power Supply

12.1.1 Installing a DIN rail power supply

To install the module on the DIN rail, perform the following steps.
1 Position the module with DIN rail guide on the upper edge of the DIN rail as shown in the following figure.

2 Push it in with the downward direction. As shown in the following figure.

146 www.honeywell.com
 12 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

Attention
To remove the module from the DIN rail, perform the following steps.
1. Ensure that you remove all the cables are that are connected to the modules.
2. Pull the locking clip down with aid of screwdriver as shown in the following figure.

3. Slide the module out at the lower edge of the DIN rail as shown in the following figure.

12.1.2 Installing a Phoenix contact redundancy module

Phoenix contact power supply module and redundancy module
The following figure displays the hook type arrangement and locking clip provided on back end of the Phoenix
contact redundancy module.

The following figure displays the installation of Phoenix contact redundancy module.

147
12 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

12.1.3 Installing a Phoenix power supply module

The following figure displays the hook type arrangement and locking clip provided on back end of the Phoenix
power supply module.

The following figure displays the installation of Phoenix contact power supply module.

12.1.4 Installing a Meanwell redundancy module

The following figure displays the hook type arrangement and locking clip provided on back end of Meanwell
redundancy module.

148 www.honeywell.com
 12 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

The following figure displays the installation of Meanwell redundancy module.

12.1.5 Installing a Meanwell power supply module

The following figure displays the hook type arrangement and locking clip provided on backside of Meanwell
power supply module.

The following figure displays the installation of Meanwell power supply module.

149
12 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

12.1.6 Replacing a power supply module

This section describes how to replace a faulty power supply module in the COTS power system.

Attention
• In a redundant configuration, ensure that a power supply is working.
• Ensure to turn off the faulty power supply module only.

Following are the tools required for replacing a power supply.

• Flat head screw driver
• Digital multimeter
To replace the Phoenix contact power supply in a redundant configuration, perform the following steps.
1 Identify the circuit breaker of the power supply that needs to be replaced.
2 Turn off the breaker of the power supply that needs to be replaced.
3 Observe LED labeled as “DC OK” is off.
4 Using the multimeter, check the voltage of the AC input terminals labeled L and N of power supply that
must read as zero volts.
5 Remove the cables from the power supply terminals in the following sequence.
• Disconnect the cable, which is connected to the 24V+ terminal of power supply.
• Disconnect the cable, which is connected to 24V- terminal of power supply.
• Disconnect the alarm cable from terminal 13 and 14 of power supply.
• Disconnect the AC power input cable connected to power supply's AC input terminals labeled as L, N,
and E (or sign of electrical AC ground).
6 Remove the power supply from DIN rail.
7 Insert a new Phoenix Contact power supply to the DIN rail.
8 Connect AC power cable to L, N, and E terminals of the power supply and ensure that L and N connections
are not interchanged.
9 Restore the grounding connections, if removed.
10 Turn on the breaker of the power supply.
11 Check that the LED labeled as “DC OK” is on.
12 Measure DC output voltage at V+ and V- terminals on power supply.
13 Adjust the voltage to 25.5 volts for a redundant system and 25.0 for non-redundant system by adjusting the
potentiometer (labeled as “18-29.5 V” on the power supply).
14 Turn off the power supply.
15 Connect the cable from V+ terminal of the Redundancy module to the V+ terminal of the power supply.
16 Connect the cable from V- terminal of the terminal block GND to the V- terminal of the power supply.

150 www.honeywell.com
 12 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

17 Connect the alarm wires on terminal 13 and 14 of power supply.

18 Turn on the power supply.
19 Measure the voltage at terminal block (it should be 25 volts).
20 Measure the voltage on V+ and V- terminal of power supply 1 and 2.

Attention
If there is difference between the measurements of the power supply -1 and power supply-2, then adjust the power
supplies such that voltage measurements of both the power supplies are same.

21 Measure the voltage at terminal block and it must be 25 volts.

22 Ensure that the voltage at the terminal block is 25 volts and difference between the measurements of power
supply 1 and 2 is less than 500mV.

Attention
Ensure that the voltage at the power supply's V+ and V- terminal is adjusted between 24V and 26V.

To replace the Phoenix contact power supply in a non-redundant configuration, perform the following steps.
1 Identify the circuit breaker of the power supply that needs to be replaced.
2 Turn off the breaker of the power supply that needs to be replaced.
3 Observe LED labeled as “DC OK” is off.
4 Using the multimeter, check the voltage of the AC input terminals labeled L and N of power supply that
must read as zero volts.
5 Remove the cables from the power supply terminals in the following sequence.
• Disconnect the cable, which is connected to the 24V+ terminal of power supply.
• Disconnect the cable, which is connected to 24V- terminal of power supply.
• Disconnect the alarm cable from terminal 13 and 14 of power supply.
• Disconnect the AC power input cable connected to power supply's AC input terminals labeled as L, N,
and E (or sign of electrical AC ground).
6 Remove the power supply from DIN rail.
7 Insert a new Phoenix Contact power supply to the DIN rail.
8 Connect AC power cable to L, N, and E terminals of the power supply and ensure that L and N connections
are not interchanged.
9 Restore the grounding connections, if removed.
10 Turn on the breaker of the power supply.
11 Check that the LED labeled as “DC OK” is on.
12 Measure DC output voltage at V+ and V- terminals on power supply.
13 Adjust the voltage to 25.0 volts for a non-redundant system by adjusting the potentiometer (labeled as
“18-29.5 V” on the power supply).
14 Turn off the power supply.
15 Connect the cable from V+ terminal of the Redundancy module to the V+ terminal of the power supply.
16 Connect the cable from V- terminal of the terminal block GND to the V- terminal of the power supply.
17 Connect the alarm wires on terminal 13 and 14 of power supply.
18 Turn on the power supply.
19 Measure the voltage at terminal block (it should be 25 volts).
20 Measure the voltage on V+ and V- terminal of power supply 2.

151
12 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

Attention
Ensure that the voltage at the power supply's V+ and V- terminal is adjusted between 24V and 26V.

To replace the Meanwell power supply in a redundant system, perform the following steps.
1 Identify the circuit breaker of the power supply that needs to be replaced.
2 Turn off the breaker of the power supply that needs to be replaced.
3 Observe LED labeled as “DC OK” is off.
4 Using the multimeter, check the voltage of the AC input terminals labeled L and N of power supply that
must read as zero volts.
5 Remove the cables from the power supply terminals in the following sequence.
• Disconnect the cable, which is connected to the 24V+ terminal of power supply.
• Disconnect the cable, which is connected to 24V- terminal of power supply.
• Disconnect the alarm cable from terminals labeled as “DC OK” with sign of relay contact of the
power supply.
• Disconnect the AC power input cable connected to power supply's AC input terminals labeled as L, N,
and E (or sign of electrical AC ground).
6 Remove the power supply from DIN rail.
7 Insert a new Phoenix Contact power supply to the DIN rail.
8 Connect AC power cable to L, N, and E terminals of the power supply and ensure that L and N connections
are not interchanged.
9 Restore the grounding connections, if removed.
10 Turn on the breaker of the power supply.
11 Check that the LED labeled as “DC OK” is on.
12 Measure DC output voltage at V+ and V- terminals on power supply.
13 Adjust the voltage to 25.0 volts for a redundant system by adjusting the potentiometer (labeled as ““+V
ADJ”) on the power supply.
14 Turn off the power supply.
15 Connect the cable from V+ terminal of the Redundancy module to the V+ terminal of the power supply.
16 Connect the cable from V- terminal of the terminal block GND to the V- terminal of the power supply.
17 Connect the alarm wires on terminal labeled as “DC OK” with sign of relay contact of the power
supply.
18 Turn on the power supply.
19 Measure the voltage at terminal block (it should be 25 volts).
20 Measure the voltage on V+ and V- terminal of power supply 2.

Attention
Ensure that the voltage at the power supply's V+ and V- terminal is adjusted between 24V and 26V.

21 Measure the voltage on a terminal block and it must be 25V.

To replace the Meanwell power supply in a non-redundant system, perform the following steps.
1 Identify the circuit breaker of the power supply that needs to be replaced.
2 Turn off the breaker of the power supply that needs to be replaced.
3 Observe LED labeled as “DC OK” is off.
4 Using the multimeter, check the voltage of the AC input terminals labeled L and N of power supply that
must read as zero volts.

152 www.honeywell.com
 12 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

5 Remove the cables from the power supply terminals in the following sequence.
• Disconnect the cable, which is connected to the 24V+ terminal of power supply.
• Disconnect the cable, which is connected to 24V- terminal of power supply.
• Disconnect the alarm cable from terminals labeled as “DC OK” with sign of relay contact of the
power supply.
• Disconnect the AC power input cable connected to power supply's AC input terminals labeled as L, N,
and E (or sign of electrical AC ground).
6 Remove the power supply from DIN rail.
7 Insert a new Phoenix Contact power supply to the DIN rail.
8 Connect AC power cable to L, N, and E terminals of the power supply and ensure that L and N connections
are not interchanged.
9 Restore the grounding connections, if removed.
10 Turn on the breaker of the power supply.
11 Check that the LED labeled as “DC OK” is on.
12 Measure DC output voltage at V+ and V- terminals on power supply.
13 Adjust the voltage to 25.0 volts for a non-redundant system by adjusting the potentiometer (labeled as “+V
ADJ”).
14 Turn off the power supply.
15 Connect the cable from V+ terminal of the Redundancy module to the V+ terminal of the power supply.
16 Connect the cable from V- terminal of the terminal block GND to the V- terminal of the power supply.
17 Connect the alarm wires on terminal labeled as DC OK with sign of relay contact of the power
supply.
18 Turn on the power supply.
19 Measure the voltage at terminal block (it should be 25 volts).
20 Measure the voltage on V+ and V- terminal of power supply 2.

Attention
Ensure that the voltage at the power supply's V+ and V- terminal is adjusted between 24V and 26V.

12.1.7 Installing on a chassis

Use the following procedure to configure the input voltage jumper and install the power supply on the chassis.
1 Sit the power supply printed circuit board side down on a table. Facing the back of the supply, locate the
input voltage jumper on the edge of the printed circuit board. Confirm that the jumper is in the correct
position for the given power supply model and supply voltage as listed in Table 8. If required, use needle-
nose pliers to change the jumper position, as shown below.

153
12 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

2 Align the circuit board of the power supply with the card guides on the left side of the chassis.

3 Slide the power supply in until it is flush with the chassis.

4 Fasten the power supply to the chassis.

154 www.honeywell.com
 12 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

5 Go to the next Section Connect power wiring.

Table 9: Power supply input voltage jumper positions

For an input voltage of… On power supply model… set the

input voltage jumper as…
16-32 Vdc TC-FPDXX2/ Low (Note 1)
TK-FPDXX2
120 Vac TC-FPCXX2/
TK-FPCXX2

19-32 Vdc TC-FPDXX2/ High (Note 1)

(Note 2) TK-FPDXX2
240 Vac TC-FPCXX2/
TK-FPCXX2

Note 1: The default setting for TC-FPCXX2/TK-FPCXX2 is Low.

The default setting for TC-FPDXX2/TK-FPDXX2 is High.
Note 2: If your input voltage falls below 19V for intervals of two minutes or less (e. g., motor cranking) and
your inputs and outputs are not affected by system input power voltages of 15V, set the input jumper to the
Low position.

12.1.8 Connecting power wiring

WARNING
Turn off power at the source of the supply before connecting to the power supply terminals. Failure to do so could
cause injury to personnel and/or equipment.

Attention
Power lines, grounds, and bus bars should have been installed during system cabling and wiring installation.
Torque screw terminals to 7 inch-pound (0.8 Newton-meter).

155
12 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

Use the appropriate portion of the following procedure to connect the power wiring to the given power supply
model.

TC-FPCXX2 and TK-FPCXX2 120/240 Vac Power Supplies

1 Connect the high side of the ac power line (black) to the L1 terminal.
2 Connect the low side of the ac power line (white) to the L2/N terminal.

3 Connect the PE ground (green with yellow stripe) to the ground terminal. See “Figure 1: Typical ground
connections for single-chassis installation.” and “Figure 2: Typical ground connections for multiple-chassis
installation.” for proper examples on making PE ground connections.

TC-FPDXX2 and TK-FPDXX2 24 Vdc Power Supplies

1 Connect the positive side of the dc power line to the positive (+) terminal.
2 Connect the negative side of the dc power line to the negative (-) terminal.

3 Connect the PE ground (green with yellow stripe) to the ground terminal. See “Figure 1: Typical ground
connections for single-chassis installation.”and “Figure 2: Typical ground connections for multiple-chassis
installation.” for proper examples on making PE ground connections.

156 www.honeywell.com
 12 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

12.2 Preparing for Operation

Remove your power supply's protective label, as illustrated in Figure 6.

CAUTION
Make sure the chassis is mounted to your enclosure, rack or panels before you remove the protective label. When
installing multiple chassis in the same location, be sure all are installed before removing their power supply's
protective labels. This label protects the power supply from metal shavings during chassis installation.

Figure 5: Power supply protective label

157
12 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

12.3 Removing the Power Supply

WARNING
Take your process “Off Control” before removing the power supply. This means the CPM should be in its idle
state.

Attention
If the CPM battery is not installed or it is discharged, the CPM will not retain its database after power is removed.

Use the following procedure to remove the power supply from the chassis.
1 Open the power supply door and flip the power switch to its OFF position.

2 Turn OFF the main power source for the power supply. Disconnect the power line and ground leads from the
power supply terminals.
3 Loosen the two screws securing the power supply to the chassis.

4 Pull the power supply forward to slide it from the chassis.

158 www.honeywell.com
 12 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

12.4 Installing a Replacement Power Supply

Refer to the previous “Installing the Power Supply” on page 146 procedure in this Guide to install the
replacement power supply on the chassis

159
12 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

160 www.honeywell.com
13 I/O Link Interface Module Installation and Removal

The following table summarizes the features that are key to bringing Process Manager (PM) I/O into Experion.

Feature Description
High Availability I/O Many of the PM I/O processors allow for redundancy to
achieve minimal downtime. Redundant power supplies with
battery backup provide uninterrupted power.
High Integrity - Robust I/O Built-in features, such as redundancy, on-line diagnostics
and Div 2, non-incendive field wiring make PM I/O robust
for process I/O applications.
Additional features previously not available. Features such as integration of DE protocol-based field
devices and standby manual control.

Related topics
“PM I/O architecture” on page 162
“IOLIM Features” on page 163
“Control Builder serves as common configuration tool” on page 164
“Station provides centralized operator interface” on page 165
“Planning Considerations” on page 166
“Installing IOLIM Model TC-IOLI01” on page 168
“Monitoring PM I/O Functions Using Station Displays” on page 173

161
13 I/O LINK INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

13.1 PM I/O architecture

As part of Experion control hardware, the I/O Link Interface Module (IOLIM) is the link to the PM I/O control
hardware and field devices. As shown in the following figure, the IOLIM resides in any process controller card
file and is the network gateway between the Supervisory ControlNet and the PM I/O processors and Field
Terminal Assemblies (FTAs). It supports communications to access process data and maintenance information
from the I/O processors, FTAs and field devices.

Figure 6: Experion PM I/O Architecture

162 www.honeywell.com
 13 I/O LINK INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

13.2 IOLIM Features

The IOLIM is a double-wide module that plugs into a non-redundant or redundant controller chassis. It supports
Flash ROM-based storage of the I/O Link configuration, so in the event of a power interruption, the IOLIM
retains information on the I/O processors that have been configured. Configuration data for the I/O points reside
in the I/O processors.

163
13 I/O LINK INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

13.3 Control Builder serves as common configuration tool

The Experion Control Builder application supports integral configuration of the IOLIM and associated PM I/O
devices. This includes creating hardware blocks, associating the blocks, assigning modules, assigning devices,
and loading components. Please note that since configuration data for the PM I/O points reside in the I/O device
and not in the process controller, the I/O processor must be present during a configuration load.

164 www.honeywell.com
 13 I/O LINK INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

13.4 Station provides centralized operator interface

The Station application includes Detail Displays dedicated to configured IOLIMs and IOLINK function blocks,
PM I/O processors, I/O function blocks and associated field devices. They provide access to the same
parameters that are accessible through the configuration forms of Control Builder.
The reporting of alarm conditions and retrieval of process data for inclusion in group, trend, history, and
schematic displays are seamlessly integrated with Experion's existing notification management system.

165
13 I/O LINK INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

13.5 Planning Considerations

Consider the following while planning:

Related topics
“Experion system references” on page 166
“Installation declaration” on page 166
“I/O module allowance” on page 166
“PM I/O Component References” on page 166
“Intrinsically safe applications” on page 167

13.5.1 Experion system references

Refer to the following documents for general planning details and installation considerations for the Experion
system in general. For the sake of brevity, this guide does not repeat the applicable general guidelines,
consideration, cautions, so on. Those are covered in other guides.
• Control Hardware Planning Guide
If this is a new Experion system installation, we recommend that you familiarize yourself with the contents of
these publications before you install any Experion system equipment.

13.5.2 Installation declaration

Attention
This equipment shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC), ANSI/
NFPA 70, of the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC), C22.1. It is supplied as “open equipment” that is intended to be
mounted on a subpanel within an enclosure. The suitability of the enclosure and installed system shall be acceptable to
the local “authority having jurisdiction,” as defined in the NEC, or “authorized person” as defined in the CEC.

13.5.3 I/O module allowance

Be sure your Experion system I/O requirements do not exceed the capacities listed in the following table.

Component Total Per Controller Total Per Server

Maximum number of IOLIMs 2 20
Maximum number of Primary I/O processors (IOPs). 64
The maximum number of Primary I/O Processors (IOPs) per IOLIM
is 40. This number may vary depending on the required sampling
period of the IOPs.

• The IOLIM must reside in the same controller chassis as the C200/C200E CPM. Both redundant and non-
redundant chassis are supported. Therefore a redundant controller chassis must contain at least a Supervisory
ControlNet Interface (CNI), a CPM, a Redundancy Module (RM) and IOLIM. A non-redundant controller
chassis must contain at least a Supervisory ControlNet Interface (CNI), a CPM, and IOLIM.
• The controller chassis may contain additional CNI modules connected to other Experion I/O families, such
as Rail I/O control hardware.

13.5.4 PM I/O Component References

The following table identifies the hardware components available for integrating PM I/O control hardware and
field devices with a Experion system.

166 www.honeywell.com
 13 I/O LINK INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

Control Hardware Description Honeywell Model

Component Number
PM Module Double-width module that mount in a supervisory or redundant TC-IOLI01
controller chassis. Serves as the “gateway” between the Experion
(IOLIM)
control environment and the PM I/O processors and Field
Termination Assemblies.
IOLIM Cable Interconnecting cable between the IOLIM and the PM I/O card file. TC-KIOLxx
PM I/O Card File Card file that accepts I/O processor plug-in cards. Card files can MU-HPFxxx
accommodate 7 or up to 15 I/O processor cards.
I/O Processor (IOP) Plug-in Input/Output Processor card. Various
IOPs, along with Field Termination Assemblies (FTAs), perform
input and output scanning and processing on various field I/O
devices.
Field Termination Provides connection points for the process control field wiring. Various
Assembly (FTA) Fuses, relays, and resistors protect the FTA circuitry, and also sense,
condition, or operate the connected field device. The FTA
communicates with an associated IOP.
FTA Cable Interconnecting cable between an FTA and the associated IO MU-KFTAxx
processor.
or
MU-KFTSxx

13.5.5 Intrinsically safe applications

You are responsible for adhering to all applicable national codes and local ordinances for applying intrinsically
safe equipment in a potentially explosive atmosphere.

167
13 I/O LINK INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

13.6 Installing IOLIM Model TC-IOLI01

Figure 7: Double Wide Module TC-IOLI01

Electrostatic discharge
Electrostatic discharge can damage integrated circuits or semiconductors if you touch backpanel connector pins.
Follow these guidelines when you handle a module:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge static potential,
• Wear an approved wrist-strap grounding device,
• Do not touch the backpanel connector or connector pins,
• Do not touch circuit components inside the module,
• If available, use a static safe workstation,
• When not in use, keep the module in its static shield box or bag.

Related topics
“Setting I/O link physical address” on page 168
“Setting I/O link interface cable shield ground” on page 169
“Inserting module into chassis” on page 170
“Connecting I/O link interface cable to module” on page 171
“Loading IOLIM firmware” on page 172

13.6.1 Setting I/O link physical address

A hardware jumper pin is used to establish the IOLIM's Device Physical Address (DPA) on the I/O link. Use the
procedure below to set the hardware jumper on the IOLIM.
1 Remove the IOLIM assembly from its static shield bag.
2 Locate the hardware jumper at the bottom edge of the Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)

168 www.honeywell.com
 13 I/O LINK INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

3 Set the jumper according to your application:

• For redundant IOLIM configurations, the jumper setting on the primary and secondary IOLIMs must
be different. (If the jumper is used on the primary IOLIM in a redundant pair, then remove the jumper
from the secondary IOLIM.)
• For non-redundant configurations, the I/O link physical address does not matter. (The jumper can be
used or removed from the IOLIM.)

13.6.2 Setting I/O link interface cable shield ground

The I/O Link Interface is a serial communications network that connects all IOP card files associated with an
IOLIM. Redundant I/O link interface cables (labeled Link A and Link B) are used to connect the IOP card files
to the IOLIM. Each I/O link interface cable contains a cable shield that must be grounded.

CAUTION
For non-CE compliant installations, the cable shield ground for the I/O link interface cable should be made only
at one point. This ground point is at the first IOP card file backpanel of the link. (The first IOP card file is located
closest to the IOLIM or power system.)
For CE compliant installations, The cable shield ground is made at each IOLIM and each IOP card file
backpanel of the link.
See “I/O Link interface cable shield grounding” on page 244 for additional information.

Attention
The I/O Link Interface cable shield grounding must be carefully adhered to when installing a PM I/O subsystem.
Failure to follow the above guidelines can result in unwanted ground loops that may cause I/O Link communications
errors

Two jumpers located behind the front cover of the IOLIM are used to set the cable shield ground for the I/O link
interface cable. Follow the steps below to set the cable shield ground appropriately.
1 Open the front door of the IOLIM.
2 Locate the hardware jumpers designated as A Shield and B Shield on front edge of the daughterboard. See
figure.

3 Determine if this process control system is a CE compliant or non-CE compliant installation. See CAUTION
above.
• If your system is a CE compliant installation, make sure that a jumper is present on pins that are
labeled A Shield and B Shield.
• If your system is a non-CE compliant installation, remove the jumpers from both A Shield and B
Shield.

169
13 I/O LINK INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

4 Close the front door to the IOLIM.

13.6.3 Inserting module into chassis

Use the following procedure to insert the IOLIM into the controller chassis. This procedure assumes that this is
the initial installation of an IOLIM in an unpowered chassis.
1 Position the module at the desired chassis slots location. For example, slots 1 and 2.
(Remember that slot numbering is zero-based and the left most slot is number “0”.)
2 Align the module's circuit board with the top and bottom chassis guides

3 Slide the module into the chassis until the module tabs “click” into position.

4 Go to the next procedure Connecting I/O link interface cable to module.

170 www.honeywell.com
 13 I/O LINK INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

13.6.4 Connecting I/O link interface cable to module

Cable Model TC-KIOLxx is used to connect the IOLIM to the PM I/O card file and the PM power system. The
cable assembly is available in various lengths:

Cable Model Cable Length

• TC-KIOL02 2 meters
• TC-KIOL05 5 meters
• TC-KIOL10 10 meters

Use the following procedure to connect the I/O link interface cable to the IOLIM. This procedure assumes that
the IOLIM is installed in an unpowered control cabinet and controller chassis.
1 Be sure that the TC-KIOLxx cable is long enough to reach from the IOLIM connectors to the PM power
system OUTPUT connector. See Figure.

2 Open the front cover of the IOLIM to access two LINK connectors.
Connect the cables with RJ-45 connectors marked “A” and “B” to the appropriate connector marked LINK
A and LINK B in the IOLIM.

171
13 I/O LINK INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

3 Open the front cover of the power supply in the process controller chassis.
Connect the red (+) and black (-) wire pair to the + and - terminals of the DC INPUT POWER SUPPLY
terminal block.
4 Mate the cable ends with white connectors marked “LINK A” and “LINK B” with the appropriate
“Installing I/O Link Interface cable” on page 242.
5 Run the cable connector marked “C1” to the PM power system inside the control cabinet.
Connect cable to one of the OUTPUT connectors on the PM power system backpanel.

13.6.5 Loading IOLIM firmware

Attention
If the IOLIM is not installed and pre-configured by the factory, users must load the IOLIM's firmware to make it fully
operational. This is also true for any replacement IOLIM ordered separately from the factory.

Once the Control hardware is installed and system communications are established, the IOLIM’s firmware must
be updated. The procedure for loading the IOLIM’s firmware is similar to the one used for loading the CPM's
personality image. Refer to Loading IOLIM personality image - Optional in the Startup and Shutdown Guide to
update the IOLIM's firmware.

Tip
The boot and personality image files are iolimboot.nvs and iolimapp.nvs, respectively, and they are at this
directory location:
C:\Program Files\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Engineering Tools\system\firmware

172 www.honeywell.com
 13 I/O LINK INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

13.7 Monitoring PM I/O Functions Using Station Displays

Related topics
“Using Station Detail displays” on page 173
“Using Station Event Summary display” on page 174

13.7.1 Using Station Detail displays

The Experion Server Station application includes pre-configured Detail displays for the IOLIM, IOLink and PM
device function blocks. These displays are the default entries for the Point Detail Page parameter on the Server
Parameters tab of the configuration form.
The following figure shows a sample IOLIM Detail display for reference. The left side of the display shows a
“live” view of the IOLIM front panel. A view of configuration data with real time updates is provided on the
right of the display.

Figure 8: Typical IOLIM Detail display in Station

Refer to the Operator's Guide for detailed information about calling up, navigating, and viewing Station
displays.
Once you establish communications with a PM I/O link you can begin monitoring the status of any component
that has been loaded as part of a Control Strategy to a IOLIM with points registered in the Experion Server. The
Detail displays let you quickly view the component's current state, fault status, and pertinent configuration data.

173
13 I/O LINK INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

The PM I/O Detail displays do feature convenient links to related PM I/O component displays for easy access to
associated data.

13.7.2 Using Station Event Summary display

Like the Detail displays, the Alarm and Event Summary displays support the integration of PM I/O generated
notifications and events. It is integrated with Experion component data and is for the most part self-explanatory.
The following figure shows a typical Alarm Summary display that includes IOLIM, Link, and Device
indications. Use this display to get a quick review of recent conditions that have raised alarms within the
system.

174 www.honeywell.com
 13 I/O LINK INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

Figure 9: Alarm Summary display includes Device related details.

175
13 I/O LINK INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

176 www.honeywell.com
14 Process Manager I/O Installation and Wiring

Refer to the following documents for general planning details and installation considerations for the Experion
system in general. For the sake of brevity, this guide does not repeat the applicable general guidelines,
consideration, cautions, so on. Those are covered in other Guides.
• Control Hardware Planning Guide
If this is a new Experion system installation, we recommend that you familiarize yourself with the contents of
these publications before you install any Experion system equipment.

Attention
This equipment shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC), ANSI/
NFPA 70, of the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC), C22.1. It is supplied as “open equipment” that is intended to be
mounted on a subpanel within an enclosure. The suitability of the enclosure and installed system shall be acceptable to
the local “authority having jurisdiction,” as defined in the NEC, or “authorized person” as defined in the CEC.

Related topics
“Experion PM I/O hardware” on page 178
“IOLIM module allowance” on page 180
“Intrinsically safe applications” on page 167
“Preparing to Install Process Manager I/O Hardware” on page 182
“FTA Installation Considerations” on page 192
“Installing Standard FTAs” on page 199
“Field wiring to FTA terminals” on page 203
“Installing Galvanically Isolated FTAs” on page 204
“Installing PM IOP Card Files” on page 213
“I/O Link Address Pinning” on page 217
“Installing PM I/O Processor Cards” on page 221
“Installing Remote I/O” on page 222
“Installing Power Systems” on page 234
“Cable Installation” on page 240

177
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.1 Experion PM I/O hardware

Various hardware components comprise the Process Manager I/O (PM I/O). The following table identifies the
hardware components available for integrating PM I/O devices with an Experion system.

Hardware Component Description Honeywell Part

Number
PM I/O Control Cabinets Single or dual-access NEMA 1-rated equipment cabinets that house MU-CBSM01 /
Process Controller chassis, IOP card files, Power System, and the
MU-CBDM01
FTA mounting channels. See Appendices C and D in the Control
Hardware Planning Guide for additional information.
PM I/O Link Interface Double-width module that mounts in a Supervisory or redundant TC-IOLI01
Module process controller chassis. Serves as the “gateway” between the
Experion control environment and the PM I/O processors and Field
(IOLIM)
Termination Assemblies.
IOLIM Cable Interconnecting cable between the IOLIM and the PM I/O card file. TC-KIOLxx
PM I/O Card File Card file that accepts I/O processor plug-in cards (IOPs). Card files MU-HPFxxx
can accommodate 7 or up to 15 I/O processor cards.
I/O Processor (IOP) Plug-in Input/Output Processor card. Various
IOPs, along with Field Termination Assemblies (FTAs), perform
input and output scanning and processing on various I/O field
devices.
Field Termination Provides connection points for the process control wiring (field Various
Assembly (FTA) wiring). Fuses, relays, and resistors protect the FTA circuitry, and
also sense, condition, or operate the connected device. The FTA
communicates with an associated IOP. Most FTAs are available as
standard FTA and also Galvanically Isolated FTA.
FTA Cable Interconnecting cable between an FTA and the associated IOP. MU-KFTAxx
MU-KFTSxx
Remote I/O using I/O Through the use of fiber optic couplers and cables, an IOP card file MC-IOLM02
Link Extender and associated FTAs can be located remotely up to 8 kilometers.
MC-IOLX02
MC-ILDX03
Power Systems Power supply modules that provide 24 Vdc power to the PM I/O MU-PSRxxx
card files and associated equipment. Redundant power is available
MC-PSRxxx
using optional battery backup, a secondary power supply module or
an uninterruptible power supply. AC Only

178 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 10: IOLIM and PM I/O Topology

179
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.2 IOLIM module allowance

Be sure your Experion system I/O requirements do not exceed the capacities listed in the following table.

Component Total Per Controller Total Per Server

Maximum number of IOLIMs 2 20
Maximum number of Primary IO Processors (IOPs) per Controller. 64
The maximum number of Primary IOPs per IOLIM is 40. This
number may vary depending on the required sampling period of the
IOPs.

Note: A Primary IOP is considered either a single IOP or a redundant IOP pair.

180 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.3 Intrinsically safe applications

You are responsible for adhering to all applicable national codes and local ordinances for applying intrinsically
safe equipment in a potentially explosive atmosphere.

181
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.4 Preparing to Install Process Manager I/O Hardware

• Be sure you have reviewed the “Pre-installation Considerations” on page 19 in this Guide and confirmed
that you have taken steps to minimize Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
• Check that no power is applied to the equipment cabinet.
Verify that you have the appropriate PM I/O hardware for your application. The following table lists IOP card
types, model numbers and the minimum firmware revision level that is compatible for operation in Experion.

Attention
Prefix MC in the model number indicates conformally coated components.

Table 10: IOP Cards and Firmware Revision

IOP Card Type Model Firmware Revision

Analog Input - Low Level (LLAI) MU/MC-PAIL02 6.0 (J)
Analog Input - Low Level Multiplexer MU/MC-PLAM02 4.1 (F)
(LLMUX)
Analog Input - Remote Hardened MU/MC-PRHM01 6.0 (E)
Multiplexer (RHMUX)
Analog Input - High Level (HLAI) MC-PAIH03 6.1 (G)
Analog Input - High Level HART capable MC-PHAI01 N/R
(HLAIHART)
Smart Transmitter Interface - Multivariable MU/MC-PSTX03 6.0 (F)
(STI_MV)
Analog Output - 8-Channel MC-PAOX03 N/R
Analog Output - 16-Channel (AO_16) MC-PAOY22 N/R
Analog Output - 16-Channel HART Capable MC-PHAO01 N/R
(AO16HART)
Digital Input (DI) MU/MC-PDIX02 N/R
Digital Input - 24 V (DI_24V) MU/MC-PDIY22 N/R
Digital Input Sequence of Events (DISOE) MU/MC-PDIS12 N/R
Digital Output - 16-Channel (DO_16) MU/MC-PDOX02 N/R
Digital Output - 32-Channel (DO_32) MU/MC-PDOY22 N/R

Note: N/R denotes no firmware restrictions.

The table below lists the model number of the “Experion PM I/O hardware” on page 178 and the associated
“Experion PM I/O hardware” on page 178 (FTAs) available for Experion systems. Additional hardware
components are listed and described in the second and third tables that follow.
If you are “Installing Galvanically Isolated FTAs” on page 204, the model numbers reference and associated
hardware are listed there.

182 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.4.1 PM I/O Processor (IOP) and FTA Model Numbers

Table 11: PM IOP and FTA Model Numbers Reference

IOP Model No. IOP Type and Description Associated Standard FTA Description
FTA Model Nos.
Analog Input
MU-PAIL02 / MC- Low Level Analog Input, (LLAI) MU- TAIL01 / LLAI FTA with Compression
PAIL02 Terminals
MC-TAIL01
Single IOP Interface
MU- TAIL02 /
MC-TAIL02
MU- TAIL03 /
MC-TAIL03*
MU-PLAM02 / MC- Low Level Mux Analog Input, MU-TAMR02 / LLMux RTD FTA with Compression
PLAM02 (LLMux) Terminals, Single IOP Interface
MC-TAMR02
MU-TAMR03 /
MC-TAMR03 *
MC-TAMR04 * LLMux RTD FTA with Compression
Terminals, Solid State Relays,
(Replaces
Single IOP Interface
Mx-TAMR02 and
Mx-TAMR03)
MU-TAMT02 / LLMux TC FTA with
MC-TAMT02 Local CJR,
MU-TAMT03 / Compression Terminals,
MC-TAMT03 * Single IOP Interface
MC-TAMT04 * LLMux TC FTA with
(Replaces
Local CJR,
Mx-TAMT02 and
Compression Terminals, Solid State
Mx-TAMT03) Relays,
Single IOP Interface
MU-TAMT12 / LLMux TC FTA with
MC-TAMT12 Remote CJR,
MU-TAMT13 / Compression Terminals,
MC-TAMT13 * Dual IOP Interface
MU-PRHM01 MC- Remote Hardened Mux, MC-GRMT01 * RHMUX TC FTA with Local CJR,
PRHM01 * (RHMUX) IOP Screw Terminals
MU-PAIH02 / High Level Analog Input, MU-TAIH01 HLAI/STI FTA with Compression
Terminals Single IOP Interface
MC-PAIH02 (HLAI) MU-TAIH02 /
Non-CE Compliant MC-TAIH02
MU-TAIH12 / HLAI/STI FTA with Compression
Terminals
MC-TAIH12
Redundant IOP Interface

183
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

IOP Model No. IOP Type and Description Associated Standard FTA Description
FTA Model Nos.
MU-TAIH22 / Enhanced Power HLAI/STI FTA with
Comp. Terminals
MC-TAIH22
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-TAIH52 / HLAI/STI FTA with
MC-TAIH52 Screw Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-TAIH62 / Enhanced Power HLAI/STI FTA with
Screw Terminals
MC-TAIH62
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-PAIH03 / High Level Analog Input, (HLAI) MU-TAIH03 / HLAI FTA with
CE Compliant
MC-PAIH03 * MC-TAIH03* Compression Terminals
Single IOP Interface
MU-TAIH13 / HLAI FTA with Compression
Terminals Redundant IOP Interface
MC-TAIH13*
MU-TAIH23 / Enhanced Power HLAI FTA with
Comp. Terminals
MC-TAIH23*
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-TAIH53 / HLAI FTA with
MC-TAIH53* Screw Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface
MC-PHAI01 * High Level Analog Input, HART- MU-TAIH04 / AI HART-Compatible FTA with
Capable, CE Compliant Comp. Terminals
MC-TAIH04 *
(HLAIHART)
Single IOP Interface
MU-TAIH14 / AI HART-Compatible FTA with
Comp. Terminals
MC-TAIH14
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-TAIH15 / AI HART-Compatible FTA with
Comp. Terminals
MC-TAIH15 *
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-TAIH54 / AI HART-Compatible FTA with
Screw Terminals
MC-TAIH54 *
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-PSTX02 / Smart Transmitter Interface, (STI) MU-TAIH01 HLAI/STI FTA with Compression
Terminals Single IOP Interface
MC-PSTX02 Smart Transmitter Interface, MU-TAIH02 /
Multivariable, (STI_MV)
MU-PSTX03 / MC- MC-TAIH02
PSTX03*
MU-TAIH22 / Enhanced Power HLAI/STI FTA with
Comp. Terminals
MC-TAIH22
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-TAIH62 / Enhanced Power HLAI/STI FTA with
Screw Terminals
MC-TAIH62
Redundant IOP Interface

184 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

IOP Model No. IOP Type and Description Associated Standard FTA Description
FTA Model Nos.
MU-TSTX03 / STI FTA with
MC-TSTX03 * Compression Terminals
Single IOP Interface
MU-TSTX13 / STI FTA with
MC-TSTX13 * Compression Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-TSTX53 / STI FTA with
MC-TSTX53 * Screw Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface
Analog Output
MU-PAOX02 Analog Output, (AO) MU-TAOX01 AO FTA with
MU-PAOX03 / MC- 8-Channel MU-TAOX02 / MC- Compression Terminals
PAOX03 TAOX02 *
Single IOP Interface
MU-TAOX12 / MC- AO FTA with
TAOX12 *
Compression Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-TAOX52 / MC- AO FTA with
TAOX52 *
Screw Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-PAOY22 / MC- Analog Output, (AO) MU-TAOY22 / MC- AO FTA with
PAOY22 * TAOY22 *
16-Channel Compression Terminals,
Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-TAOY23 / MC- AO FTA with
TAOY23
Compression Terminals,
Without Standby Manual Device
Connector
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-TAOY52 / MC- AO FTA with
TAOY52 *
Screw Terminals,
Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-TAOY53 / MC- AO FTA with
TAOY53
Screw Terminals,
Without Standby Manual Device
Connector
Redundant IOP Interface

185
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

IOP Model No. IOP Type and Description Associated Standard FTA Description
FTA Model Nos.
MU-THAO11 / MC- AO FTA with
THAO11 *
Compression Terminals
Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface
HART connection capability
MC-PHAO01 * Analog Output, HART 16- MU-TAOY24 / MC- AO HART-Compatible FTA with
Channel (AO16HART) TAOY24*
Compression Terminals,
Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-TAOY25 / MC- AO HART-Compatible FTA with
TAOY25
Compression Terminals,
Without Standby Manual Device
Connector
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-TAOY54 / MC- AO HART-Compatible FTA with
TAOY54 * Screw Terminals,
Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface
MU-TAOY55 / MC- AO HART-Compatible FTA with
TAOY55 Screw Terminals,
Without Standby Manual Device
Connector
Redundant IOP Interface
Digital Input
MU-PDIX02 / Digital Input MU-TDID11 24 Vdc DI FTA with Compression
Terminals
MC-PDIX02 * MU-TDID12 /
MC-TDID12 *
MU-TDID52 / 24 Vdc DI FTA with Screw Terminals
MC-TDID52 *
MU-TDID72 / 24 Vdc DI FTA with Screw Terminals
MC-TDID72
MU-TDIA11 120 Vac DI FTA with Compression
Terminals
MU-TDIA12 /
MC-TDIA12 *
MU-TDIA52 / 120 Vac DI FTA with Screw Terminals
MC-TDIA52 *
MU-TDIA72 / 120 Vac DI FTA with Screw Terminals
MC-TDIA72
MU-TDIA21 240 Vac DI FTA with Compression
Terminals
MU-TDIA22 /
MC-TDIA22 *

186 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

IOP Model No. IOP Type and Description Associated Standard FTA Description
FTA Model Nos.
MU-TDIA62 / 240 Vac DI FTA with Screw Terminals
MC-TDIA62*
MU-PDIS12 / Digital Input Sequence of Events Compatible with Digital Input FTAs:
(DISOE)
MC-PDIS12 MU-TDID12 / MC-TDID12
MU-TDID52 / MC-TDID52
MU-TDID72 / MC-TDID72
MU-TDIA12 / MC-TDIA12
MU-TDIA52 / MC-TDIA52
MU-TDIA72 / MC-TDIA72
MU-TDIA22 / MC-TDIA22
MU-TDIA62 / MC-TDIA62
MU-PDIY22 / Digital Input MU-TDIY22 / 24 Vdc DI FTA with Compression
Terminals
MC-PDIY22 * MC-TDIY22 *
MU-TDIY62 / 24 Vdc DI FTA with Screw
Terminals
MC-TDIY62 *
Digital Output
MU-PDOX02 / Digital Output, (DO_16) MU-TDON11 24 Vdc Nonisolated DO FTA
MC-PDOX02* MU-TDON12 / Compression Terminals
MC-TDON12 *
MU-TDON52 / 24 Vdc Nonisolated DO FTA-Screw
Terminals
MC-TDON52 *
MU-TDOD11 3-30 Vdc Solid State DO FTA with
MU-TDOD12 / Compression Terminals
MC-TDOD12
MU-TDOD13 /
MC-TDOD13
MU-TDOD14 /
MC-TDOD14 *
MU-TDOD52 / 3-30 Vdc Solid State DO FTA with
Screw Terminals
MC-TDOD52
MU-TDOD53 /
MC-TDOD53
MU-TDOD52 /
MC-TDOD52 *
MU-TDOD21 31-200 Vdc Solid State DO FTA with
MU-TDOD22 / Compression Terminals
MC-TDOD22
MU-TDOD23 /
MC-TDOD23 *

187
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

IOP Model No. IOP Type and Description Associated Standard FTA Description
FTA Model Nos.
MU-TDOD62 / 31-200 Vdc Solid State DO FTA with
Screw Terminals
MC-TDOD62
MU-TDOD63 /
MC-TDOD63 *
MU-TDOA11 120/240 Vac Solid State DO FTA with
Compression Terminals
MU-TDOA12 /
MC-TDOA12
MU-TDOA13 /
MC-TDOA13 *
MU-TDOA52 / 120/240 Vac Solid State DO FTA with
Screw Terminals
MC-TDOA52
MU-TDOA53 /
MC-TDOA53 *
MU-TDOR11 120 Vac/120 Vdc Relay DO FTA with
Compression Terminals
MU-TDOR12 /
MC-TDOR12 *
MU-TDOR52 / 120 Vac/120 Vdc Relay DO FTA with
Screw Terminals
MC-TDOR52 *
MU-TDOR21 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay ;DO FTA with
Compression Terminals
MU-TDOR22 /
MC-TDOR22 *
MU-TDOR62 / 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay ;DO FTA with
Screw Terminals
MC-TDOR62*
MU-PDOY22 / Digital Output, (DO_32) MU-TDOY22 / MC- 24 Vdc Isolated DO FTA with
TDOY22 *
MC-PDOY22 * Compression Terminals
MU-TDOY62 / 24 Vdc Isolated DO FTA with Screw
Terminals
MC-TDOY62 *
MU-TDOY23 / MC- 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay ;DO FTA with
TDOY23 *
Compression Terminals
MU-TDOY63 / MC- 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay ;DO FTA with
TDOY63 * Screw Terminals
* CE Compliant hardware available.

188 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.4.2 Additional PM I/O hardware components

Table 12: PM I/O Hardware Model Numbers Reference

Component Model Number Description

PM I/O Cabinets MU-CBSM01 / Single or dual-access NEMA 1-rated equipment cabinets
that house Process Controller chassis, IOP card files, Power
MU-CBDM01
System, and the FTA mounting channels. See Appendices C
MU-CBSX01 / and D in the Control Hardware Planning Guide for
additional information.
MU-CBDX01*
“Installing PM IOP Card 7-Slot Left Provides 7-Slots and interface connectors for IOP cards. The
Files” on page 213 card slots are numbered 1 to 7 and can be installed adjacent
MU-HPFH01
to a 7-slot right IOP card file.
MU-HPFI03
7-Slot Right Provides 7-Slots and interface connectors for IOP cards. The
card slots are numbered 9 to 15 and can be installed adjacent
MU-HPFH11
to a 7-slot left IOP card file.
MU-HPFI13
15-Slot Card File Provides 15-Slots and interface connectors for IOP cards.
MU-HPFX02
MU-HPFI23
“Installing IOP to FTA MU-KFTAxx Connects the IOP to its associated FTA.
Cables” on page 245
Or
MU-KFTSxx
“Vertical FTA mounting Provides a mounting surface and wiring channels for all
channels” on page 196 FTAs. The mounting channels are installed in a vertical
orientation inside an equipment cabinet and accommodate
standard sizes of FTAs, process wiring, power wiring and
connecting cables.
“Horizontal FTA mounting Provides a mounting surface and wiring channels for all
channel” on page 197 FTAs. The mounting channels are mounted in a horizontal
orientation inside an equipment cabinet and accommodate
standard sizes of FTAs, process wiring, power wiring and
connecting cables.
“Power Adapter mounting MU-TLPA02 Takes the low level analog inputs from two LLMux FTAs
location” on page 304 (16 channels each) and provides 32 channel inputs to the
LLMux IOP.
(Used with LL MUX
Analog Input FTAs)
“Installing IOP to FTA MU-KFTAxx Connects a LLMux IOP to a model
Cables” on page 245
Or MU-TLPA02 power adapter.
MU-KFTSxx
“Figure 80: Model MU- MU-KLAMxx Connects the power adapter to the LLMux FTA.
TLPA02 Power Adapter
Or
Layout”
MU-KLXxxx
“RHMUX Power Adapter MU-GRPA01 (IS) Takes the low level analog inputs from two RHMux FTAs
mounting” on page 323 (16 channels each) and provides 32 channel inputs to the
Or
RHMux IOP.
(Used with RHMUX
MU-TRPA01 (NI)
Analog Input FTAs)

189
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Component Model Number Description

“Power Adapter to MU-KLO305 Connects the power adapter (MU-GRPA01 or MU-TRPA01)
RHMUX FTA Cabling” on to the RHMUX FTA when installed outdoors.
page 329
“About This Document” 51304589-xxx Allows remote sensing of the Cold Junction Reference for
model MU-TAMT12 and MU-TAMT13 Thermocouple
LLMux FTAs.
“About This Document” MU-KRCJ00 Connects the remote CJR sensor to model MU-TAMT12 and
MU-TAMT13 Thermocouple LLMux FTAs
“Digital Input Power MU-TDPR01 Provides an external fused 24 Vdc power source to the 24
Distribution Assembly” on Vdc digital input FTAs for the process control contacts
MU-TDPR02
page 403
“Marshalling Panel, Model MU-GMAR52 Provides accessibility to the signals from the auxiliary
MU-GMAR52” on connectors on the Galvanically Isolated FTAs, but it can be
page 528 used as a general purpose marshalling panel in the
subsystem.
“Installing Power MU/MC-PSRXxx MU/MC- Provides 24 Vdc power for operation of all IOP cards,
Systems” on page 234 PSRBxx Power Distribution Assemblies and FTAs, a nominal 3.6
Vdc battery output for backup of the IOP memory circuits,
and a nominal 0.25 ampere, 6 Vac output for operation of a
LLAI line frequency noise cancellation clock circuit.
AC Only Power System This Power System is intended for use with an
(optional) uninterruptible ac power source. It does not provide a
battery backup option for continuous operation in the event
of a primary power loss.
* CE Compliant hardware available.

Attention
Generally, the suffix “xx” in the model number represents the length of the cable in meters.

14.4.3 Remote I/O Hardware

Remote I/O components provide the ability to locate IOP card files and associated FTAs up to 8 kilometers (5
miles) from the local IOLIM and IOP card files. The following table summarizes the hardware components used
in remote I/O applications.

Table 13: Remote I/O Hardware Model Number Reference

Component Model Number Description

“Two types of I/O link “I/O link extender card Standard I/O Link Extender card is the interface to remote
extenders - standard and long installation and link IOP card files located up to 1.3 kilometers (4000 feet).
distance” on page 222 termination” on page 224
MC-IOLM02
MC-IOLX02
“I/O link extender card Long Distance I/O Link Extender card is the interface to
installation, link selection remote IOP card files located up to 8 kilometers (5 miles).
and link termination” on
page 230
MC-ILDX03
“I/O link extender adapter MU-ILES01 The kit consists of a connector adapter, shroud, and
kit” on page 226 mounting spacers. It is used only in CE Compliant
installations of remote I/O links.

190 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Component Model Number Description

“I/O Interface cable 51195479-xxx A metallic cable that connects a primary IOP card file and
installation” on page 226 its associated secondary IOP card file in a redundant
51204042-xxx
installation.
I/O Fiber Optic Coupler “Fiber optic cable Standard I/O Fiber Optic Coupler module.
installation” on page 232
(Included with I/O Link Part number 51201557-150 supports one pair (Link A and
Extender Card) 51201557-150 Link B) of fiber optic cable connections for standard I/O
Link Extender card.
51201557-350 Part number 51201557-350 supports three pair (Link A and
Link B) of fiber optic cable connections for long distance
I/O Link Extender card.
“Fiber optic coupler module “Fiber optic coupler module Long Distance I/O Fiber Optic Coupler module.
installation” on page 232 installation remote I/O” on
Part number 51309208-150 supports one pair (Link A and
page 226.
51309208-150 Link B) of fiber optic cable connections for long distance
51309208-150 I/O Link Extender card.
“Fiber optic cable Used to connect the I/O fiber optic couplers of the local IOP
installation” on page 227 card file and the remote IOP card file(s).

Attention
Generally, the suffix “xx” in the model number represents the length of the cable in meters.

14.4.4 Check PM I/O Components

• FTAs are available in various types and sizes depending upon the IOP used and the field devices connected
to it. See “FTA Installation Considerations” on page 192 for detailed information on FTA types and
installation requirements.
• See Appendices C and D in the Control Hardware Planning Guide for the dimensions and installation
considerations for the PM I/O control cabinet enclosures.
• For all hardware associated with remote I/O applications (such as I/O Link Extender Cards, Adapter kits and
Fiber optic coupler modules), see “Installing Remote I/O” on page 222.
• See “Installing Power Systems” on page 234 mounting dimensions and installation instructions for PM I/O
power system assemblies.
• All cables are identified by either model number or part number. Numbers should be stamped on the
connector, or on a tag attached around the cable. The length of the cable can be identified by the last two (or
three) number digits of the model number (or part number). The last two digits of the model number identify
the length in meters. The last three digits of the part number identify the cable length in inches.

14.4.5 Check PM Cabinet configuration

Confirm the cabinet configuration of your PM I/O components. Be sure that your planned cabinet configuration
complies with the configuration rules outlined in Appendix C or Appendix D in the Control Hardware Planning
Guide. And, check the installation restrictions and recommendations outlined in the Control Hardware
Configuration section of the Control Hardware Planning Guide.

191
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.5 FTA Installation Considerations

Field Termination Assemblies (FTAs) are available in two basic varieties, standard FTAs and Galvanically
Isolated FTAs. Although there are various sizes and types of FTAs, all FTAs are installed on “FTA mounting
channel requirements” on page 196 that can be mounted either in PM I/O cabinets or on facility terminal panels.
Description of the FTAs and the installation requirements for FTAs on the FTA mounting channels are covered
in the following subsections.

Related topics
“FTA selection and mounting considerations” on page 192
“FTA mounting sizes” on page 192
“Galvanically Isolated FTAs” on page 193
“Field wiring terminal types” on page 193
“Standard FTAs” on page 193
“FTA mounting channel requirements” on page 196
“Vertical FTA mounting channels” on page 196
“Vertical bus bar” on page 197
“Horizontal FTA mounting channel” on page 197
“Horizontal bus bar” on page 198

14.5.1 FTA selection and mounting considerations

FTA selection is generally based on the number of channels in the FTA, the FTA's mounting size, and the field
wiring terminal type on the FTA. The applicable information for all available standard FTAs is summarized in
the section “Standard FTAs” on page 193.

14.5.2 FTA mounting sizes

Mounting size of the various FTAs are classified as size, A, B, and C, where:
• A-size requires one mounting space which is 152 millimeters (6 inches) on the FTA mounting channel,
• B-size FTA is bigger and requires two mounting spaces which are 307 millimeters (12.1 inches) on FTA
mounting channel.
• C-size FTA requires three spaces, or 462 millimeters (18.2 inches).
All FTA sizes have a width dimension of 120 millimeters (4.75 inches). The following figure illustrates the
actual dimensions for the three FTA sizes.

192 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 11: FTA Mounting Size Dimensions

14.5.3 Galvanically Isolated FTAs

If you are installing Galvanically Isolated FTAs, there are more requirements and restrictions governing
installation. It is suggested that you read the information here on FTA mounting channel requirements and then
go to “Installing Galvanically Isolated FTAs” on page 204 for more specific instructions on Galvanically
Isolated FTA installation.

14.5.4 Field wiring terminal types

There are three types of field wiring terminals available on standard FTAs. They are:
• Compression (C) type with removable terminal connector(s)
• Screw (S) type with stationary terminals
• Removable screw (RS) type with removable terminal connector(s).
The following table summarizes which wiring terminal types are available for standard FTAs by model number.

14.5.5 Standard FTAs

Attention
The prefix MC in the model number indicates that the FTA is available with a conformal coating, MU indicates a
nonconformally coated FTA.

193
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Table 14: Standard FTAs, Number of Channels and Mounting Size

Model Number Description Field No. of Mount-

WiringTe Chnls
ing Size
rm. Type
Analog Input
MU/MC-TAIL02 Low Level Analog Input (Single IOP) C 8 B
MU/MC-TAIL03 Low Level Analog Input (Single IOP) C 8 B
MU/MC-TAMR02 Low Level Analog Input Multiplexer RTD (Single IOP) C 16 B
MU/MC-TAMR03* Low Level Analog Input Multiplexer RTD (Single IOP) C 16 B
MC-TAMR04 * Low Level Analog Input Multiplexer RTD (Single IOP) C 16 B
MU/MC-TAMT02 Low Level Analog Input Multiplexer TC-Local CJR C 16 B
(Single IOP)
MU/MC-TAMT03 * Low Level Analog Input Multiplexer TC-Local CJR C 16 B
(Single IOP)
MC-TAMT04 * Low Level Analog Input Multiplexer TC-Local CJR C 16 B
(Single IOP)
MU/MC-TAMT12 Low Level Analog Input Multiplexer TC-Remote CJR C 16 B
(Single IOP)
MU/MC-TAMT13 * Low Level Analog Input Multiplexer TC-Remote CJR C 16 B
(Single IOP)
MU/MC-TAIH02 High Level Analog Input/STI (Single IOP) C 16 A
MU/MC-TAIH03 * High Level Analog Input (Single IOP) C 16 A
MU/MC-TAIH04 * High Level Analog Input, C 16 A
HART-Compatible (Single IOP)
MU/MC-TAIH12 High Level Analog Input/STI C 16 B
MU/MC-TAIH13 * High Level Analog Input C 16 B
MU/MC-TAIH14 High Level Analog Input, C 16 B
HART-Compatible
MU/MC-TAIH15 * High Level Analog Input, C 16 B
HART-Compatible
MU/MC-TAIH22 Enhanced Power High Level Analog Input/STI C 16 B
MU/MC-TAIH23 * Enhanced Power High Level Analog Input C 16 B
MU/MC-TAIH52 High Level Analog Input/STI S 16 B
MU/MC-TAIH53 * High Level Analog Input S 16 B
MU/MC-TAIH54 * High Level Analog Input, S 16 B
HART-Compatible
MU/MC-TAIH62 Enhanced Power High Level Analog Input/STI S 16 B
MU/MC-TSTX03 * Smart Transmitter Interface (Single IOP) C 16 A
MU/MC-TSTX13 * Smart Transmitter Interface C 16 B
MU/MC-TSTX53 * Smart Transmitter Interface C 16 B
Analog Output
MU/MC-TAOX02 Analog Output (Single IOP) C 8 A
MU/MC-TAOX12 Analog Output C 8 B
MU/MC-TAOX52 Analog Output S 8 B

194 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Model Number Description Field No. of Mount-

WiringTe Chnls
ing Size
rm. Type
MU/MC-THAO11 * Analog Output With HART and Standby Manual C 16 B
connectors
MU/MC-TAOY22 * Analog Output With Standby Manual connectors C 16 B
MU/MC-TAOY23 Analog Output Without Standby Manual connectors C 16 B
MU/MC-TAOY24 * Analog Output With Standby Manual connectors, HART- C 16 B
Compatible
MU/MC-TAOY25 Analog Output Without Standby Manual connectors, C 16 B
HART-Compatible
MU/MC-TAOY52 * Analog Output With Standby Manual connectors S 16 B
MU/MC-TAOY53 Analog Output Without Standby Manual connectors S 16 B
MU/MC-TAOY54 * Analog Output With Standby Manual connectors, HART- S 16 B
Compatible
MU/MC-TAOY55 Analog Output Without Standby Manual connectors, S 16 B
HART-Compatible
Digital Input
MU/MC-TDID12 * 24 Vdc Digital Input C 32 C
MU/MC-TDID52 * 24 Vdc Digital Input S 32 C
MU/MC-TDID72 24 Vdc Digital Input (Single IOP) C 32 B
MU/MC-TDIY22 * 24 Vdc Digital Input C 32 B
MU/MC-TDIY62 * 24 Vdc Digital Input S 32 B
MU-TDIA11 120 Vac Digital Input C 32 C
MU/MC-TDIA12 120 Vac Digital Input C 32 C
MU/MC-TDIA52 120 Vac Digital Input S 32 C
MU/MC-TDIA72 120 Vac Digital Input (Single IOP) RS 32 C
MU/MC-TDIA22 240 Vac Digital Input C 32 C
MU/MC-TDIA62 240 Vac Digital Input S 32 C
Digital Output
MU/MC-TDON12 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output C 16 B
MU/MC-TDON52 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output S 16 B
MU/MC-TDOY22 * 24 Vdc Isolated Digital Output C 32 B
MU/MC-TDOY62 * 24 Vdc Isolated Digital Output S 32 B
MU/MC-TDOD12 * 3-30 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output C 16 B
MU/MC-TDOD13 3-30 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output C 16 B
MU/MC-TDOD14 3-30 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output C 16 B
MU/MC-TDOD52 * 3-30 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output S 16 B
MU/MC-TDOD53 3-30 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output S 16 B
MU/MC-TDOD54 3-30 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output S 16 B
MU/MC-TDOD22 31-200 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output C 16 B
MU/MC-TDOD23 31-200 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output C 16 B
MU/MC-TDOD62 31-200 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output S 16 B
MU/MC-TDOD63 31-200 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output S 16 B

195
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Model Number Description Field No. of Mount-

WiringTe Chnls
ing Size
rm. Type
MU/MC-TDOA12 120/240 Vac Solid-State Digital Output C 16 B
MU/MC-TDOA13 120/240 Vac Solid-State Digital Output C 16 B
MU/MC-TDOA52 120/240 Vac Solid-State Digital Output S 16 B
MU/MC-TDOA53 120/240 Vac Solid-State Digital Output S 16 B
MU/MC-TDOR12 120 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Digital Output C 16 B
MU/MC-TDOR52 120 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Digital Output S 16 B
MU/MC-TDOR22 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Digital Output C 16 B
MU/MC-TDOR62 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Digital Output S 16 B
MU/MC-TDOY23 * 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Digital Output C 16 B
MU/MC-TDOY63 * 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Digital Output S 16 B
Additional Components
MU/MC-TDPR02 Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly 12 outputs S N/A A
MU/MC-TLPA02 Power Adapter (supports LLMux FTAs) C 2 A
* CE Compliant hardware available.

14.5.6 FTA mounting channel requirements

FTAs are mounted onto FTA mounting channels that are installed on back panels in a PM I/O control cabinet.
These mounting channels provide a surface to attach the FTA panel, and two troughs to accommodate the IOP
cables and field wiring. There are two types of FTA mounting channels, vertical and horizontal which refer to
the alignment of the channels inside the PM I/O cabinet.

14.5.7 Vertical FTA mounting channels

Vertical FTA mounting channels are available in two widths, standard and wide, both of which are 930
millimeters (36.6 inches) in length. They differ only in the width of the field wiring trough. The larger width
FTA mounting channel is five inches wider to accommodate a greater area for field wiring and also provide
mounting holes to attach a vertical bus bar for the cable shields/grounds.
The following figure shows the physical dimensions of both mounting channels which can accommodate six
“A” size, three “B” size, or two “C” size FTA mounting spaces. Mixtures of different FTA sizes in any order are
permissible.
The number of FTA mounting channels required to mount FTAs depends on the number of FTAs and their size,
A, B, or C.
A single vertical FTA mounting channel will fill the lower half of a single door cabinet that already has a Power
System and one IOP card file. At the back of a dual-access PM I/O control cabinet, two FTA mounting channels
can be placed one above the other to provide placement of FTAs from top to bottom in a cabinet.

196 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 12: Vertical FTA Mounting Channel Dimensions

14.5.8 Vertical bus bar

The wide FTA mounting channel has holes drilled and tapped that provide for mounting a vertical bus bar to
terminate cable shields or safety ground wires. The vertical FTA bus bar fits the 930 millimeter (36.6 inch) long
FTA mounting channel.
Wire connectors are used to attach cable shields and ground wires to the bus bar. If you need additional wire
connectors, see your Honeywell Sales Engineer.

14.5.9 Horizontal FTA mounting channel

Horizontal FTA mounting channels have two troughs, one upper and one lower, and are 620 millimeters (24.4-
inch) in length. The physical dimensions are shown in the following figure. Field wiring enters the lower
channel from the right side of the cabinet and connects to the FTAs. The cables connecting the FTAs to their
associated IOP(s), Power Distribution Assemblies, and Marshalling Panels, if present, are routed in the upper
channel of the FTA mounting channel from the left side of the cabinet.
Up to three horizontal FTA mounting channels can be installed below the Power System in a single access
cabinet. A gap of approximately 230 millimeters (9 inches), the approximate width of a horizontal FTA
mounting channel, must be maintained between the FTA mounting channels and the Power System.
In a dual-access PM I/O control cabinet, up to eight horizontal FTA mounting channels can be installed on one
side of a cabinet.

197
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.5.10 Horizontal bus bar

The horizontal FTA mounting channel also has holes drilled and tapped that provide for mounting a horizontal
bus bar to terminate cable shields or safety ground wires.
Wire connectors are used to attach cable shields and ground wires to the bus bar. If you need additional wire
connectors, see your Honeywell Sales Engineer.

Figure 13: Horizontal FTA Mounting Channel Dimensions

198 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.6 Installing Standard FTAs

Vertical or horizontal FTA mounting channels can be installed in a control cabinet, or in facility terminal panels.
The following figure illustrates the vertical FTA mounting channel in an equipment cabinet.
Install the FTA mounting channel with plated M5 pan-head screws and outside star washers. This ensures that
the FTA mounting channel is grounded to the structure underneath. The structure underneath must connect to
local Safety Ground, which in turn must connect to the facility's Safety Ground.
The FTAs mount using threaded holes in the FTA mounting channel. When installing an FTA, use care to avoid
cross-threading the hole.

Attention
Please read the sections below before installing the FTAs onto FTA mounting channels. The sections contain rules
for FTA installation and field wiring routing, remote installation of FTAs outside of a control cabinet, and grounding
of metallic members. These rules will help ensure reliable operation and will minimize signal interference.

When installing Galvanically Isolated FTAs, See “Installing Galvanically Isolated FTAs” on page 204 for more
specific instructions.

Figure 14: Vertical FTA Mounting Channel Installation

14.6.1 Rules for FTA installation and process wiring

When installing standard FTAs and routing the process wiring, some installation rules should be followed to
minimize problems with wiring crosstalk. FTAs are assigned to a category, (either 1 or 2), according to the list
in the following table. The installation of the FTAs also must be compatible with the wire routing.

199
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Table 15: Process Control Signal Wiring Categories

Category Wiring Description

1 Low level analog input
High level analog input and output
Smart Transmitter Interface
0 to 30 Vac/dc RMS working digital input and output
2 30 to 130 Vac/dc RMS working digital input and output
131 to 250 Vac/dc RMS working digital input and output

When installing FTAs, rules for mounting standard FTAs place the Low Level Analog Input FTA at the top of
the left-most FTA mounting channel. If the first FTA mounting channel reaches capacity, another FTA mounting
channel is added and filled from the top again. This continues until all Category 1 FTAs have been installed,
ending with the 3-30 Vdc Solid State Digital Output FTA. A break in the sequence occurs between Category 1
and Category 2 FTAs.
Nonshielded wire pairs in Category 1 can generally be mixed in one FTA mounting channel. There are some
exceptions. Check with your Honeywell representative. The same is true for Category 2 in another FTA
mounting channel; however, the extreme difference in signal levels is such that nonshielded pairs for both
categories should not be in the same mounting channel. Electrical codes may also prohibit mixing of categories.
It is recommended that Category 2 cables start in a new FTA mounting channel.
If facility terminal panels are considered, use multiple panels, if possible. Install Category 1 FTAs in one
terminal panel and Category 2 in another.

14.6.2 Special considerations and wiring rules

It may not always be practical to use a whole FTA mounting channel for a given category of standard FTAs.
Similarly, it may become necessary to add an FTA at a later time, and the available FTA mounting channel is
not configured for the desired category.
Assuming that there are no electrical code conflicts for the process signal classes being discussed, a solution
may be found using the wiring techniques that follow.
• Shield the process wiring in the FTA mounting channel, whether Category 1 or Category 2. Shielding the
wiring the full distance to the FTA is a positive way of preventing wiring crosstalk.
• The two wiring categories could be installed at opposite ends of the same FTA mounting channel. For
example, Category 1 signals might be routed up the side of a cabinet and access the FTA mounting channel
through the top. As such, the Category 1 signals at the top do not mix with Category 2 signals at the bottom.
• Do not use the FTA mounting channel to run Class 1 and Class 2 wiring side by side. This is a Class 1
Power Limited Circuits wire-way as defined in the National Electric Code (NEC) for the USA; therefore, it
is not suitable for sharing with Class 2 (process) circuits.

14.6.3 Separate wiring to standard FTAs and galvanically isolated FTAs

The routing of wiring that is connected to Galvanically Isolated FTAs and supporting components is governed
by specific requirements discussed in “Installing Galvanically Isolated FTAs” on page 204. The wiring to
Galvanically Isolated FTAs and standard FTAs must be separated. The two types of FTAs are restricted to
installation on FTA mounting channels that are dedicated to the type of FTAs, the probability of the wiring
mixing in the cabinet is not likely. If the wiring for the two types of FTAs is routed in opposite directions, one
type upward and the other type downward, separation is guaranteed in the cabinet.

200 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.6.4 Remote FTA installation

If it is necessary to install FTAs remote from the control cabinet, it is recommended that FTAs be installed in a
metal enclosure. Most FTAs are more than cable termination assemblies. In many cases, they are also composed
of electrical circuits or modules. These circuits benefit from the protection of an enclosure similar to a PM I/O
control cabinet.
FTAs installed outside a cabinet may exhibit some degradation in performance or reliability because of the
absence of the protective cabinet. When FTAs are not mounted in a PM I/O control cabinet, certain practices
should be adhered to for maximum system performance and reliability.
• Install FTAs in a metal enclosure. FTAs must be installed in a metal enclosure for best performance.
• Install FTAs on an FTA mounting channel. The FTAs must be installed on FTA mounting channels,
which have been previously described, and standard FTAs must be mounted vertically. Installing FTAs in
any other position, or without the use of an FTA mounting channel, can alter the anticipated design air flow,
causing undesirable hot spots.
• Mount the FTA upright. Standard and Galvanically Isolated FTAs, when mounted on a vertical FTA
mounting channel, must also be mounted in their upright position, as opposed to their upside-down position.
The orientation of the FTA can usually be determined by the silkscreen lettering on the assembly. Also, the
FTA to IOP cable connectors are generally located at the top of the assembly.
• Follow FTA mounting hierarchy. The following table lists the recommended order in which FTAs should
be installed in the mounting area. Mounting areas are separated into two classes, one class accommodating
signals of 30 volts or less, and a second that accommodates signals greater than 30 volts. Low level analog
signals are included in the first class. Field and IOP to FTA cables should be secured with cable tie-downs.

Table 16: FTA Mounting Hierarchy

Area Order Function

1 1 High Level Analog Input
1 2 Smart Transmitter Interface
1 3 Analog Output
1 4 Low Level Analog Input
1 5 Power Adapter (LLMux)
1 6 Low Level Analog Input Multiplexer
1 7 24 Vdc Digital Input
1 8 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output
1 9 3-30 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output
2 1 120 Vac Digital Input
2 2 240 Vac Digital Input
2 3 31-200 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output
2 4 24-240 Vac Solid-State Digital Output
2 5 120 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Digital Output
2 6 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Digital Output

Grounding of all metallic members

FTA mounting channels, the cabinet, and all metallic members must be well bonded and grounded to provide
the maximum system protection from induced transients in the field cable connections. The recommended
grounding practice is to bond all metallic members with 1 3/4-inch flat copper braid. For metallic members that
are secured by bolts, a stainless steel internal tooth lockwasher under both the head of the bolt and the nut are
required to ensure reliable bonding. Threaded bolt holes in members must be clear of all paint to ensure good

201
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

electrical contact. Paint under lockwashers should also be removed if its thickness will prevent the lockwasher
from penetrating to the surface of the metal.
Bond cabinet to safety ground
The cabinet must be bonded to the closest Safety Ground rod or grid. See Planning for Bonding and Grounding
and Appendix D in the Control Hardware Planning Guide for more on control cabinet grounding.
The bonding connections should be made with 1.75-inch wide braid or 70 mm2 (2/0 AWG) cable. Both have a
nominal 135,000 circular mill area. Because most electrical noise is of a high frequency nature, the surface area
of the bonding connections is more important than the cross-sectional area. To provide a ground path of known
integrity, a conductor from the FTA to the Safety Ground rod or grid is required. The connection must be made
to the nearest Safety Ground. An additional connection to the closest grounded metallic building structure is
also recommended. This can be building steel, metallic plumbing pipes, or other metallic components as long as
it is an electrically secure Safety Ground.
Grounding of structural members
Structural building members, cable trays, and pipes have large surface areas that present a low impedance to
high frequency noise. The structural connections and mountings of these items usually provide a good path for
high frequency signals. All bonding connections to the building's structural ground should be similar, but never
less than a 25 mm2 (4 AWG) Master Reference Ground (MRG) cable connection.

202 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.7 Field wiring to FTA terminals

To aid you in connecting field devices to the FTA terminals, “Appendix C - PM I/O FTA Reference” on
page 289 contains wiring diagrams and assembly layouts of all standard FTAs, by signal type. Field wiring
diagrams for Galvanically Isolated FTAs are provided in “Appendix D - GI FTA Reference” on page 497.
Please refer to them for details in connecting field (process) wiring to FTA terminals.

203
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.8 Installing Galvanically Isolated FTAs

A group of Field Termination Assemblies (FTAs) that accept plug-in Galvanic Isolation Modules is available.
The FTAs are compatible with the IOPs that support the companion standard (non-Galvanically Isolated) FTAs.
Some Galvanically Isolated Field Termination Assemblies and their supporting assemblies, such as a Combiner
Panel, is CE Compliant, while others are not CE Compliant. Generally, CE Compliant Galvanically Isolated
assemblies are identified by a part number tab number that ends in “25” or “75.” They do not have a unique
model number.
CE Compliant FTAs have an FTA connector with a grounded body that accepts the CE Compliant model MU-
KFTSxx IOP to FTA shielded cable.
All Galvanically Isolated FTAs that support HART are CE Compliant.
All Galvanically Isolated FTA assemblies are approximately 309 by 124 millimeters (12 inches by 4.9 inches),
which is the B-size FTA classification for mounting size. The FTAs can be installed on FTA mounting channels
that are horizontally or vertically positioned in the cabinet with certain restrictions See “FTA mounting
considerations” on page 206 and “FTA mounting channel requirements” on page 206. Applicable information
for Galvanically Isolated FTAs is summarized in following table.
An MU- designation indicates non-conformal coating. An MC- indicates that the FTA is conformal coated.
Galvanically Isolated FTAs are available with either of two wire terminal types.
• Compression (C) type with removable terminal connector(s)
• Crimp (CR) type with stationary terminals

Table 17: Galvanically Isolated FTAs, Terminal Connector Type and Channels

Model Number Description Terminal No. of

Type Channels
Analog Input
MU/MC-GAIH12 High Level Analog Input FTA- voltage outputs to both the IOP C 16
and an auxiliary connector
MU/MC-GAIH82 High Level Analog Input FTA- voltage outputs to both the IOP CR 16
and an auxiliary connector
MU/MC-GAIH13 High Level Analog Input/HART/Smart Transmitter Interface C 16
FTA- voltage outputs to both the IOP and an auxiliary connector
MU/MC-GAIH83 High Level Analog Input/Smart Transmitter Interface FTA- CR 16
voltage outputs to both the IOP and an auxiliary connector
MU/MC-GAIH14 High Level Analog Input/HART/Smart Transmitter Interface C 16
FTA- with device high drive and voltage outputs to both the IOP
and an auxiliary connector
MU/MC-GAIH84 High Level Analog Input/Smart Transmitter Interface FTA- with CR 16
device high drive and voltage outputs to both the IOP and an
auxiliary connector
MU/MC-GAIH22 High Level Analog Input/HART Transmitter FTA- with voltage C 16
outputs to the IOP and current outputs to an auxiliary connector
(Auxiliary receiver output)
MU/MC-GAIH92 High Level Analog Input FTA- with voltage outputs to the IOP CR 16
and current outputs to an auxiliary connector (Auxiliary receiver
output)
Analog Output
MU/MC-GAOX02 Analog Output (Single IOP) FTA- with Line Fault Detection in C 8
the IOP

204 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Model Number Description Terminal No. of

Type Channels
MU/MC-GAOX72 Analog Output (Single IOP) FTA- with Line Fault Detection in CR 8
the IOP
MU/MC-GHAO11 Analog Output FTA- with HART connection capability C 16
MU/MC-GHAO21 Analog Output FTA-HART Compatible C 16
MU/MC-GAOX12 Analog Output FTA- with Line Fault Detection in the IOP C 8
MU/MC-GAOX82 Analog Output FTA- with Line Fault Detection in the IOP CR 8
Digital Input
MU/MC-GDID12 24 Vdc Digital Input FTA- with relay outputs to the IOP and an C 32
auxiliary connector and Line Fault Detection in the IOP
MU/MC-GDID82 24 Vdc Digital Input FTA- with relay outputs to the IOP and an CR 32
auxiliary connector and Line Fault Detection in the IOP
MU/MC-GDID13 24 Vdc Digital Input FTA- with solid-state voltage outputs to the C 32
IOP and no auxiliary connector
MU/MC-GDID83 24 Vdc Digital Input FTA- with solid-state voltage outputs to the CR 32
IOP and no auxiliary connector
Digital Output
MU/MC-GDOD12 24 Vdc Digital Output FTA- with 16 output override inputs from C 16
an auxiliary connector
MU/MC-GDOD82 24 Vdc Digital Output FTA- with 16 output override inputs from CR 16
an auxiliary connector
MU/MC-GDOL12 24 Vdc Digital Output FTA- with Line Fault Detection outputs to C 16
an auxiliary connector
MU/MC-GDOL82 24 Vdc Digital Output FTA- with Line Fault Detection outputs to CR 16
an auxiliary connector

14.8.1 Auxiliary connector

Some FTA types, such as the High Level Analog Input, Digital Input and Digital Output FTAs, have a single
50-pin auxiliary connector that supports a particular auxiliary function. See “Marshalling Panel, Model MU-
GMAR52” on page 528.

14.8.2 Additional hardware used with galvanically isolated FTAs

There are additional hardware components that are used in Galvanically Isolated FTA installations. These
components are listed and described in the following table.
Screw (S) type terminals are installed on the combiner panel and marshalling panel.

Table 18: Additional Hardware Components

Hardware Model Number Description Term. Type

Component
Power MU/MC-GPRD02 Provides fused 24 Vdc power distribution to Galvanically N/A
Distribution Isolated FTAs
Assembly
Power Cables MU-KDPRxx Connects the power distribution assembly to the power N/A
output connector of the power system

205
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Hardware Model Number Description Term. Type

Component
MU-KSPRxx A shielded CE Compliant version of the MU-KDPRxx N/A
power cable.
MU-KGPRxx Connects the power distribution assembly to the GI FTAs. N/A
Marshalling MU/MC-GMAR52 Provides the ability to repeat signals into or out of the safe S
Panel side of the Galvanic Isolation Modules mounted on the FTA
Combiner Panel MU/MC-GLFD02 Combines the Line Fault Detection (LFD) outputs of two S
Digital Output FTAs and presents the signals to redundant
Digital Input IOPs for integration

14.8.3 FTA mounting considerations

Attention
The ambient temperature limits of the Galvanic Isolation Modules on the FTAs are -20 to +60 degrees C (working)
and -40 to +80 degrees C (storage). The humidity limits are 5 to 95% relative humidity.
Because of the increased heat dissipation requirements of Galvanically Isolated FTAs, cabinet fan assemblies are
mandatory on both sides of a dual-access cabinet. The single-access cabinet also requires a cabinet fan assembly.

14.8.4 FTA mounting channel requirements

Standard FTAs are always mounted on 920-millimeter (36-inch) long FTA mounting channels that are installed
vertically in the cabinet. Galvanically Isolated FTAs can be mounted on 620-millimeter (24-inch) long FTA
mounting channels that are installed horizontally in the cabinet to provide better heat dissipation for the FTAs,
or they can be mounted on inverted (upside-down from normal orientation) vertical FTA mounting channels.
The physical dimensions of the horizontal mounting channel are shown in the following figure.

206 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 15: Horizontal FTA Mounting Channel Dimensions

Up to eight horizontal FTA mounting channels can be installed in a cabinet with a 6-millimeter (.25-inch) gap
between them to accommodate the use of cable ties as necessary and is shown in the following figure.
The horizontal FTA mounting channel is installed with the field wiring trough toward the bottom of the cabinet.
The trough that contains the cables that connect the FTA to its associated IOP(s), the Power Distribution
Assembly, and the Combiner Panel, if applicable, is toward the top of the cabinet. One or two FTAs can be
mounted on each horizontal FTA mounting channel.

Attention
Installation of Galvanically Isolated and standard FTAs on the same FTA mounting channel is not permitted. Both
types of FTAs mounted on the same FTA mounting channel would be an Intrinsic Safety violation.

The vertical FTA mounting channel is installed in an inverted position with the field wiring trough toward the
right side of the cabinet. The trough that contains the cables that connect the FTA to its associated IOP(s), the
Power Distribution Assembly, and the Combiner Panel, if applicable, is toward the left side of the cabinet.
Up to three FTAs can be mounted on each vertical FTA mounting channel.

14.8.5 Both FTA mounting channels types permitted

Although it is not permissible to mount standard FTAs and Galvanically Isolated FTAs on the same FTA
mounting channel, it is permissible, but not preferable, to install both the vertical FTA mounting channels and
the horizontal FTA mounting channels in the same cabinet.
If it is a requirement, up to three vertical FTA mounting channels can be installed in the lower portion of the
cabinet and up to three horizontal FTA mounting channels can be installed in the upper portion of the cabinet. A

207
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

fourth horizontal FTA mounting channel is omitted, even though the space is available, to provide separation
between the vertical and horizontal FTA mounting channels.
Galvanically Isolated FTAs can be mounted either horizontally or vertically.

Figure 16: Horizontal FTA Mounting Channel Installation

14.8.6 Marshalling Panel mounting

The model MU-GMAR52 “Marshalling Panel, Model MU-GMAR52” on page 528 can be mounted on either a
horizontally or vertically oriented FTA mounting channel. No Galvanically Isolated FTAs can be mounted on
the same FTA mounting channel.

14.8.7 Combiner Panel mounting

The model MU-GLFD02 “Combiner Panel, Model MU-GLFD02” on page 527 mounting size is similar to an
“A” size FTA and can be mounted on the same FTA mounting channel as the FTA it is connected with.

14.8.8 Power Distribution Assembly

Galvanically Isolated FTAs use more 24 Vdc power than standard FTAs. Because of the increased demand, the
Galvanic Isolation “Power Distribution Assembly, Model MU-GPRD02” on page 536, is used to directly supply
power to the FTAs. The power for a standard FTA is provided from the IOP through the cable that connects the
IOP to the FTA.
The Galvanically Isolated FTAs have dual 2-pin power connectors for power source redundancy. Power for the
two connectors can be provided by a single power source or separate power sources. A “Power Cables” on

208 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

page 536 can be used to connect the 24 Vdc from the Power Distribution Assembly to the FTA. Diodes on the
FTA that “or” the two power sources prevent the two power sources from shorting together.

14.8.9 Power Distribution Assembly mounting

The Power Distribution Assembly(s) can be installed on the same FTA mounting channel as the FTA(s) (either a
horizontally or vertically oriented FTA mounting channel), but a spacing of at least 6 inches must exist between
a Power Distribution Assembly and an FTA installed on an FTA mounting channel.
If the field wires leaving the Galvanically Isolated FTAs are dressed downward toward the floor of the cabinet,
the Power Distribution Assembly(s) must be installed above the FTAs. As a result, the field wires will not pass
close to a Power Distribution Assembly. If the field wires are routed upward toward the top of the cabinet,
install the Power Distribution Assembly(s) below the FTAs.

Figure 17: Typical GI FTA, Power Distribution Assembly and Marshalling Panel Mounting

14.8.10 Field wiring connections

Attention
The following describes the different types of field wiring connections to the galvanic isolation modules and the cable
routing to and from the GI FTAs. “Appendix D - GI FTA Reference” on page 497 contains wiring diagrams and
assembly layout drawings for each type GI FTA.

The FTAs do not have field terminal connectors mounted directly on the assembly's printed circuit board as the
standard FTAs do; instead, field wires are connected to compression-type or crimp-type connectors that mate
with the connector on the individual Galvanic Isolation Module.

209
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Field wire connections are made at the plug-in Galvanic Isolation Module on the FTA. In general, the Galvanic
Isolation Module provides terminal connections for one field device. The exception is the Galvanic Isolation
Module on the Digital Input FTA. It provides terminal connections for two field devices. The following figure is
an illustration of a typical Galvanic Isolation Module.

Figure 18: Typical Galvanic Isolation Module

The FTAs and their Galvanic Isolation Modules can be in place during the installation of the field wiring, but it
is not a requirement because of the module connector's plug-in capability.

14.8.11 Cable shield connection

Spare wires and cable shields are terminated in the normal manner. Because the FTA does not have a built-in
shield bus, the accommodation of a large number of shield wires requires the use of a “Vertical bus bar” on
page 197 that is installed on the FTA mounting channel and connected to the local Master Reference Ground
(MRG).

14.8.12 Terminal connectors

Compression-type or crimp-type pluggable 6-terminal connectors can be specified for the Galvanic Isolation
Modules. The model number for the FTA specifies the connector type.
• Compression-type terminal connectors are provided on FTAs where the model number ends in 02, 12, 13,
14, or 22, such as MU-GAOX02, MU-GAIH12, etc.
• Crimp-type terminal connectors are provided on the FTA where the model number ends in 72, 82, 83, 84, or
92, such as MU-GAOX72, MU-GAIH82, etc.

14.8.13 Compression-type terminal connector

The compression-type terminal connector accepts size 0.3 to 3.5 mm2 (12 to 22 AWG) wire. The wire is
stripped to a length of 8.0 millimeters, inserted into the 6-pin terminal connector, and held in place by tightening
a dedicated screw as shown in the following figure. Like the crimp-type terminal connector, the compression-
type connector's female pins mate with companion male pins in the 6-pin connector on the Galvanic Isolation
Module. Unlike the crimp-type terminal connector, six pins are always present and cannot be extracted. The
inserted wires are removed by loosening the dedicated screw. The compression-type terminal connector is
locked into place by tabs at the sides of the connector.

210 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 19: Compression-Type Terminal Connector

14.8.14 Crimp pin-type terminal connectors

The female crimp pins are installed over the stripped end of the wiring, before its insertion into a compression
terminal-type connector where it is locked into place by the crimp-type connector. Size 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 (14 to 20
AWG) wiring is accommodated with a crimp pin as shown in the following figure. The female crimp pins that
are inserted into the connector mate with companion male pins in the 6-pin connector on the Galvanic Isolation
Module. An extraction tool must be used to remove the female crimp pin. The crimp-type terminal connector is
locked into place by tabs at the sides of the connector.

Figure 20: Crimp-Type Terminal Connector

211
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.8.15 Field wire and cable routing

Generally, the field wires must be routed so that a minimum 2-inch separation is maintained between other
wires or electrical components. The wiring can be separated from other wiring by a grounded metal barrier or a
nonconductive divider.

Horizontal FTA mounting channel cabling

All power cables must be routed in the upper channel of a horizontal FTA mounting channel. The field wires to
the Galvanically Isolated FTAs must always be routed in the lower channel of a horizontal FTA mounting
channel. No other wires, other than field wires to Galvanically Isolated FTAs, can be routed in the lower
channel of the horizontal FTA mounting channel.
When FTAs are mounted on a horizontal FTA mounting channel, the field wires that connect to the FTA are
routed to the right in the lower channel and out of the cabinet by going up or down the right side of the cabinet.
The cables that connect the FTA to its associated IOP(s), the Power Distribution Assembly, and the Marshalling
Panel, if applicable, must be routed in the upper channel of the FTA mounting channel. The routing is to the left
in the channel and up or down the left side of the cabinet.

Vertical FTA mounting channel cabling

All power cables must be routed in the left channel of a vertical FTA mounting channel. The field wires to the
Galvanically Isolated FTAs must always be routed in the right channel of a vertical FTA mounting channel. No
other wires, other than field wires to Galvanically Isolated FTAs, can be routed in the right channel of the
vertical FTA mounting channel.
When FTAs are mounted on a vertical FTA mounting channel that is installed in an inverted position, the field
wires that connect to the FTA are routed in the right channel and out of the cabinet by going up or down the
right side of the cabinet.
The cables that connect the FTA to its associated IOP(s), the Power Distribution Assembly, Combiner Panel,
and the Marshalling Panel, if applicable, must be routed in the left channel of the FTA mounting channel. The
routing is up or down the left side of the cabinet.

Power Distribution Assembly Cabling

Cabling to the Power Distribution Assembly must be routed in the upper or left channel and to the left side of
the cabinet, except for the cables carrying power to an FTA mounted on the same FTA mounting channel. See
also “Power Distribution Assembly mounting” on page 209.

14.8.16 Additional Power System

If an additional “Installing Power Systems” on page 234 is required in the cabinet to power the Galvanically
Isolated FTAs, it can be installed on the same side of the cabinet as the FTA mounting channels. Install the
Power System at the top of the cabinet if the FTA's field wiring entry is at the bottom of the cabinet so the field
wires are not routed near the Power System. If the field wiring entry is at the top of the cabinet, install the
Power System at the bottom of the cabinet.

212 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.9 Installing PM IOP Card Files

Two sizes of IOP card file assemblies provide either seven or 15 card slots to accommodate any of the various
IOP plug-in card types. See the following figure. The card file also contains a variety of connectors for power
cables, process signal cables, and cables for connecting redundant and remote I/O hardware.
There are two types of 7-slot card file assemblies, Left 7-Slot and Right 7-Slot. The Left and Right 7-Slot card
files are the same size and are intended to be mounted adjacent to each other on the cabinet's 19” RETMA
mounting intrastructure using appropriate hardware. The 15-Slot card file mounts alone on the 19” RETMA
mounting intrastructure. The following figures show the physical dimension of the 7-slot and 15-slot card files
respectively.

Figure 21: Slot IOP Card File

213
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 22: Seven-Slot Card File Installation Dimensions

Figure 23: Fifteen-Slot Card File Installation Dimensions

14.9.1 Installing 7-Slot and 15-Slot card files

The following figure illustrates the installation of Left and Right 7-Slot and 15-Slot card files in a side-by-side
configuration.

214 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 24: Installation of 7-Slot and 15-Slot Card Files

14.9.2 Typical IOP card file Installations

The following figure shows typical cabinet arrangement of process controller chassis hardware and PM IOP
card files. The cabinet on the left contains two controller chassis, two 15-slot IOP card files and a power supply.
The cabinet on the right contains three 15-slot IOP card files and a power supply. The associated FTAs may be
installed in the rear of the cabinet, if it is a dual access cabinet, or in a separate cabinet.
IOP card files can be installed at remote locations with the use of fiber optic I/O Link Extenders, as well as
locally in the cabinet or cabinet complex.

215
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 25: Typical Cabinet Arrangements for IOP Card File Installation

216 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.10 I/O Link Address Pinning

The I/O Link is a dual serial communications link between IOP card files that are connected to a common
IOLIM. All IOP card files must be hardware configured (pinned) for an address on the I/O link interface. I/O
link address selection is implemented (pinned) in one of two ways:
• Two-pin hardware jumpers, or
• Zero-ohm resistors located on each card file backpanel. Zero-ohm resistors that are used in place of jumpers
are soldered in at the factory only by special request
The IOP card file I/O link addresses must be configured (pinned) consecutively, starting at I/O link address 0
(zero). See the following figure for the location of the jumpers on the 7-Slot IOP card file.

Figure 26: Left 7-Slot Card File I/O Link Address Pinning

Any IOP card files in the PM I/O subsystem must be addressed consecutively, starting at I/O link address 0
(zero). See the following figure for the location of the jumpers on the 15-Slot card file.

217
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 27: 15 – Slot Card File I/O Link Address Pinning

Attention
The numerical I/O link address displayed on the workstation displays is numbered one higher (+1) than the actual
pinned I/O link address. The I/O link address of 0 is displayed as a numerical address of 1 on the system displays. (that
is, pinned value of 0 = card file 1, pinned value of 1 = card file 2, and so on).

Use only one of the two methods to set the I/O link address for the IOP card files. Either remove all jumpers and
use the zero-ohm resistors, or clip out the zero-ohm resistors and use the jumpers to set the address. The jumper
method (without the resistors) is the most common method.

Attention
Whichever method you use, please note that there are four address positions labeled 1, 2, 4 and P. The “P” position is
for parity. It is used so that all I/O link addresses are set using an odd number of jumpers, (or resistors). See examples
below.

14.10.1 Jumper method example

I/O link address configuration using plug jumpers is demonstrated with the following example. Refer to the
following figure to locate the 7-slot card file pinning area (J26) for the following procedure.
1 Assume an IOP card file is to be configured for an I/O Link hardware address of 4.
(The workstation will display this card file's I/O Link address as 5.)
2 Take diagonal cutters and remove all the zero-ohm resistors.
3 Install a plug jumper to bridge both pins at position 4.
Note: Because this single jumper constitutes an odd number of jumpers, remove the P (parity) plug jumper
as well as all others.
Even though the J-number (J26 in this case) differs between the 7-Slot and 15-Slot card files, the method of
pinning the card file address remains the same.

218 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 28: Left 7-Slot Card File I/O Link Address Pinning with Plug Jumpers

14.10.2 Zero-ohm resistor jumper pinning example

I/O link address configuration using zero-ohm resistor jumpers is demonstrated with the following example.
Refer to the following figure to locate the 7-slot card file resistor jumper area for the following procedure.
1 Assume an I/O card file is to be configured for an I/O Link hardware address of 3. (The workstation will
display this card file's address as 4.)
2 Remove all the plug jumpers and set them aside.
3 Leave the zero-ohm resistors at positions 1 and 2 (1 + 2 = 3), and leave the P (parity) zero-ohm resistor
because an odd number of jumpers is required.
(A logic one is created by leaving the zero-ohm resistor in place and a zero is created by removing the zero-
ohm resistor.)
4 Remove all other zero-ohm resistors with diagonal cutters.
Even though the jack number (J26 in this case) differs between the 7 and 15-Slot card files, the method of
pinning the card file address remains the same.

219
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 29: Left 7-Slot Card File I/O Link Address Pinning with Zero-Ohm

CAUTION
If a zero-ohm resistor jumper is incorrectly removed, do not attempt to correct the problem by resoldering the
jumper. The backpanel can be easily damaged. Instead, remove all the zero-ohm resistor jumpers and
configure the card file's I/O link address with the plug jumpers.

220 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.11 Installing PM I/O Processor Cards

There are several types of Input/Output Processor (IOP) card assemblies available for Experion systems. Some
IOP card types interface with more than one type of Field Termination Assembly (FTA). The functional types of
IOPs are:
• High Level Analog Input (HLAI)
• High Level Analog Input, HART (HAI)
• Low Level Analog Input (LLAI)
• Low Level Analog Input Multiplexer (LLMux)
• Remote Hardened Multiplexer (RHMux)
• Analog Output (AO)
• Analog Output (HAO)
• Digital Input (DI)
• Digital Input Sequence of Events (DISOE)
• Digital Output (DO)
• Smart Transmitter Interface (STI)
• Smart Transmitter Interface Multivariable ;(STI_MV)

Tip
We recommend that you install the IOP card files and the FTAs (mounted on FTA mounting channels) in the control
cabinet BEFORE you install the IOP cards.

14.11.1 Installing IOP card assemblies

Any type IOP card assembly can be installed in any IOP card file slot. Follow the steps below to install the IOP
card assemblies.
1 Consult site documentation. Locate the correct card slot in the IOP card file.
2 When installing an IOP card, first connect your ESD wrist strap to the cabinet's ground bar, and then remove
the card from its pouch.
3 Carefully slide the card onto the card rails, checking to be sure that the card is inserted in both rails.
4 Slide the card into the card file until it has made contact with the backpanel connectors. Then firmly press on
the front of the card with the heel of your hand. Do not use excessive force!
If the card doesn't slip easily into its connectors, remove the card and locate the source of the obstruction.
Check for bent contacts at the backpanel connectors.
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each IOP card to be installed.

221
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.12 Installing Remote I/O

Remote I/O options are available to enable IOPs and FTAs to be located at up to six remote sites. Redundant
fiber-optic cable links (Link A and Link B) are used to connect the remote I/O. I/O Link Extender cards,
installed in IOP card files, enable IOPs and their associated FTAs to be located remotely up to 8 kilometers (5
miles) from a local site. Each remote I/O link consists of two I/O Link Extender cards and their associated Fiber
Optic Coupler modules that occupy one slot in the IOP card files at both the local and remote sites. Fiber Optic
Coupler modules, connected to the IOP card file backpanel, drive and terminate the fiber optic transmission
cable that connects the local and remote IOP card files. Also, remote installation of IOPs and FTAs can
significantly reduce signal wire runs.

14.12.1 Two types of I/O link extenders - standard and long distance
There are two options for installing the remote I/O hardware:
The “Standard I/O Link Extender Installation” on page 222 card provides remote extension of IOP card files up
to 1.3 kilometers (4000 feet) from the local IOP card file. An associated fiber optic coupler module provides
attachment for one, two, or three fiber optic cables at the local card file. A second fiber optic coupler module
terminates a single optic cable at the remote IOP card file
The “Long distance I/O link extender” on page 229 card provides remote extension of IOP card files up to 8
kilometers (5 miles) from the local card file. An associated fiber optic coupler module, capable of driving and
terminating a single fiber optic cable, is installed at both the local card file and the remote IOP card file.
There can be a mix of Standard and Long Distance I/O Link Extenders in a subsystem; however, both ends of a
Link A and Link B must contain the same type I/O link extender card.

14.12.2 Standard I/O Link Extender Installation

The Standard I/O link extender can be installed in nonredundant and redundant IOP card file configurations.

14.12.3 Nonredundant installation example for remote I/O

Two I/O link extender cards and their associated fiber optic coupler modules are required at each end of the I/O
link extension, one for Link A and one for Link B. The cards are normally installed in adjacent card file slots as
illustrated in the following figure for a nonredundant installation.

222 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 30: Standard I/O Link Extender Interconnections with Nonredundant IOPs

Attention
The following PM I/O subsystem configuration is assumed.
1. The local IOP card file is configured as card file #1, (I/O link address of 0).
2. Remote Site #1's IOP card file is configured as card file #2, (I/O link address of 1).
3. Remote Site #2's IOP card file is configured as card file #3, (I/O link address of 2).
4. Remote Site #3's IOP card file is configured as card file #4, (I/O link address of 3).

14.12.4 Redundant installation example

In the case of separate redundant IOP card files, where Link A is installed in the primary IOP card file and Link
B is installed in the secondary IOP card file, the I/O links must use the same slot in both card files as illustrated
in the following figure.

223
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 31: Standard I/O Link Extender Interconnections with Redundant IOPs

The following PM I/O subsystem configuration is assumed.

1. The primary IOP card file is configured as card file #1, (I/O link address of 0).
2. The secondary IOP card file is configured as card file #2, (I/O link address of 1).
3. Remote Site #1's IOP card file is configured as card file #3, (I/O link address of 2).
4. Remote Site #2's IOP card file is configured as card file #4, (I/O link address of 3).
5. Remote Site #3's IOP card file is configured as card file #5, (I/O link address of 4).

14.12.5 I/O link extender card installation and link termination

Both I/O Link A and Link B are terminated at only one end of the link. For IOP card files that are connected
locally, the IOP card file at the end of the local I/O link provides the termination. The 15-slot IOP card file does
not have any termination because the metallic I/O link cables normally provide a connection to the terminators
at the IOP card file end of a link. When a card file is located remotely by a fiber optic link, the connection to the
terminators is not available.
To provide termination at the remote end of a link, the I/O Link Extender card has jumper selectable terminators
available. The LINK TERMINATION jumper, J2, has two positions, “IN” and “OUT.” See the following
figure for the location of the jumper on the standard I/O Link Extender card.
Link A and Link B selection is determined by the IOP card file I/O link address and the card slot number of the
installed I/O link extender card.
Follow the procedure to set the Link Termination jumper on the Standard I/O link extender card and install it in
the IOP card file.
1. On the I/O link extender card to be installed in the local IOP card file end of the link, set jumper J2 to the
“OUT” position. See the following figure for location.

224 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2. Install the I/O link extender card into the proper slot of the local IOP card file.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all I/O link extender cards to be installed in the local IOP card file(s).

Attention
For nonredundant configurations
If I/O link extender cards for both Link A and Link B are to be installed in the same IOP card file, the cards are
normally installed in adjacent card file slots. For example, link extender cards for Link A and Link B are installed in
Slots 3 and 4 of the IOP card file.
For redundant configurations
Where Link A is installed in one IOP card file and Link B is installed in the other IOP card file, the same card slot
must be used in both card files. For example, link extender card for Link A is installed in Slot 3 of the primary IOP
card file therefore Link B must also be installed in Slot 3 of the secondary IOP card file.

1. On the I/O link extender card to be installed at the remote end of the link, set jumper J2 to the “IN” position.
See the following figure for jumper location.
2. Install the IO link extender card into the proper slot of the remote IOP card file.
3. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all I/O link extender cards to be installed in the remote IOP card file(s).

Figure 32: Standard I/O Link Extender Card Termination Jumper

Move jumper J2 to “Out” if this I/O Link Extender card is used in the local IOP card file.
Move jumper J2 to “In” if this I/O Link Extender card is used in the remote card file.
LINK A or LINK B selection is determined by the slot/card file position.

14.12.6 Link A and link B selection

The card slot number and the IOP card file link address in which the I/O link extender card/Fiber optic coupler
module set is installed determines whether the I/O link extension is driving Link A or Link B. The card file is
assigned an “I/O Link Address Pinning” on page 217 by configuration.
• If the I/O link address of the IOP card file and the card slot number are both an odd or even number, the IOP
will drive Link A. (For example: A I/O Link extender card is inserted into card slot 6 of the IOP card file
that has an I/O link address of 4 will drive Link A.)
• If the IOP card file link address and card slot number of the link extender card are different, (That is, the
numbers are odd and even), and the extender card will drive Link B. Both ends of the link must have the
same link designation (A or B) when connecting the fiber optic cable.

225
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

After installation of the link and upon applying power to the equipment, the link selection is indicated by one of
two LEDs on the front of the “Fiber optic cable installation” on page 227 housing.

14.12.7 I/O Interface cable installation

Attention
A metallic I/O Link Interface cable is required between redundant IOP card files for communications with the IOP
card slots in the secondary IOP card file.

The metallic I/O link interface cable connects the primary IOP card file and the associated secondary IOP card
file in a redundant installation. The cable is a three-conductor shielded cable. The CE compliant interface cable
(part number 51204042-xxx) and the CE non-compliant cable (part number 51195479-xxx) are ordered in pairs.
Two cables are provided when ordered by the part number.
See “I/O Link interface cable installation” on page 243 for instructions.

14.12.8 Fiber optic coupler module installation remote I/O

Two fiber optic coupler modules are required at each end of the I/O link extension on the IOP card file
backpanel, one for Link A and one for Link B. The couplers must be installed in the connector that is located
directly under the card slot that contains the I/O Link Extender card. The fiber optic coupler modules are labeled
"A" and "B" in the examples in Figure 7 and Figure 8.
When installing fiber optic coupler modules in CE Compliant card files, (models MU-IOFX03, MU-PMFX03,
or MU-PMFR03), an“I/O link extender adapter kit” on page 226, (model MU ILES01) must be used.

14.12.9 Two couplers types

A choice of two fiber optic coupler module types is available for use with standard I/O link extenders, a single
interface and a triple interface coupler. Depending on the application, the appropriate fiber optic coupler module
is selected that can interface one, two, or three fiber optic cables. Standard I/O Link Extender Interconnections
with Nonredundant IOPs figure shows an example application of a triple interface coupler in a nonredundant
configuration. A single interface fiber optic coupler module is used as the remote terminating fiber optic coupler
module.
Follow the procedure to install the fiber optic couplers for your application.
1 Locate the correct fiber optic coupler (single interface or triple interface) for the associated link.
2 Locate the correct card slot connector on the IOP card file backpanel associated with the slot where the I/O
link extender card is installed.
3 If required for CE compliance, assemble and install an I/O link extender adapter kit onto the slot connector
as shown in “I/O link extender adapter kit” on page 226.
Do not remove the connector bail locks and tighten the mounting spacers securely. Do not over tighten
4 Install the fiber optic coupler onto the slot of the IOP card file and secure with mounting screws.

14.12.10 I/O link extender adapter kit

The I/O link extender adapter kit consists of a connector adapter, shroud, and mounting spacers as illustrated in
“Figure 33: I/O Link Extender Adapter Kit”. The kit must be used because the card file's ground plate prevents
the fiber optic coupler module from seating in the backpanel connector.
If required for your application, assemble the fiber optic coupler module and adapter kit as shown in the
following figure.

226 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 33: I/O Link Extender Adapter Kit

14.12.11 Fiber optic cable installation

The fiber optic cable is installed by a contractor that is specialized in splicing, installing and servicing fiber
optic cable systems. Contact a qualified contractor for cable installation.
The maximum difference in fiber optic cable length between Link A and Link B must be less than 500 meters
(1640 feet) to limit the communications delay difference between Link A and Link B.
The fiber optic cable has multiples of two 62.5 micron fibers for each connection. Connection to the fiber optic
cable is accomplished by ST-type connectors. Because the links are duplex and a separate fiber is required for
transmit and receive, a pair of ST-type connectors are used at each end of the fiber link which connect to the
front of the fiber optic coupler module. See the following figure. Labeling on the front of the fiber optic coupler
module housing identifies each pair connection. T1 (Transmit) and R1 (Receive) are the first pair and where
applicable, T2 and R2, and T3 and R3, are the second and third pairs, respectively. Two LEDs (marked A and
B) will indicate the active link once power is applied. See the following figure for a front view of the triple
interface fiber optic coupler module.

227
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 34: Fiber Optic Couplers Front View

14.12.12 After fiber optic cable Installation

Following the installation of the cable, the contractor should be required to perform and pass an Optical Time
Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) test. This test will pinpoint kinks in the cable or damaged cable areas.
When the OTDR Test has been finished and the cable is ready to be connected to the fiber optic coupler module
transmitters, a measurement of all the fiber optic transmitters should be taken. Record these measurements and
retain them as a permanent record. After the cable has been connected to the transmitter, record the power
measured at the receiver end of the cable.
The Power loss measurement must be at least -24 db for the standard and -29 db for the long distance fiber optic
link. See Signal Loss Budget for the Loss Budget calculation in the Control Hardware Planning Guide.
The following equipment can be used to measure the power level of the transmitters and the cable loss.
• Hewlett Packard Model 8152A - Optical Average Power Meter
• Hewlett Packard Model 81520A - Optical Head
• Hewlett Packard Model 81000VA - ST Connecter Adapter
• Intelco Model 131 Meter
• Intelco Model 2510 ST Adapter
• Laser Precision AM-3500 Meter (specify ST Adapter when ordering)
• Photodyne Model 17XT - Optical Power Meter
• Photodyne Model 2041 - ST Adapter Cap
• Tektronics Model 2815 - Optoscope (Specify Option 27 to get ST connectors)

228 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.12.13 Long distance I/O link extender

Long distance I/O link extender cards are used when locating IOP card files and their associated FTAs greater
than 1.3 kilometers (4000 feet) and up to 8 kilometers (5 miles) from a local site. Two I/O link extender cards
and their associated fiber optic coupler modules are required at each end of the I/O link extension, one for Link
A and one for Link B. The links are normally installed in adjacent card file slots as illustrated in the following
figures. The fiber optic coupler modules are labeled A and B in the following figure.

14.12.14 Nonredundant installation example

The following figure illustrates a nonredundant IOP installation.

Figure 35: Long Distance I/O Link Extender Interconnections with Nonredundant IOPs

Note: The following PM I/O subsystem configuration is assumed.

1. The local IOP card file is configured as card file #1, (I/O link address of 0).
2. Remote Site #1's IOP card file is configured as card file #2, (I/O link address of 1).
3. Remote Site #2's IOP card file is configured as card file #3, (I/O link address of 2).

14.12.15 Redundant IOP installation

In the case of separate redundant IOP card files, where Link A is installed in the primary IOP card file and Link
B is installed in the secondary card file, the I/O links must use the same slot in both card files as illustrated in
the following figure.
The following figure illustrates a redundant IOP installation.

229
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 36: Long Distance I/O Link Extender Interconnections with Redundant IOPs

Note: The following PM I/O subsystem configuration is assumed.

1. The primary IOP card file is configured as card file #1, (I/O link address of 0).
2. The secondary IOP card file is configured as card file #2, (I/O link address of 1).
3. Remote Site #1's IOP card file is configured as card file #3, (I/O link address of 2).
4. Remote Site #2's IOP card file is configured as card file #4, (I/O link address of 3).
5. Remote Site #3's IOP card file is configured as card file #5, (I/O link address of 4).

14.12.16 I/O link extender card installation, link selection and link termination
Both I/O Link A and Link B are terminated at only one end of the link. For IOP card files that are connected
locally, the IOP card file at the end of the local I/O link provides the termination. The 15-slot IOP card file does
not have any termination because the metallic I/O link cables normally provide a connection to the terminators
at the IOP card file end of a link. When a card file is located remotely by a fiber optic link, the connection to the
terminators is not available.
To provide termination, the I/O link extender card has jumper selectable terminators available. The LINK
TERMINATION jumper, J3, has two positions, “IN” and “OUT.” See the following figure for the location of
the jumper on the Long Distance I/O Link Extender card.
Link A and B selection is determined by jumper selection on the I/O link extender card. See the following
figure.
Follow the procedure to set the Link Termination and Link Selection jumpers on the Long Distance IO link
extender card and install it in the IOP card file.
1. On the I/O link extender card to be installed at the local end of the fiber optic link, set the jumper J3 to the
“OUT” position. See the following figure for location.
2. Set jumper J2 to the correct Link (A or B) to be supported by the I/O link extender card.
3. Install the IO link extender card into the proper slot of the local IOP card file.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all I/O link extender cards to be installed in the local IOP card file(s).

230 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Attention
For nonredundant configurations
If I/O link extender cards for both Link A and Link B are to be installed in the same IOP card file, the cards are
normally installed in adjacent card file slots. For example, link extender cards for Link A and Link B are installed
in Slots 3 and 4 of the IOP card file.
For redundant configurations
Where Link A is installed in the primary IOP card file and Link B is installed in the secondary IOP card file, the
same card slot must be used in both card files. For example, link extender card for Link A is installed in Slot 3 of
the primary IOP card file and Link B must also be installed in Slot 3 of the secondary IOP card file.
5. On the I/O link extender card to be installed at the remote end of the fiber optic link, set jumper J3 to the
“IN” position. See the following figure.
6. Set jumper J2 to the correct Link (A or B) to be supported by the I/O link extender card.
7. Install the IO link extender card into the proper slot of the remote IOP card file.
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 fro all I/O link extender cards to be installed in the remote IOP card file(s).

Figure 37: Long Distance I/O Link Extender Card Termination Jumper

- Set jumper J3 to “OUT” if the link extender card is to be installed in a local IOP card file.
- Set jumper J3 to “IN” if the link extender card is to be installed in a remote IOP card file.
(Shelf/stock position is “IN”.)
- Set jumper J2 to the proper Link A or Link B.

14.12.17 I/O Interface cable installation

Attention
A metallic I/O Link Interface cable is required between redundant IOP card files for communications with the IOP
card slots in the secondary IOP card file.

The metallic I/O link interface cable connects the primary IOP card file and the associated secondary IOP card
file in a redundant installation. The cable is a three-conductor shielded cable. The CE compliant interface cable
(part number 51204042-xxx) and the CE non-compliant cable (part number 51195479-xxx) are ordered in pairs.
Two cables are provided when ordered by the part number.
See “I/O Link interface cable installation” on page 243 for instructions.

231
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.12.18 Fiber optic coupler module installation

Two fiber optic coupler modules are required at each end of the I/O link extension, one for Link A and one for
Link B. The couplers must be installed in the connector that is located directly under the card slot that contains
the I/O Link Extender card. The fiber optic coupler modules are labeled “A” and “B” in the previous figures
showing “Fiber optic cable installation” on page 232 Interconnections.
There is one type of fiber optic coupler module associated with the long distance I/O extender card and it
accommodates a single fiber optic link. Additional I/O link extender cards and associated fiber optic coupler
modules can be installed to increase the number of fiber links.
Follow the procedure to install the fiber optic couplers for your application.
1 Locate the correct fiber optic coupler for the associated link.
2 Locate the correct card slot connector on the IOP card file backpanel associated with the slot where the I/O
link extender card is installed.
3 If required for CE compliance, assemble and install an I/O link extender adapter kit onto the slot connector
as shown in “Figure 33: I/O Link Extender Adapter Kit”.
Do not remove the connector bail locks and tighten the mounting spacers securely. Do not over tighten.
4 Install the fiber optic coupler onto the slot of the IOP card file and secure with mounting screws.

14.12.19 Fiber optic cable installation

The fiber optic cable is installed by a contractor which is specialized in splicing, installing and servicing fiber
optic cable systems. Contact a qualified contractor for cable installation.

14.12.20 Installation requirements

• It is recommended that spares be included in the fiber optic cable installation. The cost of additional fibers is
small compared to cable replacement; therefore a sufficient number of spares should be specified.
• The maximum difference in fiber optic cable length between Link A and Link B must be less than 500
meters (1640 feet)
• The cable must have a total signal loss of no more than -5.5 db at 850 nanometers for the standard and -19
db at 1300 nanometers for the long distance fiber optic link to meet the minimum Loss Budget. See the
Control Hardware Planning Guide for the Loss Budget calculation.
The fiber optic cable has multiples of two 62.5 micron fibers for each connection. Connection to the fiber optic
cable is accomplished by ST-type connectors. Because the links are duplex and a separate fiber is required for
transmit and receive, a pair of ST-type connectors is required at each end of the fiber link which connects to the
front of the fiber optic coupler module. The front of the coupler housing identifies the connections as XMT
(transmit) and RCV (receive). Two LEDs (marked A and B) will indicate the active (selected) link once power
is applied. See previous front view of the Long Distance fiber optic coupler module.

14.12.21 After fiber optic cable Installation

Following the installation of the cable, the contractor should be required to perform and pass an Optical Time
Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) test. This test will pinpoint kinks in the cable or damaged cable areas.
When the OTDR Test has been finished and the cable is ready to be connected to the fiber optic coupler module
transmitters, a measurement of all the fiber optic transmitters should be taken. Record these measurements and
retain them as a permanent record. After the cable has been connected to the transmitter, record the power
measured at the receiver end of the cable.
The Power loss measurement must be at least -24 db for the standard and -29 db for the long distance fiber optic
link. See Signal Loss Budget for the Loss Budget calculation in the Control Hardware Planning Guide.

232 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

The following equipment can be used to measure the power level of the transmitters and the cable loss.
• Hewlett Packard Model 8152A - Optical Average Power Meter
• Hewlett Packard Model 81520A - Optical Head
• Hewlett Packard Model 81000VA - ST Connecter Adapter
• Intelco Model 131 Meter
• Intelco Model 2510 ST Adapter
• Laser Precision AM-3500 Meter (specify ST Adapter when ordering)
• Photodyne Model 17XT - Optical Power Meter
• Photodyne Model 2041 - ST Adapter Cap
• Tektronics Model 2815 - Optoscope (Specify Option 27 to get ST connectors)

233
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.13 Installing Power Systems

Related topics
“Power system load requirements” on page 234
“AC only power system” on page 235
“Provide adequate power” on page 236
“Mounting location” on page 236
“Power distribution” on page 238
“Power distribution backpanel, Model MU-PSRX04” on page 238

14.13.1 Power system load requirements

Each Power System's load requirements must be examined as a function of the options that are installed in the
Process Manager I/O subsystem. These demands are discussed in the Control Hardware Planning Guide; see
Planning for Process Manager I/O Power Requirements.
The following two types of power systems are available to power IOP subsystems.
• Standard Power System - Provides up to 20 amperes of 24 Vdc power. Options include 48 Vdc Battery
Backup module feature and rechargeable NiCad CMOS memory backup power.
• AC Only Power System - Offers optional 8- or 16-ampere redundant 24 Vdc power.
By calculating the total current requirement, you can determine how many Power Systems are required. If more
than one Power System is required, it may be desirable to connect each control cabinet to a separate power
system. It may also be desirable to connect the “A” IOP and “B” IOP of a redundant pair to separate power
systems. The following figure illustrates the various power system components and features.

234 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 38: PM I/O Power System Components

14.13.2 AC only power system

The AC Only Power System shown in the following figure offers optional 8- or 16-ampere redundant Power
Supply Modules, but does not offer the optional 48 Vdc Battery Backup module feature and rechargeable NiCad
CMOS memory backup power.
Alkaline batteries are used instead of rechargeable NiCad batteries for CMOS data retention.

235
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 39: AC Only Optional Power System

14.13.3 Provide adequate power

Generally, power for a subsystem with up to 35 IOPs can be adequately provided by one power system. A
subsystem with redundant I/O may need additional power systems. The power calculation is made using the
information provided in Appendix E of the Control Hardware Planning Guide.
Subsystems with either remote I/O, or remote cabinets containing one or more IOP card files must be self-
contained with at least one power system.

14.13.4 Mounting location

Mounting of the power system in the I/O cabinet is typically at the bottom as shown in the following figure.
Your application may dictate power system installation at a different location inside the cabinet. Check your site
documentation to verify installation. Mounting dimensions for the power system are shown in the second figure
below.

236 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 40: Typical PM I/O Cabinet layouts

Figure 41: Power System Installation Dimensions

Follow the steps to install the power system in the control cabinet.

237
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

1. Consult site documentation. Locate the power system and the correct cabinet location for the installation.
2. Position the power system assembly inside the cabinet. Line up the mounting holes of the power system
shelf with the holes in the cabinet.

Tip
Since the power system is heavy, you may need to support the power system using wood blocks in order to hold
it in position.
3. Mount the power system to the equipment rack in the cabinet. Secure with screw hardware.
4. If not installed already, proceed to mount all process controller chassis, IOP card files, FTAs, and power
distribution assemblies to be installed in the cabinet. Refer to the site documentation and appropriate
installation procedures.

14.13.5 Power distribution

The following figure illustrates typical DC power distribution from the power system backpanel to PM I/O
hardware components.
To improve reliability, 24 Vdc, 3.6 Vdc, and 6 Vac power distribution to the IOP card files is always provided
by two power distribution cables.

Figure 42: Typical Cabinet 24 Vdc Power Distribution

All PM assemblies that require 24 Vdc power contain two input connectors for redundancy. A pair of power
distribution cables is used to provide power from the power system to IOP card files, digital input power
distribution assemblies, and galvanically isolated power distribution assemblies. See the Control Hardware
Planning Guide for part numbers of power distribution cables for CE compliant and CE non-compliant
installations.

14.13.6 Power distribution backpanel, Model MU-PSRX04

There are twelve 24 Vdc power distribution output connectors (labeled OUTPUT 1 through OUTPUT 12), four
Cabinet Fan Assembly power connectors with associated fuse holders, and a NiCad battery holder on the
backpanel. Sets of terminals provide alarm signals (for external alarm mechanisms) from each Power Supply
Module and the CMOS Battery Backup. The alarm signals are normally wired in series to a 24 Vdc Digital
Input FTA to notify the system when a power supply module fails. The following figure illustrates the power
distribution backpanel features.

238 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Figure 43: Model MU-PSRX04 Power Distribution Backpanel Features

239
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14.14 Cable Installation

After mounting the power system, IOP card files, FTAs and other hardware assemblies in the cabinet, you can
install interconnecting cables to and from the PM I/O components.
• Cables should be routed within the cabinet, or cabinet complex from one connection point to its destination
point.
• Adhere to the wire and “Rules for FTA installation and process wiring” on page 199 when wiring FTAs
installed in mounting channels.
• If cables are routed from a cabinet to an external destination, use shielded cables. Check your site
documentation for cable types and model/part number.
• Allow sufficient cable lead at the connection points for installation and cable dress.

14.14.1 Installing Power Cables

The power cables that are available for use in a PM I/O subsystem have an integrated “Power surge protection
for the I/O link interface” on page 243 as part of the cable. The network protects the I/O link interface
transceivers from power surges when each I/O link interface cable is routed through a protection network at the
card file. For this feature to be effective, all card files in the subsystem (for example, a subsystem being all the
IOP card files that are connected to the IOLIM through the metallic I/O link interface cable) must have the
surge protection network feature installed. The following figure shows the construction of a pair of power
cables with the power surge protection network.

Figure 44: Power Cable with I/O Link Protectors

240 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Refer to Power Cables for IOPs in the Control Hardware Planning Guide for cable models and part numbers for
CE compliant and CE non-compliant installations.
Follow the steps below to install the power cables to the PM cabinet components.
It is assumed for this procedure that all components are in an unpowered state.
1. Check site documentation for power cable installation of PM control cabinet components.
2. Install power cable by first connecting the six-pin connector to the OUTPUT connector on the power system
backpanel. See “Figure 43: Model MU-PSRX04 Power Distribution Backpanel Features” for the location of
the connectors.
3. Route the cable to the appropriate IOP card file and connect the six-pin connector to the POWER A
connector on the card file backpanel. See “Figure 45: Fifteen-Slot IOP Card File Backpanel Connections”
for the location of the connectors.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to install the redundant power cable from the power system backpanel to the
POWER B connector on the IOP card file.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for all remaining IOP card files in the control cabinet.

14.14.2 Fifteen-Slot IOP Card File Backpanel Connections

Figure 45: Fifteen-Slot IOP Card File Backpanel Connections

A pair of power cables supplies 24 Vdc from the power system to both “Digital Input Power Distribution
Assembly” on page 403 and “Power Distribution Assembly, Model MU-GPRD02” on page 536. These power
cables do not have surge protection. . If cables are routed from a cabinet to an external destination, use the
shielded model of the cable. Check your site documentation for cable models, or see Power Cables for IOPs in
the Control Hardware Planning Guide for power cable part numbers for CE compliant and CE non-compliant
installations. Follow the steps below to install the power cables to power distribution assemblies
1. Check site documentation for power cable installation of PM control cabinet components.
2. Install power cable by first connecting the six-pin connector to the OUTPUT connector on the power system
backpanel. See “Figure 43: Model MU-PSRX04 Power Distribution Backpanel Features” for the location of
the connectors.
3. Route the cable to the appropriate power distribution assembly and connect the six-pin connector to the
connector on the assembly. See the following figures for connector location.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to install the redundant power cable from the power system backpanel to the power
distribution assembly connector.

241
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for all remaining power distribution assemblies in the control cabinet.

Table 19: Power Distribution Assemblies

Digital Input

Galvanicaly Isolated

14.14.3 Installing I/O Link Interface cable

The I/O Link Interface is a dual serial communications link between IOP card files that are connected to a
common IOLIM. If there is more than one card file, I/O link interface cables are daisy-chained to all IOP card
files associated with the IOLIM. In a redundant installation, both primary and secondary IOP card files are
connected to the IOLIM using I/O link interface cables. When installing remote I/O, all IOP card files at the
local site, including both primary and secondary IOP card files in a redundant installation, are connected to the
IOLIM using the interface cables.

14.14.4 Cabling Requirements

The metallic I/O link interface cable is a three-conductor shielded cable. Up to six IOP card files and IOLIMs
can be connected to one I/O link interface. Since the files are daisy-chained, the cable should contain the
appropriate number of drops (connectors) for the number of IOP card files and IOLIMs to be connected. See
Spare Parts in the Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide for available I/O link interface cable types and part
numbers. Two cables are provided when ordered by the part number.
• Power cables should be installed first, before the I/O link interface cabling.
• I/O link interface cables are to be no longer than 10 m (33 feet) in total length and are not to leave the
cabinet or cabinet complex.
• Two cables are required because the I/O link interface is redundant for reliability. One cable is designated
Link A and the other Link B.
• The I/O link interface cabling does not involve external terminators and therefore an empty I/O link
interface connector on the backpanel is acceptable.

242 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

CAUTION
Use caution when connecting the I/O link interface cables because of the differences between the 7-slot and 15-
slot IOP card files. All card files have two I/O link interface connectors marked LINKA and LINKB.

The following table identifies the I/O link interface connectors on the 7-Slot, 15-Slot, IOP card file backpanels.

Table 20: IOP Card File Connector Assignments for I/O Link Interface Cables

Card File Type I/O Link A Connector I/O Link B Connector

7-Slot J23 J24
15-Slot J42 J43

14.14.5 Power surge protection for the I/O link interface

An induced power surge can originate through an FTA's field connections as a result of a lightning strike. This
power surge can be 10 amperes or greater and elevate the card file(s) above the common mode range of the I/O
link interface transceivers to possibly cause transceiver failure.
To prevent this occurrence, a power cable was developed with an integrated surge protection network which
filters the power surge on the I/O link interface to the power cable's ground before the I/O link interface
connects to the card file. “Figure 44: Power Cable with I/O Link Protectors” illustrates a pair of surge protection
network power cables identifying the connections for both Link A and Link B.
The I/O Link Interface connects to the surge protection network which is integrated with the power cable and
then passes through the filter, which then connects to the card file. The method of implementing the surge
protection is illustrated in “Figure 46: Typical Cabinet I/O Link Interface Cable Connections”.

14.14.6 New and upgraded subsystems only

The surge protection network power cable is presently used in new production and newly upgraded hardware
only. However, older hardware can and should be upgraded by the use of a set of power cable I/O link protector
adapters, Honeywell part number 51204127-100. See Spare Parts in the Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Guide for available I/O link interface cable types and part numbers.

14.14.7 I/O Link interface cables in adjacent cabinets

The I/O link interface cable daisy chain can be extended to include additional intermediate drops. Longer daisy
chain runs from card file to card file in one cabinet can also include card files in an adjacent cabinet. I/O link
interface cables with the appropriate number of drops must be ordered to satisfy your PM I/O subsystem
configuration (number of card files). Refer to I/O Link Interface cables in the Control Hardware Planning
Guide for a complete listing of available cables types and part numbers.

14.14.8 I/O Link interface cable installation

Follow the procedure to install the I/O interface cables with IOP card files. Note that example describes I/O link
interface cable installation to 15-slot IOP card files.
1 Consult site documentation to locate all IOP card files, both primary and secondary in a redundant
installation, associated with an IOLIM.
2 Connect one end of an I/O interface cable to the surge protection network connected to “Connecting I/O link
interface cable to module” on page 171 in the controller chassis.
3 Connect the next I/O interface cable drop (connector) to the surge protection network connected to J42
(LINK A) of the first IOP card file. The first IOP card file is usually located closest to the IOLIM or power
system. See “Figure 46: Typical Cabinet I/O Link Interface Cable Connections”.

243
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

4 Connect the I/O interface cable to all other associated IOP card files by connecting the cable to the surge
protection network that is connected to the LINK A connection of the IOP card file backpanel.
5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to install the I/O link interface cable to LINK B of the IOLIM and all associated
IOP card files.
6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining IOLIMs and associated IOP card files in the system.

14.14.9 Typical I/O Link and power cable connection

The following figure illustrates typical surge protection network power cable and I/O link interface cable
connections to the Power System and card files in a cabinet.

Figure 46: Typical Cabinet I/O Link Interface Cable Connections

14.14.10 I/O Link interface cable shield grounding

Each I/O link interface cable (Link A and Link B) contains a cable shield that must be grounded.

Attention
The IOLIM in the controller chassis contains jumpers that set the I/O interface cable shield ground. These jumpers are
labeled B Shield and A Shield on the IOLIM and should be set accordingly. See “Setting I/O link interface cable shield
ground” on page 169.

244 www.honeywell.com
 14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

For non-CE compliant applications, the cable shield for the I/O link interface cable should be grounded at
only one point along the interface cable daisy chain. This is normally done on the backpanel of the first IOP
card file (file position 1) in the first control cabinet (using jumpers on the backpanel).
• On a 7-Slot card file, J29 and J22 are located on the IOP card file backpanel between the I/O link interface
cable connectors. Both the A and B I/O link interface cables have their own jumper for grounding the cable
shield. J29 is for the Link A cable shield and J22 is for the Link B cable shield. The cable shield is grounded
if the jumper is bridged across both pins.
• On the 15-Slot card file, J44 and J45 are located on the IOP card file backpanel between the I/O link
interface cable connectors and accomplish the same function.
For CE Compliant applications, the I/O link interface cable shield must be grounded to the card file chassis
(Safety Ground) at each connector. This is accomplished with shield wire that attaches to a FASTON terminal
on the card file's backpanel ground plate. Only cables with a part number of 51204042-xxx can be used. See
Spare Parts in the Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide for available I/O link interface cable types and part
numbers.

Attention
The I/O link interface cable shield grounding must be carefully adhered to when installing a PM I/O subsystem.
Failure to follow the above guidelines can result in unwanted ground loops that may cause I/O Link communications
errors.

Follow the steps below to set the I/O link interface cable shield grounding.
1. Refer to site documentation to locate the IOLIM in the controller chassis and the associated IOP card files in
the control cabinets.
2. Determine if this process control system is a
• Non-CE compliant installation (Go to Step 3.)
• CE compliant installation. (Go to Step 4.)
3. If the system is a non-CE compliant installation,
• Locate the first IOP card file (file position 1) closest to the power system. Make sure that a jumper is
present across both pairs of pins that are labeled J22 and J29 (7-slot card file) or J44 and J45 ( “Fifteen-
Slot IOP Card File Backpanel Connections” on page 241).
• Remove the jumpers from the shield ground pins of all other associated card files and the “Setting I/O
link interface cable shield ground” on page 169.
4. If the system is a CE compliant installation,
• Make sure that a jumper is present across both pairs of pins that are labeled J22 and J29 (7-slot card file)
or J44 and J45 (15-slot card file).
• Continue to insert the jumpers on the pins for each associated IOP card file.
• Make sure the “Setting I/O link interface cable shield ground” on page 169 also contains jumpers across
the A Shield and B Shield pins.

14.14.11 Installing IOP to FTA Cables

It is up to the installer to make sure that the cabling from the IOP card file is connected to the appropriate FTA.
Cable model MU-KFTAxx contains fifty-pin connectors at each end and it is used as the IOP to FTA cable. The
cable comes in a variety of lengths up to 50 meters (164 feet). The “xx” in the suffix of the model number
identifies the length of the cable in meters. Refer to Planning for Field Termination Assemblies (FTAs) in the
Control Hardware Planning Guide for listing of IOP to FTA cable models and part numbers.
Follow the steps below to install the IOP to FTA cables.
1 Locate the connector for the IOP card that is directly below the IOP card slot. (Connectors are marked
“Figure 44: Power Cable with I/O Link Protectors” corresponding to the IOP card slot number.)
2 Make sure that cable (Model MU-KFTAxx) you are using is long enough to reach from the IOP card file
connector to the FTA connector.

245
14 PROCESS MANAGER I/O INSTALLATION AND WIRING

3 Install one end of the IOP - FTA cable onto the proper SLOT connector of the IOP card file. Use the bale
locks to secure the cable. See “Fifteen-Slot IOP Card File Backpanel Connections” on page 241 and “Figure
47: IOP to FTA Cabling”.
4 Route the cable to the appropriate FTA and install the cable onto J1. Secure the cable using the bale locks.*
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 for all remaining IOP card and FTAs.
6 * On most FTAs, the J1 connector is for the IOP to FTA cable for primary IOPs.
J2 connector is for the secondary IOP, if it is a redundant installation.

Figure 47: IOP to FTA Cabling

246 www.honeywell.com
15 Appendix A - I/O Module Wiring Reference

Refer the following for I/O Module wiring:

Related topics
“Analog Input Module Wiring” on page 248
“Analog Output Module Wiring” on page 256
“Discrete AC Input Module Wiring” on page 258
“Discrete AC Output module Wiring” on page 264
“Discrete DC Input Module Wiring” on page 269
“Discrete DC Output Module Wiring” on page 274
“Contact/Relay Module Wiring” on page 279
“Pulse Input Module Wiring” on page 282

247
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

15.1 Analog Input Module Wiring

Related topics
“TC-IAH061/TK-IAH061 - 6-point High-level analog input module” on page 248
“TC-IAH161/TK-IAH161 - 16 -point high-level voltage/current analog input module” on page 250
“TC-IXL061/TK-IXL061 - 6-point/Thermocouple input module” on page 251
“TC-IXL062/TK-IXL062 - 6-point/Thermocouple input module” on page 252
“TC-IXR061/TK-IXR061 - 6-point/RTD input module” on page 254

15.1.1 TC-IAH061/TK-IAH061 - 6-point High-level analog input module

CAUTION
Please note that:
• applying 24 Vdc to the inputs is not recommended. Doing so may damage the module when the input
transducer is shorted, or the field wiring is incorrectly connected, or momentarily shorted. It is recommended
that you do not connect field wiring to this module until the wiring and the transducer(s) have been thoroughly
checked.
• each input channel can be individually configured for voltage or current range. Be sure the channel range
configuration is correct for the intended field wiring connection.
• when using this module for current inputs-
– the voltage (V) and current (I) input terminals must be shorted together on the RTB for current inputs.
– the internal 249 ohm input current shunt is rated at 0.25W. Do not exceed this rating.

Pin Outs and Wiring Examples

Figure 48: TC-IAH061/TK-IAH061

248 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Note: Place additional loop devices (e.g. strip chart recorders, etc.) at either A location

249
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Note: Place additional loop devices (e.g. strip chart recorders etc,.) at either A location. The voltage (IN-X/V)
and current (IN - X/I) terminals for a given input channel must be wired together. For example, wire IN-0/V pin
1 to IN - 0/I pin 3, for a current input channel 0.

15.1.2 TC-IAH161/TK-IAH161 - 16 -point high-level voltage/current analog input module

Attention
All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, RTN pins 9, 10, 27 and 28 are
connected

CAUTION
Please note that:
• applying 24 Vdc to the inputs is not recommended. Doing so may damage the module when the input
transducer is shorted, or the field wiring is incorrectly connected or momentarily shorted. It is recommended
that you do not connect field wiring to this module until the wiring and the transducer(s) have been thoroughly
checked.
• each input channel can be individually configured for voltage or current range. Be sure the channel range
configuration is correct for the intended field wiring connection.
• when using this module for 4 to 20 MA current inputs-
– all terminals marked i RTN must be wired to terminals marked RTN.
– the internal 249 ohm input current shunt is rated at 0.25W. Do not exceed this rating.

Pin Outs and Wiring Examples

Single-ended current wiring example

Figure 49: TC-IAH161/TK-IAH161

Notes: All terminals marked RTN are connected internally.

A 249 ohm current loop resistor is located between IN-x and i RTN-x terminals for 4 - 20 MA range only.
For current applications, all terminals marked i RTN must be wired to terminals marked RTN.

250 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

If you use a shorting bar instead of jumper wires, be sure you only short terminals with a common source.
Place additional loop devices, such as strip chart recorders, at the “A” location shown.

Figure 50: Single-ended voltage wiring example

Notes: All terminals marked RTN are connected internally.

Terminals marked i RTN are not used for single-ended voltage wiring.

15.1.3 TC-IXL061/TK-IXL061 - 6-point/Thermocouple input module

WARNING
To maintain a +/- 3 degrees C (+/- 5 degrees F) Reference Junction Compensation for the thermocouple, the
chassis containing the module must be mounted in a NEMA 4 or NEMA 12 enclosure that is approximately 24 in.
(610mm) wide, 20 in. (508mm) high, and 8 in. (203mm) deep.
Not following this recommendation could cause the Reference Junction Compensation error to exceed +/- 5
degrees C (+/- 9 degrees F) depending on the actual mounting procedure used.

251
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 51: TC-IXL061/TK-IXL061

15.1.4 TC-IXL062/TK-IXL062 - 6-point/Thermocouple input module

This module replaces the model TC-IXL061/TK-IXL061 module. The following is summary of this modules
features as compared to the previous model.
• Includes two Cold Junction Compensators (CJC).
• Features a new wiring scheme for inputs.
• Capable of accepting configuration of the previous module and behaving the same as the previous module.
• Requires a new Remote Termination Panel (RTP) prewired cable.
Consider the following while wiring:
• Do not connect more than two wires to any single terminal.
• When using a RTB, you must connect two CJCs to terminals 3 and 4, and 17 and 18, as shown in the wiring
example below. Be sure to leave the Cold Junction Disable and RTP Present selections unchecked, when
configuring the module through Control Builder. The Allen-Bradley part number for a package of two CJCs
is 94286502. The Honeywell model number for a package of two CJCs is TC-CJRT02 (51199420-100).
• The RTPs use an isothermal bar to maintain a steady temperature at all module terminations. When you use
the RTP, we recommend you mount it so the black anodized aluminum bar is in the horizontal position.
• The following is a schematic of the input circuit for reference.

252 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 52: TC-IXL062/TK-IXL062

253
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

15.1.5 TC-IXR061/TK-IXR061 - 6-point/RTD input module

Pin Outs and Wiring Examples

Figure 53: TC-IXR061/TK-IXR061

Note: For 2-Wire resistor applications including calibration, make sure in X/B and RTN = X/C are shorted
together [input channel 5].

254 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Note: Wiring is exactly the same as the 3-wire RTD with one wire left open.

255
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

15.2 Analog Output Module Wiring

Related topics
“TC-OAH061/TK-OAH061 - 6-point/4 to 20 mA analog output module” on page 256
“TC-OAV061/TK-OAV061 - 6-point/10 Vdc analog output module” on page 257
“TC-OAV081/TK-OAV081 - 8-point High level voltage/current analog output module” on page 257

15.2.1 TC-OAH061/TK-OAH061 - 6-point/4 to 20 mA analog output module

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 54: TC-OAH061/TK-OAH061

Note: Place additional devices any where in the loop.

256 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

15.2.2 TC-OAV061/TK-OAV061 - 6-point/10 Vdc analog output module

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 55: TC-OAV061/TK-OAV061

15.2.3 TC-OAV081/TK-OAV081 - 8-point High level voltage/current analog output module

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 56: TC-OAV081/TK-OAV081

Note: Place additional loop devices (e.g. strip chart recorders, etc.) At the A location noted above.

257
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

15.3 Discrete AC Input Module Wiring

Related topics
“TC-IDA161/TK-IDA161 - 16-point/120(79-132) Vac discrete AC input module” on page 258
“TC-IDK161/TK-IDK161 - 16-point / 120(79-132) Vac Isolated discrete AC input module” on page 259
“TC-IDW161/TK-IDW161 - 16-point/220(159-265) Vac Isolated discrete AC input module” on page 261
“TC-IDX081/TK-IDX081 - 8-point/120(79-132) Vac Diagnostic” on page 262

15.3.1 TC-IDA161/TK-IDA161 - 16-point/120(79-132) Vac discrete AC input module

Attention
All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, L2 - 0 pins 9 and 10 are
connected.

CAUTION
This input module permits the field-side input device (switch) to be located on either the hot or neutral side of the
source.

Simplified Schematic

258 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 57: TC-IDA161/TK-IDA161

Notes: All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, L2 can be
connected to any terminal marked L2-0.
When you daisy chain from a group to another, RTB always connect the daisy chain to the terminal directly
connected to the supply wire as shown.
This wiring example shows a single voltage source.

15.3.2 TC-IDK161/TK-IDK161 - 16-point / 120(79-132) Vac Isolated discrete AC input module

Attention
All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, L2 - 15 pins 32 and 24 are
connected.

259
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

CAUTION
This input module permits the field-side input device (switch) to be located on either the hot or neutral side of the
source, unless the modules shorting bar has been installed. In this case, the input device must be installed on the
hot side of the source.

Simplified Schematic

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 58: TC-IDK161/TK-IDK161

Notes: All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, L2 can be
connected to any terminal marked L2 - 15.
When you use the second L2 - 15 terminal to daisy chain to other RTBs, always connect the daisy chain to the
terminal directly connected to the supply wire, as shown in the example above.

260 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

15.3.3 TC-IDW161/TK-IDW161 - 16-point/220(159-265) Vac Isolated discrete AC input module

Attention
All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, L2 - 15 pins 32 and 34 are
connected.

CAUTION
This input module permits the field-side input device (switch) to be located on either the hot or neutral side of the
source, unless the modules shorting bar has been installed. In this case, the input device must be installed on the
hot side of the source.

Simplified Schematic

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 59: TC-IDW161/TK-IDW161

261
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Note: All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, L2 can be
connected to either terminal marked L2 - 15.
When you use the second L2 - 15 terminal to daisy chain to other RTBs, always connect the daisy chain to the
supply wire, as shown in the examples.

15.3.4 TC-IDX081/TK-IDX081 - 8-point/120(79-132) Vac Diagnostic

Attention
All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, L2 - 0 pins 4,6,8 and 10 are
connected.

Simplified Schematic

262 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 60: TC-IDX081/TK-IDX081

Notes: All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, L2 can be
connected to any terminal marked L2-0.
This warning example shows a single voltage source.
When you daisy chain from a group to other RTB's, always connect the daisy chain to the terminal directly
connected to the supply wire, as shown above.
Resistors are not necessary if Wire Off diagnostic is used.

263
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

15.4 Discrete AC Output module Wiring

Related topics
“TC-ODA161/TK-ODA161 - 16-point/120/220(74-265) Vac” on page 264
“TC-ODK161/TK-ODK161 - 16-point/120/220(74-265) Vac Isolated” on page 265
“TC-ODX081/ TK-ODX081 - 8-point/120(17-132) Vac Diagnostic” on page 267

15.4.1 TC-ODA161/TK-ODA161 - 16-point/120/220(74-265) Vac

Simplified Schematic

264 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 61: TC-ODA161/TK-ODA161

Notes: When you daisy chain from a group to another RTB, always connect the daisy chain to the terminal
directly connected to the supply wire as shown.
This wiring example shows a single voltage source.

15.4.2 TC-ODK161/TK-ODK161 - 16-point/120/220(74-265) Vac Isolated

Attention
All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, L1 - 15 pins 32 and 34 are
connected.

Attention
This output module permits the field-side output device (load) to be located on either the Hot or Neutral side of the
source, unless the module's shorting bar has been insulated. In this case, the device must be installed on the neutral
side of the source.

265
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Simplified Schematic

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Notes: All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module.
For example, L1 can be connected to either terminal marked L1 - 15.
When you use the second L1 - 15 terminal to daisy chain to other RTB's, always connect the daisy chain to the
terminal directly connected to the supply wire, as shown in the example.
Figure 62: TC-ODK161/TK-ODK161

266 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

15.4.3 TC-ODX081/ TK-ODX081 - 8-point/120(17-132) Vac Diagnostic

Attention
All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, L1 - 0 pins 4, 6, 8 and 10 are
connected.

Simplified Schematic

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 63: TC-ODX081/TK-ODX081

Notes: All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, L1 can be
connected to any terminal marked L1 - 0.

267
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

When you daisy chain from a group to another RTB, always connect the daisy chain to the terminal directly
connected to the supply wire, as shown.
This wiring example shows a single voltage source.

268 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

15.5 Discrete DC Input Module Wiring

Related topics
“TC-IDD321/TK-IDD321 - 32-point/24(10-30) Vdc” on page 269
“TC-IDJ161/TK-IDJ161 - 16-point/24(10-30) Vdc Isolated” on page 270
“TC-IDX161/TK-IDX161 - 16-point/24(10-30) Vdc Diagnostic” on page 272

15.5.1 TC-IDD321/TK-IDD321 - 32-point/24(10-30) Vdc

Attention
All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, GND-0 pins 17 and 18 are
connected.

CAUTION
This input module permits the field-side input device (switch) to be located on either the positive or negative side
of the source.

Simplified Schematic

269
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 64: TC-IDD321/TK-IDD321

Notes: All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, DC COM can be
connected to either terminal marked GND-1.
When you daisy chain to other RTB's, always connect the daisy chain to the terminal directly connected to the
supply wire, as shown in the example above.
This wiring example shown a single voltage source.

15.5.2 TC-IDJ161/TK-IDJ161 - 16-point/24(10-30) Vdc Isolated

Attention
All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, GND-15 pins 32 and 24 are
connected.

270 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

CAUTION
This input module permits the field-side input device (switch) to be located on either the positive or negative side
of the source, unless the modules shorting bar has been installed. In this case, the input device must be installed on
the positive side of the source.

Simplified Schematic

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 65: TC-IDJ161/TK-IDJ161

Notes: All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, DC (-) can be
connected to either terminal marked GND - 15.
When you use the second GND-15 terminal to daisy chain the other RTB's, always connect the daisy chain to
the terminal directly connected to the supply wire, as shown in the example above.
Each input can be wired in a sink or source configuration as shown.

271
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

15.5.3 TC-IDX161/TK-IDX161 - 16-point/24(10-30) Vdc Diagnostic

Attention
All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, GND-0 pins 2, 4, 6 and 8 are
connected.

Simplified Schematic

272 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 66: TC-IDX161/TK-IDX161

Notes: All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, DC COM can be
connected to any terminal Marked GND-0.
When you daisy chain from a group to other RTB's, always connect the daisy chain to the terminal directly
connected to the supply wire, as shown above.
This wiring example shown a single voltage source.
Resistors are not necessary if Wire Off diagnostic is not used.

273
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

15.6 Discrete DC Output Module Wiring

Related topics
“TC-ODD321/TK-ODD321 - 32-point/24(10-31) Vdc” on page 274
“TC-ODJ161/TK-ODJ161 - 16-point/24 (10-30) Vdc Isolated” on page 275
“TC-ODX161/TK-ODX161 - 16-point/24(19-30) Vdc Diagnostic” on page 277

15.6.1 TC-ODD321/TK-ODD321 - 32-point/24(10-31) Vdc

CAUTION
This output module permits the field-side output device (load) to be located on either the positive or negative side
of the source.
Simplified Schematic

274 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 67: TC-ODD321/TK-ODD321

Notes: When you daisy chain from a group to another RTB, always connect the daisy chain to the terminal
directly connected to the supply wire, as shown.
This wiring example uses a single voltage source.

15.6.2 TC-ODJ161/TK-ODJ161 - 16-point/24 (10-30) Vdc Isolated

Attention
All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, DC-15(+) pins 32 and 34 are
connected.

275
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

CAUTION
This output module permits the field-side output device (load) to be located on either the positive or negative side
of the source, unless the modules shorting bar has been installed. In this case, the output device must be installed
on the output side of the source.
Simplified Schematic

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 68: TC-ODJ161/TK-ODJ161

Notes: all terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, DC(+) can be
connected to either terminal marked DC-15.
When you use the second DC-15(+) terminal to daisy chain to other RTB's, always connect the daisy chain to
the terminal directly connected to the supply wire, as shown.
Outputs can be wired in a sink our source configuration as shown.

276 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

15.6.3 TC-ODX161/TK-ODX161 - 16-point/24(19-30) Vdc Diagnostic

Attention
All terminals wit h the same name are connected together on the module. For example, +DC-0 pins 2,4,6,8,10,12 and
14 are connected.

Simplified Schematic

277
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 69: TC-ODX161/TK-ODX161

Notes: All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, DC COM can be
connected to either terminal marked GND - 1.
When you daisy chain from a group to another RTB, always connect the daisy chain to the terminal directly
connected to the supply wire, as shown.
This wiring example shown a single voltage source.

278 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

15.7 Contact/Relay Module Wiring

Related topics
“TC-ORC161/TK-ORC161 - 16-point/10-265 Vac, 5-150 Vdc Isolated Contact” on page 279
“TC-ORC081/TK-ORC081 - 8-point (8 Normally Open, 8 Normally Closed)/10-265 Vac, 5-150 Vdc Isolated
Relay” on page 280

15.7.1 TC-ORC161/TK-ORC161 - 16-point/10-265 Vac, 5-150 Vdc Isolated Contact

Attention
• All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, L1 can be connected to
either terminal marked L1-15.
• This module receives power from the chasis power supply and requires 2 sources of power from the backplane:
– 150mA at 5.1Vdc
– 150mA at 24Vdc
Add this current/power value (4.4W) to the requirements of all other modules in the chassis to prevent overloading the
power supply. Field output supply power should be limited to 10KVA available short circuit power.

Simplified Schematic

279
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 70: TC-ORC161/TK-ORC161

Notes: Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal. When you use the second
L1-15 terminal to daisy chain to other RTBs, always connect the daisy chain as shown.
If separate power sources are used, do not exceed the specified isolation voltage.

15.7.2 TC-ORC081/TK-ORC081 - 8-point (8 Normally Open, 8 Normally Closed)/10-265 Vac, 5-150 Vdc
Isolated Relay
Attention
• All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module. For example, L1-0 can be connected to
either terminal marked L1-0.
• This module receives power from the chasis power supply and requires 2 sources of power from the backplane:
– 100mA at 5.1Vdc
– 100mA at 24Vdc
Add this current/power value (2.9W) to the requirements of all other modules in the chassis to prevent overloading the
power supply. Field output supply power should be limited to 10KVA available short circuit power.

280 www.honeywell.com
 15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

Simplified Schematic

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 71: TC-ORC081/TK-ORC081

Notes: Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal. When you use the third L1-17
terminal to daisy chain to other RTBs, always connect the daisy chain as shown.
If separate power sources are used, do not exceed the specified isolation voltage.

281
15 APPENDIX A - I/O MODULE WIRING REFERENCE

15.8 Pulse Input Module Wiring

Related topics
“TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081 - 8-point/5-24 Vdc Pulse Input Module” on page 282

15.8.1 TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081 - 8-point/5-24 Vdc Pulse Input Module

Pin Outs and Wiring Example

Figure 72: TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081 Pulse Input Module

Notes: Diagram shows how 8 transmitters interface to the 36 positions terminal block.
• For instance, Transmitter 0 connects to Pins 1, 3 and 5 where:
– Pin 1 is Signal
– Pin 3 is Signal Common
– Pin 5 is Chassis Ground Shield Connection
Output Channel 0 connects to Pins 33 and 35 and Output Channel 1 connects to Pins 34 and 36.

282 www.honeywell.com
16 Appendix B

Related topics
“CSA Hazardous Location Approval” on page 284
“Approbation d'utilisation dans des environments dangereux par la CSA” on page 286

283
16 APPENDIX B

16.1 CSA Hazardous Location Approval

CSA certifies products for general use as well as for use in hazardous locations. Actual CSA certification is
indicated by the product label as shown below, and not by statements in any user documentation.
Example of the CSA certification product label:

CSA logo is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association.

16.1.1 CSA Certification

To comply with CSA certification for use in hazardous locations, the following information becomes a part of
the product literature for this CSA-certified industrial control product:
• This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D, or non-hazardous locations
only.
• The products having the appropriate CSA markings (that is, Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D) are
certified for use in other equipment where the suitability of combination (that is, application or use) is
determined by the CSA or the local inspection office having jurisdiction.

16.1.2 Temperature Ratings

Attention
Due to the modular nature of a programmable control system, the product with the highest temperature rating
determines the overall temperature code rating of a programmable control system in a Class I, Division 2 location.

The temperature code rating is marked on the product label as shown.

16.1.3 Notices
The following warnings apply to products having CSA certification for use in hazardous locations.

284 www.honeywell.com
 16 APPENDIX B

WARNING
Explosion hazard!
• Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2.
• Do not replace components unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
• Do not disconnect connectors unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
Secure any user-supplied connectors that mate to external circuits on this equipment by using screws, sliding
latches, threaded connectors, or other means such that any connection can withstand a 15 Newton (3.4 lbf)
separating force applied for a minimum of one minute.
• If the Product contains batteries, they must only be changed in an area known to be non-hazardous.

285
16 APPENDIX B

16.2 Approbation d'utilisation dans des environments dangereux par la

CSA
La CSA certifie des produits pour une utilisation générale aussi bien que pour une utilisation en environnements
dangereux. La certification CSA en vigueur est indiquée par l'étiquette produit et non par des indications dans la
documentation utilisateur.
Exemple d'étiquette de certification d'un produit par la CSA:

16.2.1 La certification CSA

Pour satisfaire à la certification CSA en environnements dangereux, les informations suivantes fontpartie
intégrante de la documentation des produits de commande industrielle certifiés.
• Cet équipement ne convient qu'à une utilisation en environnements de Classe 1, Division 2, Groupes A, B,
C, D ou non dangereux.
• Les produits portant le marquage CSA approprié (c'est-à-dire Classe 1, Division 2, Groupes A, B, C, D) sont
certifiés pour une utilisation avec d'autres équipements, les combinaisons d'applications et d'utilisations étant
déterminées par la CSA ou le bureau local d'inspection qualifié.

16.2.2 Autour de temperature

Attention
De par la nature modulaire des systèmes de commande programmables, le produit ayant le code de température le plus
élevé détermine le code de température global du système dans un environnement de Classe 1, Division 2.

Le code de température est indiqué sur l'étiquette produit.

16.2.3 Discerner
Les avertissements suivants s'appliquent aux produits ayant la certification CSA pour une utilisation en
environnements dangereux.

286 www.honeywell.com
 16 APPENDIX B

Attention
• La substitution de composants peut rendre cet équipement inadapté à une utilisation en environnements de Classe
1, Division 2.
• Couper le courant ou s'assurer que l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant de remplacer des composants.
• Couper le courant ou s'assurer que l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant de débrancher l'équipement.
• Couper le courant ou s'assurer que l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant de débrancher les connecteurs.
Fixer tous les connecteurs fournis par l'utilisateur pour se brancher aux circuits externes de cet équipement à l 'aide
de vis, loquets coulissants, connecteurs filetés ou autres, de sorte que les connexions résistent à une force de
séparation de 15 Newtons (1,5 kg - 3,4 lbf.) appliquée pendant au moins une minute.
• S'assurer que l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant de changer les piles.

Le sigle CSA est une marque déposée de l'Association des Standards pour le Canada.

287
16 APPENDIX B

288 www.honeywell.com
17 Appendix C - PM I/O FTA Reference

This section provides descriptions for all standard FTAs associated with Process Manager I/O processors.
Connection diagrams and assembly layout drawings are provided for each FTA to aid in wiring of field devices
to the control system.

Attention
If you are using Galvanically Isolated FTAs for your process application, refer to “Appendix D - GI FTA Reference”
on page 497.

The FTAs are organized according to signal types.

• “Analog Input (AI) FTA Wiring” on page 290
• “Analog Output (AO) FTA wiring” on page 378
• “Digital Input (DI) FTA Wiring” on page 402 and
• “Digital Output (DO) Wiring” on page 434

Related topics
“Analog Input (AI) FTA Wiring” on page 290
“Analog Output (AO) FTA wiring” on page 378
“Digital Input (DI) FTA Wiring” on page 402
“Digital Output (DO) Wiring” on page 434

289
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1 Analog Input (AI) FTA Wiring

There are a variety of FTAs that accept analog input signals. These FTA types are listed in the following table
according to analog signal level (high level or low level) and signal type (Thermocouple, RTD, or smart
transmitter output) transmitted from the field device.

Table 21: Analog Input Standard FTA Types

Model Number Group Input Type Description

MU/MC-TAILxx “Low Level Analog Input Low Level Analog Input (LLAI) FTAs provide inputs for up
(LLAI) FTAs” on page 290 to eight low level analog components, such as thermocouples
(TCs) or Resistance Temperature Devices (RTDs).
MU/MC-TAMTxx “Low Level Analog Input The FTA accepts one set of low level analog inputs, such as
Multiplexer (LLMux) thermocouples (TC) or Resistance Temperature Detectors
MU/MC-TAMRxx
FTAs” on page 301 (RTDs). The set of inputs must be either thermocouples or
RTDs. The inputs are sequentially multiplexed. One or two
FTAs of either type can be connected to one Power Adapter
assembly and its IOP.
MU/MC-TLPA02 N/A “Power Adapter mounting location” on page 304.
MU/MC-GRMT01 “Remote Hardened The RHMUX FTA provides inputs for 0 to 100-millivolt
Multiplexer (RHMUX) and/or thermocouple devices and is installed in a NEMA 4 or
FTA” on page 322 4X enclosure to operate in a Division 1, Class I, Group A and
B hazardous location.
MU/MC-TAIHxx “High Level Analog Input Accepts high level analog inputs. The inputs are configurable
(HLAI) FTAs” on page 334 as single-ended or differential in relation to logic ground. The
FTA is also used to interface Smart Transmitter devices.
MU/MC-TSTXxx Smart Transmitter Interface See “Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) FTA Wiring” on
page 370.

17.1.1 Low Level Analog Input (LLAI) FTAs

The Low Level Analog Input (LLAI) FTA provides inputs for up to eight low level analog components, such as
thermocouples (TCs) or Resistance Temperature Devices (RTDs). The inputs are isolated and independent, but
share a common cable shield bus.
There are two models of each type of Low Level Analog Input (LLAI) FTAs. One model is CE compliant,
while the other model is not CE compliant. The CE compliant and non-CE compliant FTAs have unique model
numbers. The CE compliant assembly is identified by a part number tab number that ends in “25” or “75,” as
shown in the following table.
CE compliant FTAs have an FTA connector with a grounded body that accepts the CE compliant model MU-
KFTSxx IOP to FTA cable. This fully shielded FTA cable is required if the FTA is mounted in a cabinet that is
separate from the cabinet or cabinet complex in which its associated IOP is installed. If The FTA is mounted in
the same cabinet or cabinet complex as its associated IOP, an unshielded model MU-KFTAxx IOP to FTA cable
can be used. Shielded field wiring is not required for CE Compliance however, shielded IOP to FTA cables are
required.
The CE Compliant and non-CE Compliant models with their part numbers are listed in the following table.

Table 22: Low Level Analog Input (LLAI) FTAs and IOPs

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-TAIL01 LLAI FTA with Compression Terminals 51301183-100 N/A
Single IOP Interface (early version)

290 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-TAIL01 LLAI FTA with Compression Terminals 51301107-100 N/A
Single IOP Interface
MU-TAIL02 LLAI FTA with Compression Terminals 51304437-100 N/A
Single IOP Interface
MC-TAIL02 LLAI FTA with Compression Terminals 51304437-150 N/A
Single IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
MU-TAIL03 LLAI FTA with Compression Terminals N/A 51309202-125*
Single IOP Interface
MC-TAIL03 LLAI FTA with Compression Terminals N/A 51309202-175*
Single IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
Supporting IOPs
MU-PAIL02 LLAI IOP N/A 51304481-100
MC-PAIL02 LLAI IOP-Conformally Coated N/A 51304481-150
* Requires a model MU-PAIL02 or MC-PAIL02 LLAI IOP with revision H (5.1) or greater firmware for proper operation.

17.1.2 IOP compatibility

The model MU/MC-PAIL02 Low Level Analog Input IOPs support the model MU-TAIL01 and MU/MC-
TAIL02 LLAI FTAs. Only the model MU/MC-PAIL02 LLAI IOP supports the CE Compliant model MU/MC-
TAIL03 FTA. The IOPs can be installed in any card file slot.

CAUTION
When an earlier version of the model MU-TAIL01 LLAI FTA (Honeywell part number 51301183 100) is used, the
maximum length of the IOP to FTA cable must not exceed 20 meters (66 feet).

Table 23: Low Level Analog Input FTA Connection Drawings

Low Level Analog Input Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

FTA Model “Model MU-TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 low “Model MU-TAIL02 low level analog
level analog input FTA with RTD input FTA assembly layout -non-CE
connection diagram-non-CE compliant” on page 299
compliant” on page 296
Thermocouple inputs
“Model MU-TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 low “Model MU-TAIL02 low level analog
level analog input FTA with RTD input FTA assembly layout -non-CE
connection diagram-non-CE compliant” on page 299
compliant” on page 296
RTD inputs
“Model MU-TAIL03 low level analog “Model MU-TAIL03 low level analog
input FTA with thermocouple input FTA assembly layout -CE
connection diagram-CE compliant” on compliant” on page 300
page 297
Thermocouple inputs

291
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Low Level Analog Input Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

“Model MU-TAIL03 low level analog “Model MU-TAIL03 low level analog
input FTA with RTD connection input FTA assembly layout -CE
diagram -CE compliant” on page 298 compliant” on page 300
RTD inputs

17.1.3 Thermocouple and RTDs inputs can be mixed

Signals from thermocouples, RTDs, and voltage inputs can be mixed on the same FTA as shown in the
connection diagrams, however, if there is a thermocouple input, the thermocouple input must be connected to
channel 1.

17.1.4 Reference junction signal for model MU-TAIL01 and MU/MC-TAIL02 FTAs
If one or more thermocouples are connected to the FTA, the Reference Junction signal generated at TB2-17
must be connected to the auxiliary input for the FTA's analog-to-digital converter at terminal TB1-1. See
“Figure 73: Model MU-TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 FTA Connection Diagram”.
If no thermocouple inputs are present, the connection between TB1-1 and TB2-17 is not required. See “Figure
74: Model MU-TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 FTA with RTD Connection Diagram”.

17.1.5 Reference junction signal for model MU/MC-TAIL03 CE Compliant FTA

Unlike the non-CE-Compliant model MU-TAIL01 and MU/MC-TAIL02 FTAs, the separate wire that is
connected between TB1-1 and TB2-17 is not required on the CE Compliant model MU/MC-TAIL03 FTA.
Instead, a jumper plug must be used at P1 on the FTA.
If one or more thermocouples are connected to the FTA, the Reference Junction must be connected to the
channel 1 auxiliary input A/D converter. This is accomplished by installing the jumper plug between pins 2 and
3 (“TC” position) at P1. See “Figure 75: Model MU-TAIL03 FTA with TC Connection Diagram” and “Figure
78: Model MU-TAIL03 FTA Assembly Layout (EMI Cover Removed)”.
If no thermocouple inputs are connected, install the jumper plug between pins 1 and 2 (“ALL OTHER
ANALOG INPUT TYPES” position) at P1. See “Figure 76: Model MU-TAIL03 FTA with RTD Connection
Diagram” and “Figure 78: Model MU-TAIL03 FTA Assembly Layout (EMI Cover Removed)”.

17.1.6 Shield bus connections

An internal shield bus connection at every fourth terminal provides connection points for any shielded-pair
cables. Connection is also provided at TB2-18 and TB2-19 for daisy-chaining the buses from FTA to FTA. Use
conductors at least as heavy as the incoming low level signal wiring. On the last assembly in the chain, connect
TB2-19 to the local ground bus bar at the floor of the cabinet. Designation of the local ground bus depends on
where the originating signal is referenced as described in the following paragraphs.

Attention
The LLAI IOP and its FTA use a 3-lead RTD configuration. Proper compensation for lead wire resistance depends on
the resistance being equal in each leg of the RTD. This includes the lead wire resistance and the Intrinsic Safety
device, such as a Zener Barrier. No provision is made to compensate for a lead wire or the Intrinsic Safety device
resistance mismatch.

17.1.7 Thermocouple cable shield grounding

Thermocouples are commonly grounded to the process vessel; therefore, ground the thermocouple cable shields
to the vessel and cut them off at the FTA end of the cable. For this type of circuit, the FTA internal shield bus is

292 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

not used and no connection to a local ground bus bar is needed. See Input 1 in “Figure 73: Model MU-
TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 FTA Connection Diagram” or “Figure 75: Model MU-TAIL03 FTA with TC Connection
Diagram”.

17.1.8 RTD cable shield grounding

RTDs have different shield connections because the RTDs are electrically insulated from the process vessel;
therefore, cut the shield wire off at the process end and connect the shield wires at the FTA. The FTA internal
shield bus then connects to the local Master Reference Ground (MRG) bus bar. See Input 8 in “Figure 73:
Model MU-TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 FTA Connection Diagram” or Input 2 in “Figure 74: Model MU-
TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 FTA with RTD Connection Diagram”.
For CE Compliance, the internal shield bus must connect to Safety Ground. See “Figure 75: Model MU-TAIL03
FTA with TC Connection Diagram” and “Figure 76: Model MU-TAIL03 FTA with RTD Connection Diagram”.

17.1.9 Local code requirements

The FTA is constructed with a 2.2 mm (0.087 inch) separation at each input. Most local electrical codes require
that any common mode voltage applied through the signal wires be limited to 150 V maximum. Check the site
planning drawings for any external current limiting and install it as specified. Additionally, use only cable that is
Approved for the operating voltage and current.

17.1.10 Thermocouple lead wire resistance

Thermocouple lead wire resistance, plus the thermocouple junction resistance, must be less than 1000 ohms
because the system may falsely detect an open thermocouple above 1000 ohms.

CAUTION
The FTA terminal cover must be installed to provide isothermal operation. Install the LLAI FTA in a cabinet to
further minimize temperature gradients that result from air currents.

For the model MU/MC-TAIL03 LLAI FTA, ensure that the metallic cover is aligned, seated, and secured on the
FTA's RFI gasket to reduce undesired EMI. Initially, hand tighten the thumbscrews on the cover, and then
tighten them approximately 1\2 turn with a screwdriver. Do not overtighten.

17.1.11 Allow proper warm up time

Thermo stabilization for the model MU/MC-TAIL03 FTA requires at least 90 minutes. Allow at least 90
minutes of warm up time before taking thermocouple measurements. The terminal cover must be installed to
provide isothermal operation. For the model MU/MC-TAIL03 LLAI FTA, ensure that the metallic EMI cover is
securely in place during the 90 minute warm up period and during routine operation. The EMI cover is an
integral part of the thermo design because it has thermo mass.
If the input source is an RTD, millivolts, voltage, or milliamps, the warm up period can be reduced to 30
minutes.

Attention
Because of possible processing conflicts, it is recommended that points not be built for inputs without wires or sensors
connected to the input.

• If a point is built for a thermocouple input with Open Thermocouple Detection (OTD) disabled and a
voltage input or a resistance (RTD) input without a connected sensor, the point must be placed in the
inactive state.

293
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

• If the unused point is activated and the input is a thermocouple point with OTD disabled or a voltage point,
connect a jumper wire between the B and C input screws (contacts). See “Figure 73: Model MU-
TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 FTA Connection Diagram” and “Figure 75: Model MU-TAIL03 FTA with TC
Connection Diagram”, Inputs #3 and #5.
• For an activate input configured as an RTD, connect a jumper wire between screws (contacts) A, B, and C.
See “Figure 74: Model MU-TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 FTA with RTD Connection Diagram” and “Figure 76:
Model MU-TAIL03 FTA with RTD Connection Diagram”, Inputs #3, #5, and #7.

17.1.12 Types of thermocouples and extension wires

The types of thermocouples, their extension wires, and the polarity color codes for the United States and Canada
are shown in the following table. Other international standards use different color code schemes. Check with
your wire supplier for the appropriate color code and polarity.
The positive polarity (+) always connects to terminal B, and the negative (-) polarity always connects to
terminal C at the FTA terminal strip. See “Figure 73: Model MU-TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 FTA Connection
Diagram” or “Figure 75: Model MU-TAIL03 FTA with TC Connection Diagram”. The thermocouple's negative
lead is always red.

Table 24: Thermocouple and Thermocouple Extension Wire Polarity Color Codes (U.S. and Canada)

Thermocouple Thermocouple Extension Wire

Type Polarity Color Code Polarity Color Code
B No Standard Established + Gray
- Red
Overall cover Gray
E + Purple + Purple
- Red - Red
Overall cover Brown Overall cover Purple
J + White + White
- Red - Red
Overall cover Brown Overall cover Black
K + Yellow + Yellow
- Red - Red
Overall cover Brown Overall cover Yellow
R No Standard Established + Black
- Red
Overall cover Green
S No Standard Established + Black
- Red
Overall cover Green
T + Blue + Blue
- Red - Red
Overall cover Brown Overall cover Blue

294 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.13 Model MU-TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 low level analog input FTA with thermocouple connection
diagram-non-CE compliant

Figure 73: Model MU-TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 FTA Connection Diagram

295
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.14 Model MU-TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 low level analog input FTA with RTD connection diagram-non-CE
compliant

Figure 74: Model MU-TAIL01/MU-TAIL02 FTA with RTD Connection Diagram

296 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.15 Model MU-TAIL03 low level analog input FTA with thermocouple connection diagram-CE
compliant

Figure 75: Model MU-TAIL03 FTA with TC Connection Diagram

297
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.16 Model MU-TAIL03 low level analog input FTA with RTD connection diagram -CE compliant

Figure 76: Model MU-TAIL03 FTA with RTD Connection Diagram

298 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.17 Model MU-TAIL02 low level analog input FTA assembly layout -non-CE compliant

Figure 77: Model MU-TAIL02 FTA Assembly Layout

299
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.18 Model MU-TAIL03 low level analog input FTA assembly layout -CE compliant

Figure 78: Model MU-TAIL03 FTA Assembly Layout (EMI Cover Removed)

17.1.19 RTD Lead Resistance

RTD temperature error calculations

The temperature error caused by an RTD lead wire resistance and the Intrinsic Safety (IS) barrier resistance
mismatch can be estimated by using the equations shown below.
• TRTD Error PT: 100 ohms = (RA - RC) (1 0C/.385 ohms)
• TRTD Error NI: 120 ohms = (RA - RC) (1 0C/.617 ohms)
• TRTD Error CU: 10 ohms = (RA - RC) (1 0 /.421 ohms)
where T RTD Error is in degrees C and RA and RC are the resistances of the RTD lead connection to the A and C
screws, respectively, in ohms.

RTD temperature error measurements

Following installation, the temperature error caused by the RTD lead wire resistance and the intrinsic safety
(IS). Barrier resistance mismatch can be estimated by using the following equations and the following
procedure.
• TRTD Error PT: 100 ohms = (VAB - VBC) (7300 ohm/volt) (1 0C/.385 ohm)
• TRTD Error NI: 120 ohms = (VAB - VBC) (7300 ohm/volt) (1 0C/.617 ohm)

300 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

• TRTD Error CU: 10 ohms = (VAB - VBC) (7300 ohm/volt) (1 0C/.421 ohm)
RTD Temperature Error Measurement Procedure
1. Connect the RTD to the LLAI FTA using the actual lead wire and the IS Barrier.
2. Short the A, B, and C terminals together at the RTD Sensor.
3. Measure the voltage between A and B (VAB) and the voltage between B and C (VBC) at the LLAI FTA
screw terminals.
4. Disconnect the short installed in Step 2 and connect the RTD properly.

17.1.20 Maximum allowable RTD resistance

The following table is a list of the maximum allowable lead and Intrinsic Safety Barrier resistance for various
types of RTD devices.

Table 25: Maximum Allowable RTD Lead and IS Barrier Resistance

RTD Type Lead Resistance IS Barrier Resistance

Entire Loop Per Leg Entire Loop Per Leg
Pt: 100 ohm DIN char 20 ohms 10 ohms 36 ohms 18 ohms
Pt: 100 ohm JIS char 20 ohms 10 ohms 36 ohms 18 ohms
Ni: 120 ohm Edison type 20 ohms 10 ohms 36 ohms 18 ohms
7 char
Cu: 10 ohm SEER standard char 20 ohms 10 ohms 0 ohms 18 ohms
When connected to an RTD in a Division 1 area, both the lead resistance and the Intrinsic Safety barrier resistance are
allowed simultaneously.

17.1.21 Low Level Analog Input Multiplexer (LLMux) FTAs

Two types of Low Level Analog Input Multiplexer (LLMux) FTAs accept inputs from either Thermocouples
(TC) or Resistivie Temperature Detectors (RTDs). Each FTA accepts up to 16 low level analog inputs. All
LLMux FTAs are a B (12 inch) mounting size.
There are two models of each type of Low Level Analog Input Multiplexer (LLMux) Field Termination
Assemblies. One model is CE compliant, while the other model is not CE compliant. The CE compliant and
non-CE compliant FTAs have unique model numbers. The CE compliant assembly is identified by a part
number tab number that ends in “25” or “75,” as shown in the following table.
A CE compliant version of the model MU-TLPA02 Power Adapter must be used with the CE compliant FTA
models. The CE compliant power adapter assembly is also identified by a part number tab number that ends
in ”25 or “75.”
CE compliant FTAs and power adapters have an FTA connector with a grounded body that accepts the CE
compliant model MU-KFTSxx IOP to FTA cable.

17.1.22 LLMux FTAs and associated hardware

Table 26: LLMux Analog Input Standard FTA Types and Part Numbers

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE CE Compliant

Compliant Part Part Number
Number
MU-TAMR02 LLMux RTD FTA with Compression Terminals, Single IOP 51304477-100 N/A
Interface

301
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE CE Compliant

Compliant Part Part Number
Number
MC-TAMR02 LLMux RTD FTA with Compression Terminals, Single IOP 51304477-150 N/A
Interface-Conformally Coated
MU-TAMR03 LLMux RTD FTA with Compression Terminals, Single IOP N/A 51309218-125
Interface
MC-TAMR03 LLMux RTD FTA with Compression Terminals, Single IOP N/A 51309218-175
Interface-Conformally Coated
MC-TAMR04 LLMux RTD FTA with Compression Terminals, Single IOP N/A 51305907-175
Interface-Conformally Coated
MU-TAMT02 LLMux TC FTA with Local CJR, 51401491-100 51401491-125
Compression Terminals,
Single IOP Interface
MC-TAMT02 LLMux TC FTA with Local CJR, 51401491-150 N/A
Compression Terminals,
Single IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
MU-TAMT03 LLMux TC FTA with Local CJR, N/A 51309223-125
Compression Terminals,
Single IOP Interface
MC-TAMT03 LLMux TC FTA with Local CJR, N/A 51309223-175
Compression Terminals,
Single IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
MC-TAMT04 LLMux TC FTA with Local CJR, N/A 51305890-175
Compression Terminals,
Single IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
MU-TAMT12 LLMux TC FTA with Remote CJR, 51401573-100 N/A
Compression Terminals,
Dual IOP Interface
MC-TAMT12 LLMux TC FTA with Remote CJR, 51401573-150 N/A
Compression Terminals
Dual IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
MU-TAMT13 LLMux TC FTA with Remote CJR, N/A 51309213-125
Compression Terminals,
Dual IOP Interface
MC-TAMT13 LLMux TC FTA with Remote CJR, N/A 51309213-175
Compression Terminals,
Dual IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
MU-TLPA02 Power Adapter 51304467-100 51309204-125
MC-TLPA02 Power adapter-Conformally Coated 51304467-150 51309204-175
Supporting IOPs
MU-PLAM02 LLMux IOP N/A 51304362-100
MC-PLAM02 LLMux IOP-Conformally Coated N/A 51304362-150

302 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.23 LLMux IOP

The model MU-PLAM02 LLMux IOP supports all LLMux FTA models and can be installed in any card file
slot. A single IOP supports up to two FTAs through use of a power adapter, model MU-TLPA02. Any
combination of two TC or RTD LLMux FTAs can be connected to a power adapter, which then connects to a
LLMux IOP as shown in the following figure. A single TC or RTD LLMux FTA may also be connected.

17.1.24 IOP to Power Adapter Cabling

When both the IOP and Power Adapter are installed in the same cabinet or cabinet complex (internal), the IOP
to Power Adapter connection is made by using a model MU KFTAxx cable (the suffix "xx" in the model
number represents the length of the cable in meters) in 12 lengths, up to 50 meters (164 feet) in length, as
illustrated in the following figure.
When the Power Adapter is installed external to the cabinet in which the IOP is installed, the IOP to Power
Adapter connection must be made by using a model MU KFTSxx cable in 12 lengths, up to 50 meters (164 feet)
in length, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 79: LLMux Interconnections

17.1.25 Non-CE Compliant applications of CE Compliant hardware

CE Compliant FTAs (models MU-TAMT03, MU-TAMT13, and MU-TAMR03) can be used for non-CE
Compliant applications. They are compatible with both the non-CE Compliant version (51304467-100) and CE
Compliant version (51309204-125) of the model MU-TLPA02 Power Adapter.

303
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

The CE Compliant FTA models have a 6-pin Power Adapter interface connector (J6), while non-CE Compliant
FTA models use 4-pin connector.

17.1.26 Power Adapter mounting location

The model MU-TLPA02 power adapter is the same size as an A-size (6-inch) FTA and can be installed on a
standard FTA mounting channel. The following figure illustrates the assembly layout of the Power Adapter.

Figure 80: Model MU-TLPA02 Power Adapter Layout

17.1.27 Power Adapter to FTA cabling

When the LLMux FTA is installed in the same cabinet, or cabinet complex, as the Power Adapter FTA, a
51304465-xxx cable (“xxx” represents five sizes - 30, 66, 100, 200, and 300 centimeters) must be used for the
interconnection. The cabling applies for both CE Compliant and non-CE Compliant applications. Refer to the
following figure for an example of CE Compliant applications.
The following table lists the 51304465-xxx cable lengths that are available and their part numbers. The cable is
not to be used for external cabinet wiring. Use the model MU-KLXxxx cable for external cabinet wiring.

Table 27: LLMux to Power Adapter Internal Cabinet Cable-51304465

Part Number Length (Centimeters)

51304465-100 30
51304465-200 66
51304465-300 100
51304465-400 200
51304465-500 300

When an LLMux FTA is not installed in the same cabinet, or cabinet complex, as the Power Adapter and up to
305 meters (1000 feet) from the Power Adapter, a model MU-KLXxxx cable (“xxx” represents three sizes, 76,
152, and 305 meters, for external cabinet installation) is used for the interconnection.

304 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.28 MU-KLXxxx cable shield grounding

The model MU-KLXxxx cable has four wires with a single-braided shield. The shield must be grounded only at
the Power Adapter end of the cable. The connections are made by using the compression terminals in the 6-pin
connector on the Power Adapter and the 4-pin or 6-pin connector on the FTA end of the cable. This installation
is not CE Compliant.
For a CE Compliant installation of the MU-KLXxxx cable, the shield must be connected to ground at both the
Power Adapter and FTA ends of the cable. The connections are made by using the compression terminals in the
6-pin connector at both the Power Adapter and FTA ends of the cable as illustrated in the second figure below.

17.1.29 Power Adapter to FTA cable specifications

The 51304465-xxx (used for internal cabinet cabling) and model MU-KLXxxx (used for external cabinet
cabling) have the following specifications.

Specification Power Adapter to FTA Cable Type

51304465-xxx MU-KLXxxx
Manufacturer Type Belden 9406 Belden 83654
Cable Configuration Shielded Double Pair Shielded Double Pair (Teflon jacket)
Flame Resistance Conformity CSA FT4 CSA FT4/FT6 and UL910
CSA Type CMG CMP
NEC Type CMG CMP
Temperature Rating -70 to +200 degrees C

305
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Figure 81: CE Compliant Power Adapter to LLMux FTA Internal Cabinet Cabling for MU/MC-TAMT03/13 or MU/MC-TAMR03 FTA

306 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Figure 82: CE Compliant Power Adapter to LLMux FTA External Cabinet Cabling for MU/MC-TAMT03/13 or MU/MC-TAMR03 FTA

17.1.30 Power Adapter configuration

Because the Power Adapter has two connection terminals, identified as Unit 0 and Unit 1, the LLMux FTA
must be configured for the selected connection to the Power Adapter by a jumper on the FTA's daughter board
as shown in the following figure. Select either Unit 0 or Unit 1 with the jumper on the daughter board. The Unit
0 FTA is channels 1 through 16, while the Unit 1 FTA is channels 17 through 32.

307
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Figure 83: LLMux FTA Address Selection

17.1.31 Thermocouple (TC) LLMux FTAs

Up to 16 thermocouples (TCs) can be connected to each Thermocouple (TC) LLMux FTA. Connection
diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring and assembly layout drawings that show the physical layout of the
TC LLMux FTAs are given in the following figures listed in the following table.

Table 28: TC LLMux FTA Connection Drawings

Thermocouple LLMux Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

FTA Model “Model MU-TAMT02 thermocouple “Model MU-TAMT02 thermocouple
LLMux FTA with local CJR connection LLMux FTA assembly layout” on
diagram” on page 310 page 314
“Model MU-TAMT03 thermocouple “Model MU-TAMT03 thermocouple
LLMux FTA with local CJR connection LLMux FTA assembly layout” on
diagram” on page 311 page 315
“Model MU-TAMT12 thermocouple “Model MU-TAMT12 thermocouple
LLMux FTA with remote CJR LLMux FTA assembly layout” on
connection diagram” on page 312 page 316
“Model MU-TAMT13 thermocouple “Model MU-TAMT13 thermocouple
LLMux FTA with remote CJR LLMux FTA assembly layout” on
connection diagram” on page 313 page 317

308 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Cold Junction Reference

The model MU-TAMT02 and MU-TAMT03 TC LLMux FTAs have a local Cold Junction Reference (CJR) on
the assembly, while the model MU-TAMT12 and MU-TAMT13 FTAs provide terminal connections for a
remote CJR sensor, Honeywell part number 51304589-100, that can be located remotely up to 50 meters (150
feet) from the FTA, by using model MU-KRCJ00 shielded 3-conductor 1 mm2 (18 AWG) copper wire.

CE Compliance
“Figure 88: Remote CJR Installation” illustrates remote CJR installation requirements. Model MU-KRCJ00
cable must be used between the remote CJR sensor and the model MU-TAMT13 or MC-TAMT13 FTA. Its
length is restricted to 50 meters (164 feet). The cable shield must be connected to Safety Ground at both ends of
the cable.
All remote terminations and the remote CJR sensor assembly must be located in the same cabinet. “Figure 86:
Model MU-TAMT12 FTA with Remote CJR Connection Diagram” and “Figure 87: Model MU-TAMT13 FTA
with Remote CJR Connection Diagram” illustrate the remote CJR sensor and FTA connections.
The model MU-KRCJ00 cable has the following specifications:
• Manufacturer Type-Belden model 83653, or equivalent
Conductors-Three 1.0 mm2 (18 AWG) conductors
• Insulation and Jacket-Teflon© conductor insulation and jacket
• Shielding-Braid over foil
• CSA Type-PCC FT 4 FT 6
• NEC Type-CMP
• Use-Air plenum

309
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.32 Model MU-TAMT02 thermocouple LLMux FTA with local CJR connection diagram

Figure 84: Model MU-TAMT02 FTA with Local CJR Connection Diagram

310 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.33 Model MU-TAMT03 thermocouple LLMux FTA with local CJR connection diagram

Figure 85: Model MU-TAMT03 FTA with Local CJR Connection Diagram

311
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.34 Model MU-TAMT12 thermocouple LLMux FTA with remote CJR connection diagram

Figure 86: Model MU-TAMT12 FTA with Remote CJR Connection Diagram

312 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.35 Model MU-TAMT13 thermocouple LLMux FTA with remote CJR connection diagram

Figure 87: Model MU-TAMT13 FTA with Remote CJR Connection Diagram

313
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.36 Model MU-TAMT02 thermocouple LLMux FTA assembly layout

314 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.37 Model MU-TAMT03 thermocouple LLMux FTA assembly layout

315
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.38 Model MU-TAMT12 thermocouple LLMux FTA assembly layout

316 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.39 Model MU-TAMT13 thermocouple LLMux FTA assembly layout

317
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.40 Remote CJR installation

Figure 88: Remote CJR Installation

17.1.41 Resistive Temperature Device (RTD) LLMux FTAs

Up to 16 Resistive Temperature Devices (RTDs) can be connected to each Resistive Temperature Device (RTD)
LLMux FTA. Connection diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring and assembly layout drawings that show
the physical layout of the RTD LLMux FTAs are given in the following figures listed in the following figure.

Table 29: RTD LLMux FTA Connection Drawings

RTD LLMux Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

FTA Model “Model MU-TAMR02 RTD LLMux “Model MU-TAMR02 RTD LLMux
FTA connection diagram” on page 319 FTA assembly layout” on page 321
“Model MU-TAMR03 and MC- “Model MU-TAMR03 and MC-
TAMR04 RTD LLMux FTA TAMR04 RTD LLMux FTA assembly
connection diagram” on page 320 layout” on page 322
“Model MU-TAMR03 and MC- “Model MU-TAMR03 and MC-
TAMR04 RTD LLMux FTA TAMR04 RTD LLMux FTA assembly
connection diagram” on page 320 layout” on page 322

318 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

CAUTION
To reduce the negative affect of ground potential differences, the following cable usage and ground reference
selection rules should be considered for the model MU-TAMR02 RTD LLMux FTA only. These rules do not
apply for the model MU-TAMR03 RTD LLMux FTA.
• Use a 3-wire cable. Do not share a conductor in a cable between two RTDs.
• Use a single point of sensor ground reference, or reference to a voltage within the control system common-
mode specifications.
• Terminate the cable shield at only one end to a potential that is close to the potential of the RTD.
• Try to select a practical route for the RTD cable.

17.1.42 Open wire detection

LLMUX FTAs provide three wire terminations for each sensor. Open wire detection for LLMUX RTDs is
limited in that the FTA will detect an open wire between the “A” and “C” leads, but not the “B” lead. See
connection diagrams for details.

17.1.43 CE Compliance for field wiring

The model MU-TAMR03 RTD LLMux FTA is CE Compliant and requires shielded input wiring with the cable
shield connected to Safety Ground at both ends of the cable.

17.1.44 Model MU-TAMR02 RTD LLMux FTA connection diagram

319
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.45 Model MU-TAMR03 and MC-TAMR04 RTD LLMux FTA connection diagram

320 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.46 Model MU-TAMR02 RTD LLMux FTA assembly layout

321
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.47 Model MU-TAMR03 and MC-TAMR04 RTD LLMux FTA assembly layout

17.1.48 Remote Hardened Multiplexer (RHMUX) FTA

One or two Remote Hardended MUX (RHMUX) Thermocouple (TC) FTAs can be connected to either an
Intrinsically Safe (IS) Power Adapter or a Non-Incendive (NI) Power Adapter. The Power Adapter also
connects to a model MU/MC-PRHM01 RHMUX IOP as illustrated in “Figure 89: RHMUX Intrinsically Safe
Configuration Interconnections” and “Figure 90: RHMUX Nonincendive Configuration Interconnections”.
The RHMUX IS Power Adapter and the NI Power Adapter are functionally the same. Both models of the Power
Adapter are Galvanically Isolated from the FTA.
The RHMUX FTA supports 0 to 100-millivolt inputs and thermocouple inputs. RTD inputs are not supported.
The model MU/MC-PRHM01 IOP supports 32 inputs from two RHMUX FTAs.
All the assemblies that constitute the Remote Hardened Multiplexer (RHMUX) are CE Compliant. However,
the installation is CE Compliant only when the recommended cabling method is used and properly installed.

17.1.49 Intrinsic Safety

The RHMUX is approved as Intrinsically Safe and Nonincendive for use in hazardous locations. However, the
RHMUX assemblies can also be used in areas that are classified as nonhazardous.
The approvals for the RHMUX subsystem are valid only if the appropriate Honeywell control drawing is
followed. Drawing 51204105 covers Intrinsically Safe installations and drawing 51204185 covers
Nonincendive installations.

322 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.50 RHMUX assemblies

The RHMUX assembly models with their part numbers are listed in the following table

Table 30: Remote Hardened Multiplexer FTA, Power Adapter and IOP Models

Model No. Asembly Description CE Compliant Part Number

MC-GRMT01 RHMUX TC FTA with Local CJR Screw Terminals - 51404106-175
Conformally Coated
MU-GRPA01 Intrinsically Safe RHMUX Power Adapter 51304724-125
MC-GRPA01 Intrinsically Safe RHMUX Power Adapter 51304724-175
Conformally Coated
MU-TRPA01 Non-Incendive RHMUX Power Adapter 51304722-125
MC-TRPA01 Non-Incendive RHMUX Power Adapter 51304722-175
Conformally Coated
Supporting IOPs
MU-PRHM01 RHMUX IOP 51404109-125
MC-PRHM01 RHMUX IOP-Conformally Coated 51404109-175
RHMUX FTA Enclosures
MU-CMSS03 NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Enclosure 51309250-100
(35.6 cm wide x 40.7 cm high x 15.2 cm deep)
MU-CMSC03 NEMA 4X Painted Carbon Steel Enclosure 51309250-200
(35.6 cm wide x 40.7 cm high x 15.2 cm deep)

The RHMUX assemblies are compatible only with each other. The assemblies are not compatible with the
LLMux assemblies.

17.1.51 RHMUX Power Adapter mounting

The RHMUX Power Adapter must be mounted in the same cabinet, or cabinet complex, as the IOP.
The model MU/MC-GRPA01 Intrinsically Safe RHMUX Power Adapter is the same size as an A-size (6-inch)
FTA and can be installed on a standard FTA mounting channel. The assembly layout of the model MU/MC-
GRPA01 is shown in “Figure 91: Model MU/MC-GRPA01 RHMUX IS Power Adapter Assembly Layout”.
The model MU/MC-TRPA01 Non-Incendive RHMUX Power Adapter is the same size as a B-size (12-inch)
FTA and can be installed on a standard FTA mounting channel. The assembly layout of the model MU/MC-
TRPA01 is shown in “Figure 92: Model MU/MC-TRPA01 RHMUX NI Power Adapter Assembly Layout”.

17.1.52 RHMUX FTA mounting

The RHMUX FTA dimensions of approximately 13 inches by 13 inches cannot be accommodated by an FTA
mounting channel in a control cabinet and is not intended to be mounted in a control cabinet. “Figure 93: Model
MC-GRMT01 RHMUX Thermocouple FTA Assembly Layout” illustrates the assembly layout of the FTA.
The RHMUX FTA can be installed in areas where incendive or explosive material exist when approved by local
authorities. The RHMUX agency approvals are valid only when the FTA is mounted in a 35.6 W x 40.7 H x
15.2 D-centimeter (14 W x 16 H x 6 D-inch) model MU-CMSC03 NEMA 4 or model MU-CMSS03 NEMA 4X
sealed enclosure that are offered by Honeywell. “Figure 94: Model MU-CMSC03/MU-CMSS03 Enclosure
Illustration” is an illustration of the enclosure.

323
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

The model MU-CMSS03 enclosure is Approved for Division 1 and Division 2, Class I, II, and III locations. The
model MU-CMSC03 enclosure is Approved for Division 1 and Division 2, Class I locations only. FM, CSA,
and KEMA (CENELEC) approvals are not valid for other enclosures.

17.1.53 Power Adapter to remote FTA cable length

The maximum acceptable cable length between the Power Adapter and the RHMUX FTA depends primarily
upon the type of cable that is used. For Division 1, Class I, Group A and B hazardous locations, there is an
additional length restriction.
The model “Model MU-KLXxxx cable specifications” on page 330 or MU-KLO305 cable can be used in any
location for runs of up to 500 meters (1640 feet) between the Power Adapter and the FTA, as long as the cable
does not get wet. If the cable is exposed to precipitation, the model “Model MU-KLO305 cable specifications”
on page 331 cable must be used.
For Division 1, Class I, Group A and B hazardous locations, the model MU-KLO305 cable is used for runs of
up to 1400 meters (4590 feet) between the Power Adapter and the FTA. For all other locations, the model MU-
KLO305 cable is used for runs of up to 2000 meters (6560 feet).

17.1.54 Intrinsically Safe RHMUX application

“Figure 89: RHMUX Intrinsically Safe Configuration Interconnections” illustrates an Intrinsically Safe
application for the RHMUX assemblies. For valid agency Approvals, the installation must comply with
Honeywell control drawing 51204105.

Figure 89: RHMUX Intrinsically Safe Configuration Interconnections

324 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.55 Nonincendive RHMUX application

“Figure 90: RHMUX Nonincendive Configuration Interconnections” illustrates a Nonincendive application for
the RHMUX assemblies. For valid agency Approvals, the installation must comply with Honeywell control
drawing 51204185.

Figure 90: RHMUX Nonincendive Configuration Interconnections

17.1.56 Model MU/MC-GRPA01 assembly layout

“Figure 91: Model MU/MC-GRPA01 RHMUX IS Power Adapter Assembly Layout” illustrates the assembly
layout of the model MU/MC-GRPA01 RHMUX Intrinsically Safe Power Adapter. The connector (J2 or J3) at
the top of each module (M1 or M2) provides the interface to one RHMUX thermocouple FTA.

325
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Figure 91: Model MU/MC-GRPA01 RHMUX IS Power Adapter Assembly Layout

17.1.57 Model MU/MC-TRPA01 assembly layout

“Figure 92: Model MU/MC-TRPA01 RHMUX NI Power Adapter Assembly Layout” illustrates the assembly
layout of the model MU/MC-TRPA01 RHMUX Non-Incendive Power Adapter. Mating connectors for TB1 and
TB2 (Honeywell part number 51195776-100) are provided with the Power Adapter.

326 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Figure 92: Model MU/MC-TRPA01 RHMUX NI Power Adapter Assembly Layout

17.1.58 Model MC-GRMT01 assembly layout

“Figure 93: Model MC-GRMT01 RHMUX Thermocouple FTA Assembly Layout” illustrates the assembly
layout of the model MC-GRMT01 RHMUX Thermocouple FTA.

327
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Figure 93: Model MC-GRMT01 RHMUX Thermocouple FTA Assembly Layout

17.1.59 RHMUX FTA enclosure

“Figure 94: Model MU-CMSC03/MU-CMSS03 Enclosure Illustration” is an illustration of the RHMUX FTA
installed in the model MU-CMSC03 (NEMA 4)/MU-CMSS03 (NEMA 4X) enclosure.

328 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Figure 94: Model MU-CMSC03/MU-CMSS03 Enclosure Illustration

17.1.60 IOP to Power Adapter Cabling

Non-CE Compliant IOP to Power Adapter cabling application - For a non-CE Compliant application, the
IOP to Power Adapter connection can be made by using a model MU-KFTAxx cable (the suffix “xx” in the
model number represents the length of the cable in meters) in 12 lengths, up to 50 meters (164 feet) in length, as
illustrated in “Figure 89: RHMUX Intrinsically Safe Configuration Interconnections” or “Figure 90: RHMUX
Nonincendive Configuration Interconnections”.
CE Compliant IOP to Power Adapter cabling application - For a CE Compliant application, the IOP to
Power Adapter connection can be made by using a model MU-KFTSxx cable (the suffix “xx” in the model
number represents the length of the cable in meters) in 12 lengths, up to 50 meters (164 feet) in length, as shown
in “Figure 89: RHMUX Intrinsically Safe Configuration Interconnections” or “Figure 90: RHMUX
Nonincendive Configuration Interconnections”.
For the available cable part numbers, see Spare Parts in Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide.

17.1.61 Power Adapter to RHMUX FTA Cabling

Two types of cables are available for the connection between the Power Adapter to the FTA. Both types of
cables consist of four color-coded conductors in a single-twist configuration with a foil shield. A single drain
wire is provided for the shield.
The cables differ in the gauge of the conductor, the jacket material, and the application of the cable. Typical
applications for the cables are illustrated in “Figure 95: Typical RHMUX Power Adapter to FTA Cable
Applications”.

329
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Figure 95: Typical RHMUX Power Adapter to FTA Cable Applications

17.1.62 Indoor environment FTA to Power Adapter cabling

When the Power Adapter to RHMUX FTA cable will be less than 500 meters in length and will be installed
indoors or in conduit without the threat of moisture, the model MU-KLXxxx cable (“xxx” represents three
lengths - 76, 152, and 305 meters) with stripped wire ends can be used for the interconnection. Custom lengths
of the cable can also be ordered with the 51192139-104 assembly number.
The cable can be used for non-CE Compliant, CE Compliant, Intrinsically Safe, Nonincendive, and
nonhazardous applications.
The cable is Belden type 83654, which is a four-conductor, single-twist, shielded cable with a Teflon jacket.
Each conductor is 18 gauge. The outside diameter of the cable is 5.26 millimeters (0.207 inches) with a
minimum bend radius of 57 millimeters (2.25 inches). For the available cable part numbers, see Spare Parts in
Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide.

17.1.63 Model MU-KLXxxx cable specifications

The model MU-KLXxxx cable has the following specifications.

Specification Description
Manufacturer Type Belden 83654
Cable Configuration Shielded 18-gauge four-conductor single twist (TEFLON
jacket)
Flame Resistance Conformity CSA FT4/FT6 and UL910
CSA Type CMP
NEC Type CMP
Temperature Rating -70 0C to +2000C

17.1.64 Emission control for CE Compliant applications

For CE Compliant applications, a ferrite shield is required to control emissions. The required device is a clamp-
on shield, Honeywell part number 51309261-100, and is included in the hardware kit that is provided with the
Honeywell-recommended enclosure. The shield must be clamped on the cable inside the enclosure. The shield
does not affect RHMUX operation and can be omitted for non-CE Compliant applications.

330 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.65 Cable shield grounding for non CE Compliant or CE Compliant

For a non-CE Compliant or CE Compliant applications, the shield of the cable between the Power Adapter and
FTA must be connected to Shield Ground (S) at both ends of the cable. The wire and shield connections are
made by using the compression terminals in a 6 terminal connector on the Power Adapter and the screw
terminals on the FTA as illustrated in the section “IS Power Adapter to FTA cabling” on page 332.
Both installations are for non-CE Compliant or CE Compliant applications.

17.1.66 Outdoor environment Power Adapter to FTA cabling

When the Power Adapter to RHMUX FTA cable is installed outdoors with the threat of moisture, or a cable
length greater than 500 meters is required, model MU-KLO305 cable must be used for the interconnection.
Custom lengths of the cable can also be ordered with the 51197597-100 assembly number, or directly from
Belden, the manufacturer.
The cable can be used for non-CE Compliant, CE Compliant, Intrinsically Safe, Nonincendive, and
nonhazardous applications.
The cable is Belden type YC41926, which is a four-conductor, shielded cable, with an armored jacket. Each
conductor is 12 gauge. The outside diameter of the cable is 15.7 millimeters (0.62 inches) with a minimum bend
radius of 191 millimeters (7.5 inches).
The cable will tolerate moisture from normal precipitation, but the cable must not be submerged and is not
suitable for direct burial in this application.
The cable's 12-gauge conductors will not fit the terminals on the Power Adapter. An intermediate terminal
block, such as a Weidmuller DIN-rail terminal block, is required. No intermediate termination is required for the
RHMUX FTA when crimp terminals are used. For the cable part numbers, see Spare Parts in Troubleshooting
and Maintenance Guide.

17.1.67 Model MU-KLO305 cable specifications

The model “Isolation of outdoor cable shield from armor cladding” on page 333 cable has the following
specifications.

Specification Description
Manufacturer Type Belden YC41926
Cable Configuration Shielded 12-gauge four-conductor single twist (armored
jacket)
CE Compliant
PLTC or ITC, 300 volts
Vertical Tray Flame Test UL1581/IEEE383
Length 305 meters (1000 feet)

17.1.68 Emission control for CE Compliant applications

For CE Compliant applications, six ferrite beads are required to control emissions. The required beads are
Honeywell part number 51192613-101 and are included in the hardware kit that is provided with the Honeywell
recommended enclosure. The beads must be slipped over the cable inside the enclosure. Place nylon cable ties
at each end of the bead-stack to hold the beads in place. The beads do not affect RHMUX operation and can be
omitted for non-CE Compliant applications.

331
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.69 IS Power Adapter to FTA cabling

“Figure 96: RHMUX IS Power Adapter to FTA Cabling” illustrates cabling between the Intrinsically Safe
Power Adapter and the FTA.

Figure 96: RHMUX IS Power Adapter to FTA Cabling

17.1.70 Cable shield grounding for non CE Compliant or CE Compliant

For a non-CE Compliant or CE Compliant applications, the shield of the cable between the Power Adapter and
FTA must be connected to Shield Ground (S) at both ends of the cable. The wire and shield connections are
made by using the compression terminals in a 6 terminal connector on the Power Adapter and the screw
terminals on the FTA as illustrated in the section “IS Power Adapter to FTA cabling” on page 332.
Both installations are for non-CE Compliant or CE Compliant applications.

17.1.71 NI Power Adapter to FTA cabling

“Figure 97: RHMUX NI Power Adapter to FTA Cabling” illustrates cabling between the Non-Incendive Power
Adapter and the FTA.

332 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Figure 97: RHMUX NI Power Adapter to FTA Cabling

17.1.72 Isolation of outdoor cable shield from armor cladding

The model MU-KLO305 outdoor cable has a foil shield and waterproof aluminum cladding. Care must be taken
to prevent the shield from shorting to the cladding or to Safety Ground. Refer to “Figure 98: Model MU-
KLO305 Cable Construction”.

Figure 98: Model MU-KLO305 Cable Construction

333
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.73 RHMUX Thermocouple (TC) FTA Field Wiring

Up to 16 thermocouples (TCs) can be connected to the Thermocouple (TC) RHMUX FTA. The FTA has a local
Cold Junction Reference (CJR) on the assembly. “Figure 93: Model MC-GRMT01 RHMUX Thermocouple
FTA Assembly Layout” illustrates the assembly layout of the model MC-GRMT01 RHMUX TC FTA.

17.1.74 Model MC-GRMT01 connection diagram

“Figure 99: Model MC-GRMT01 RHMUX Thermocouple FTA Connection Diagram”is a connection diagram
for the model MC-GRMT01 RHMUX TC FTA.

Figure 99: Model MC-GRMT01 RHMUX Thermocouple FTA Connection Diagram

17.1.75 High Level Analog Input (HLAI) FTAs

The High Level Analog Input (HLAI) FTA accepts up to 16 high level analog inputs. The inputs are
configurable as single-ended or differential in relation to Master Reference Ground (MRG). The FTA is also
used to interface Smart Transmitter devices.
In most cases, there are two models of each style of High Level Analog Input (HLAI) Field Termination
Assemblies, a CE Compliant and non-CE Compliant model. The model MU-TAIH22, MU-TAIH23, and MU-
TAIH62 Enhanced Power HLAI FTAs are the exception. Generally, CE Compliant assemblies are identified by
a part number tab number that ends in “25” or “75.” CE Compliant and non-CE Compliant FTAs have unique
model numbers.

334 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

The CE Compliant HLAI FTA models do not support Smart Transmitter devices. CE Compliant STI FTAs that
do support Smart Transmitter devices are described in “Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) FTA Wiring” on
page 370.
CE Compliant FTAs have an FTA connector with a grounded body that interfaces with the CE Compliant model
MU-KFTSxx IOP to FTA cable. The CE Compliant and non-CE Compliant models with their part numbers are
listed in the following table.
Shielded field wiring is not required for CE Compliance. Shielded IOP to FTA cables are required. Source
transmitters may require shielded wiring.

Table 31: High Level Analog Input FTAs and IOPs

Model No FTA Description Non-CE Compliant Part CE Compliant Part Number

Number
MU-TAIH01 HLAI/STI FTA with 51303956-100 N/A
Compression Terminals
Single IOP Interface
MU-TAIH02 HLAI/STI FTA with 51304453-100 N/A
Compression Terminals
Single IOP Interface
MC-TAIH02 HLAI/STI FTA with 51304453-150 N/A
Compression Terminals
Single IOP Interface-
Conformally Coated
MU-TAIH03 HLAI FTA with N/A 51309136-125
Compression Terminals
Single IOP Interface
MC-TAIH03 HLAI FTA with N/A 51309136-175
Compression Terminals
Single IOP Interface-
Conformally Coated
MU-TAIH04 HART-Compatible HLAI N/A 51305900- 125
FTA with Compression
Terminals Single IOP
Interface (See Note.)
MC-TAIH04 HART-Compatible HLAI N/A 51305900-175
FTA with Compression
Terminals Single IOP
Interface-Conformally
Coated (See Note.)
MU-TAIH12 HLAI/STI FTA with 51304337-100 N/A
Compression Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface
MC-TAIH12 HLAI/STI FTA with 51304337-150 N/A
Compression Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface-
Conformally Coated
MU-TAIH13 HLAI FTA with N/A 51309138-125
Compression Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface
MC-TAIH13 HLAI FTA with N/A 51309138-175
Compression Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface-
Conformally Coated

335
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Model No FTA Description Non-CE Compliant Part CE Compliant Part Number

Number
MU-TAIH14 HART-Compatible HLAI 51305887-100 N/A
FTA with Compression
Terminals Redundant IOP
Interface (See Note.)
MC-TAIH14 HART-Compatible HLAI 51305887-150 N/A
FTA with Compression
Terminals Redundant IOP
Interface-Conformally
Coated (See Note.)
MU-TAIH15 HART-Compatible HLAI N/A 51305863-125
FTA with Compression
Terminals Redundant IOP
Interface (See Note.)
MC-TAIH15 HART-Compatible HLAI N/A 51305863-175
FTA with Compression
Terminals Redundant IOP
Interface-Conformally
Coated (See Note.)
MU-TAIH22 Enhanced Power HLAI/STI 80366195-100 N/A
FTA with Compression
Terminals Redundant IOP
Interface
MC-TAIH22 Enhanced Power HLAI/STI 80366195-150 N/A
FTA with Compression
Terminals Redundant IOP
Interface-Conformally
Coated
MU-TAIH23 Enhanced Power HLAI FTA N/A 80366195-125
with Compression Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface
MC-TAIH23 Enhanced Power HLAI FTA N/A 80366195-175
with Compression Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface-
Conformally Coated
MU-TAIH52 HLAI/STI FTA with Screw 51304337-200 N/A
Terminals Redundant IOP
Interface
MC-TAIH52 HLAI/STI FTA with Screw 51304337-250 N/A
Terminals Redundant IOP
Interface-Conformally
Coated
MU-TAIH53 HLAI FTA with Screw N/A 51309138-225
Terminals Redundant IOP
Interface
MC-TAIH53 HLAI FTA with Screw N/A 51309138-275
Terminals Redundant IOP
Interface-Conformally
Coated
MU-TAIH54 HART-Compatible HLAI N/A 51305863-225
FTA with Screw Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface
(See Note.)

336 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Model No FTA Description Non-CE Compliant Part CE Compliant Part Number

Number
MC-TAIH54 HART-Compatible HLAI N/A 51305863-275
FTA with Screw Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface-
Conformally Coated (See
Note.)
MU-TAIH62 Enhanced Power HLAI/STI 80366192-100 N/A
FTA with Screw Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface
MC-TAIH62 Enhanced Power HLAI/STI 80366192-150 N/A
FTA with Screw Terminals
Redundant IOP Interface-
Conformally Coated
Supporting IOPs
MU-PAIH02 HLAI IOP 51304489-100 N/A
MC-PAIH02 HLAI IOP-Conformally 51304489-150 /A
Coated
MU-PAIH03 HLAI IOP N/A 51304754-100
MC-PAIH03 HLAI IOP-Conformally N/A 51304754-150
Coated
MC-PHAI01 HLAIHART IOP - N/A 51403479-150
Conformally Coated
MU-PSTX02 STI IOP 51304516-100 N/A
MC-PSTX02 STI IOP-Conformally 51304516-150 N/A
Coated
MU-PSTX03 STI_MV IOP N/A 51304516-200
MC-PSTX03 STI_MV IOP-Conformally N/A 51304516-250
Coated
Note: HART compatible FTAs, models MC/MU-TAIH04, MC/MU-TAIH14, MC/MU-TAIH15 and MC/MU-TAIH54 are
suitable for use with the standard IOP, however the FTAs have not been ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1978 surge tested with the
standard (non-HART) HLAI IOP.

17.1.76 HLAI IOP compatibility and redundancy

The HLAI IOPs can be installed in any IOP card file slot. The model MU-PAIH03 HLAI IOP supports only the
model MU-TAIH03, MU-TAIH13, and MU-TAIH53 HLAI FTAs.
The model MU-PHAI01 HLAIHART IOP supports only models MU-TAIH14, MU-TAIH15, and MU-TAIH54
HART-compatible FTAs.
The model MU-PAIH02 HLAI IOP supports all other HLAI FTA models.
The model MU-TAIH01, MU-TAIH02 and MU-TAIH03 FTAs do not support redundant IOPs. All other FTA
models support IOP redundancy.
Connection diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring and assembly layout drawings that show the physical
layout of the HLAI FTAs are given in the following figures listed in the following table.

Table 32: HLAI FTA Connection Drawings

High Level Analog Input Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

FTA Model “Model MU-TAIH01 high level analog input
FTA connection diagram” on page 341

337
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

High Level Analog Input Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

“Model MU-TAIH02 high level analog input “Model MU-TAIH02 high level analog
FTA connection diagram” on page 342 input FTA assembly layout” on page 354
“Model MU-TAIH03 high level analog input “Model MU-TAIH03 high level analog
FTA connection diagram” on page 343 input FTA assembly layout” on page 355
“Model MU-TAIH04 HART-compatible “Model MU-TAIH12 high level analog
HLAI FTA assembly and connection drawing” input FTA connection diagram” on
on page 344 page 345
“Model MU-TAIH13 high level analog input “Model MU-TAIH04 HART-compatible
FTA connection diagram” on page 346 HLAI FTA assembly and connection
drawing” on page 344
“Model MU-TAIH14/15 HART-compatible “Model MU-TAIH12 high level analog
HLAI FTA assembly and connection drawing” input FTA assembly layout” on page 355
on page 347
“Model MU-TAIH14/15 HART-compatible “Model MU-TAIH13 high level analog
HLAI FTA assembly and connection drawing” input FTA assembly layout” on page 356
on page 347
“Model MU-TAIH14/15 HART-compatible “Model MU-TAIH14/15 HART-
HLAI FTA assembly and connection drawing” compatible HLAI FTA assembly and
on page 347 connection drawing” on page 347
“Model MU-TAIH23 enhanced power HLAI “Model MU-TAIH14/15 HART-
FTA connection diagram” on page 349 compatible HLAI FTA assembly and
connection drawing” on page 347
“Model MU-TAIH52 high level analog input “Model MU-TAIH22 enhanced power
FTA connection diagram” on page 350 high level analog input FTA assembly
layout” on page 357
“Model MU-TAIH52 high level analog input “Model MU-TAIH23 enhanced power
FTA assembly layout” on page 359 high level analog input FTA assembly
layout” on page 358
“Model MU-TAIH53 high level analog input “Model MU-TAIH53 high level analog
FTA connection diagram” on page 351 input FTA assembly layout” on page 360
“Model MU-TAIH54 HART-compatible “Model MU-TAIH54 HART-compatible
HLAI FTA assembly and connection drawing” HLAI FTA assembly and connection
on page 352 drawing” on page 352
“Model MU-TAIH62 enhanced power HLAI “Model MU-TAIH62 enhanced power
FTA connection diagram” on page 353 high level analog input FTA assembly
layout” on page 361

17.1.77 Smart Transmitter devices support

The CE Compliant model MU-TAIH03, MU-TAIH13, and MU-TAIH53 HLAI FTAs do not support Smart
Transmitter devices. Use the model MU-TSTX03, MU-TSTX13, or MU-TSTX53 Smart Transmitter Interface
FTAs, which are described in “Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) FTA Wiring” on page 370.

17.1.78 Model MU-TAIH22/23/62 FTAs

The model MU-TAIH23 Enhanced Power HLAI FTAs must not be used for a Smart Transmitter device
application; however, the model MU-TAIH22 and MU-TAIH62 FTAs can be used for a Smart Transmitter
device application.

338 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Connection diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring for smart transmitter interface applications and assembly
layout drawings that show the physical layout of the HLAI FTAs are given in the following figures listed in
Table 14.

Table 33: HLAI FTA Connection Drawings for STI Applications

High Level Analog Input STI Applicatons Connection Diagram

FTA Model “About This Document”*
“Model MU-TAIH02 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications
connection diagram” on page 366*
“Model MU-TAIH12 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications
connection diagram” on page 367
“Model MU-TAIH22 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications
connection diagram” on page 368
“Model MU-TAIH52 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications
connection diagram” on page 369
“Model MU-TAIH62 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications
connection diagram” on page 370
*These FTAs support a single nonredundant STI or STI_MV IOP only. All other FTAs support both nonredundant and
redundant IOP configurations.

17.1.79 Two-wire 4-20 mA transmitters

Two-wire 4-20 mA transmitters connect directly to the FTA because a 250-ohm resistor is provided on the FTA
at each input. Transmitters with a 10-50 mA output require adding a resistor to the field terminals to
complement the 250-ohm resistor already in place. Alternately, for a 1-5 volt input, remove the 250-ohm and the
zero-ohm resistors on the receiving channel. See “Figure 100: Model MU-TAIH01 FTA Connection Diagram”
through “Figure 104: Model MU-TAIH13 FTA Connection Diagram”, “Figure 107: Model MU-TAIH52 FTA
Connection Diagram” and “Figure 108: Model MU-TAIH53 FTA Connection Diagram”. This places the
channel in a high impedance differential input mode to prevent loading errors for the signal source.

17.1.80 Current limiting resistors

The 145-ohm (180-ohm for the model MU-TAIH01 FTA) current-limiting resistors for transmitter power at the
input terminals usually allow the use of a Power Limited Tray cable for the installation. Check the electrical
code.

17.1.81 Zener barriers

The FTAs cannot be used to provide transmitter power through Zener barriers because the FTAs limit current to
an amount that is less than required by the Zener barrier.

17.1.82 AI Adapter applications for the models MU-TAIH22, MU-TAIH23, and MU-TAIH62 HLAI
AI Adapters (80367163-001) on the model MU-TAIH22, MU-TAIH23, and MU-TAIH62 HLAI FTAs allow
each channel to be customized for a particular application. Section “AI Adapter applications” on page 353
provides an illustration of the five applications. In two of the applications, the power module is removed from
the channel socket.
The AI Adapter has a current limiter that provides the same function as a conventional fuse when providing
transmitter power. Installing the Ground Jumper on the AI Adapter references the channel signal to Safety
Ground.

339
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.83 Vertical bus bar

Because the FTA does not have a built-in shield bus, handling a large number of cable shields requires that a
vertical bus bar be used. The vertical bus bar and any cable shield connect to the local Master Reference Ground
(MRG) at the floor of the cabinet. For CE Compliance, the vertical bus bar must connect to Safety Ground.

17.1.84 Self-powered transmitters

All transmitter loops must have a single connection to reference ground. If the loop does not have a ground
reference connection, it must be provided by the FTA's zero-ohm resistor. If this ground connection is provided
by a self-powered transmitter, the zero-ohm resistor on the FTA must be removed. See “Connecting 3-Wire and
4-Wire Transmitters to HLAI FTAs” on page 362.
When the zero-ohm resistor is removed, the loop ground must not produce more than -7 to +5 volts of common
mode voltage onto the loop signal.
If the common mode voltage is outside the FTA's specifications, or the transmitter cannot be isolated from
ground, or stable ground conditions do not exist, the transmitter must not be connected to the FTA without the
use of an isolator. When an isolator is used, the zero-ohm resistor must not be removed.

17.1.85 Smart Transmitter Interface IOPs

Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) or Smart Transmitter Interface Multivariable (STI_MV) IOP supports the
HLAI/STI FTAs. All inputs are connected as 2-wire transmitters. See “Smart Transmitter Interface (STI)
Applications” on page 364 Applications.

17.1.86 External power source

An external power source with an output of 5 V + or - 10% is required to drive a slidewire. It may be daisy-
chained to drive multiple slidewires, but its negative side must not be connected to logic common through more
than one zero-ohm resistor on any FTA.

340 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.87 Model MU-TAIH01 high level analog input FTA connection diagram

Figure 100: Model MU-TAIH01 FTA Connection Diagram

341
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.88 Model MU-TAIH02 high level analog input FTA connection diagram

Figure 101: Model MU-TAIH02 FTA Connection Diagram

342 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.89 Model MU-TAIH03 high level analog input FTA connection diagram

Figure 102: Model MU-TAIH03 FTA Connection Diagram

343
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.90 Model MU-TAIH04 HART-compatible HLAI FTA assembly and connection drawing

344 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.91 Model MU-TAIH12 high level analog input FTA connection diagram

Figure 103: Model MU-TAIH12 FTA Connection Diagram

345
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.92 Model MU-TAIH13 high level analog input FTA connection diagram

Figure 104: Model MU-TAIH13 FTA Connection Diagram

346 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.93 Model MU-TAIH14/15 HART-compatible HLAI FTA assembly and connection drawing

347
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.94 Model MU-TAIH22 enhanced power HLAI FTA connection diagram

Figure 105: Model MU-TAIH22 Enhanced Power HLAI FTA Connection Diagram

348 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.95 Model MU-TAIH23 enhanced power HLAI FTA connection diagram

Figure 106: Model MU-TAIH23 Enhanced Power HLAI FTA Connection Diagram

349
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.96 Model MU-TAIH52 high level analog input FTA connection diagram

Figure 107: Model MU-TAIH52 FTA Connection Diagram

350 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.97 Model MU-TAIH53 high level analog input FTA connection diagram

Figure 108: Model MU-TAIH53 FTA Connection Diagram

351
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.98 Model MU-TAIH54 HART-compatible HLAI FTA assembly and connection drawing

352 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.99 Model MU-TAIH62 enhanced power HLAI FTA connection diagram

Figure 109: Model MU-TAIH62 Enhanced Power HLAI FTA Connection Diagram

17.1.100 AI Adapter applications

“Figure 110: Model MU-TAIH22/23/62 AI Adapter Applications” illustrates the AI Adapter applications for the
model MU-TAIH22, MU-TAIH23, and MU-TAIH62 FTAs.

353
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Figure 110: Model MU-TAIH22/23/62 AI Adapter Applications

17.1.101 Model MU-TAIH02 high level analog input FTA assembly layout

354 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.102 Model MU-TAIH03 high level analog input FTA assembly layout

17.1.103 Model MU-TAIH12 high level analog input FTA assembly layout

355
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.104 Model MU-TAIH13 high level analog input FTA assembly layout

356 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.105 Model MU-TAIH22 enhanced power high level analog input FTA assembly layout

357
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.106 Model MU-TAIH23 enhanced power high level analog input FTA assembly layout

358 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.107 Model MU-TAIH52 high level analog input FTA assembly layout

359
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.108 Model MU-TAIH53 high level analog input FTA assembly layout

360 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.109 Model MU-TAIH62 enhanced power high level analog input FTA assembly layout

17.1.110 Analog Input Open Wire Detection

PM I/O provides you with a wide choice of configurations and options. There are three types of Process
Variable (PV) input signals available to you:
Digital transmitter (DE Mode on Honeywell transmitters),
Conventional 4-20 mA
1-5 Vdc signal input.
All of the choices provide satisfactory control. However, the choice will affect the speed at which a bad PV can
be detected, if there is an open or broken connection.
• Digital transmitter PV
If a Honeywell digital transmitter is selected as the PV input and connected to a Honeywell Smart Transmitter
Interface (STI) IOP, the nature of the digital communications provides near instantaneous controller notification
of the transmitter's failure. The PV is declared bad and control action that the user selected for the device is
initiated. A digital transmitter PV is the preferred choice.
• 4-20 mA PV
If a conventional 4-20 mA current input is selected as the PV input, the HLAI IOP cannot differentiate between
the signal decay from a broken wire, faulty transmitter, or a significant process change. While a broken signal
lead will cause the signal across the input range resistor to decay, some transmitter faults may even drive the
signal upscale.

361
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

The PV will not be declared bad until it exceeds the conversion range or the extended limits. Until a limit is
encountered or the range is exceeded, the resultant control action for this varying PV will be the same as for a
true process variable.
The 250-ohm dropping resistor acts as a low impedance shunt in the internal RC input filter network that exists
to filter out normal mode 50/60 Hz and process noise. Depending upon when the wire break occurs relative to
when the signal input channel is scanned, the residual voltage in the RC network may be very close or quite
different from the actual input voltage before the break. Since the time constant of the internal RC network is
172 milliseconds, the worst case transition time from PVEUHI to PVEULO is approximately 280 milliseconds.
This choice is acceptable when the delay in determining a bad PV can be tolerated.
• 1-5 Vdc PV
For 1-5 Vdc signals, the shunt resistor is removed to provide a direct input to the FTA. To maintain accuracy
and minimize errors, the voltage inputs are high impedance. Without the range resistor, the decay time of the
input capacitance is indeterminate. A broken wire can cause the PV to move slowly up scale or down scale. If
the value is within the range limits, the controller will respond to the value as if it is a process change until a
limit is encountered.
The 1-5 Vdc PV input is the least desirable of the PV input choices.

17.1.111 Connecting 3-Wire and 4-Wire Transmitters to HLAI FTAs

Depending upon the situation, use the following instructions when connecting a 3-wire or 4-wire transmitter
device to an HLAI FTA.

Attention
Avoid multiple grounding points in the transmitter loop.

• Four-wire, self-powered device isolated from ground

A 4-wire, self-powered device that is isolated from ground is usually powered from 120 Vac and has a pair of
output wires providing 4-20 mA dc. The output wires should be connected across an FTA input that does not
have its range spool removed. The zero-ohm resistor that connects the (-) side of the transmitter's output to the
subsystem's common must not be removed.
If the transmitter's output is 1-5 Vdc, the range spool must be removed and the zero-ohm resistor must not be
removed.
• Four-wire, self-powered device not isolated from ground
For a 4-wire, self-powered device that is not isolated from ground, the same connection scheme as above
applies. It is assumed that “not isolated from ground” implies that the device is at ground potential, or at least
within 7 volts of it. Connect the output from the device across the range spool terminals. Remove the zero-ohm
resistor. Remove the range spool if the signal is 1-5 Vdc.
• Four-wire device powered by an isolated dc power source
For a 4-wire device that is powered by an isolated dc power source, it is assumed that the device receives 24
Vdc operating power on two wires, and two wires provide the device's output to the FTA.
The output from the device is connected to the FTA using the same instructions that apply for a 4-wire, self-
powered device that is isolated from ground.
• Four-wire device powered by nonisolated subsystem power
For a 4-wire device that is powered by nonisolated subsystem power, it is assumed that the device receives its
24 Vdc operating power from the subsystem and the device's (-) output terminal is common to its (-) power
terminal (a 3-wire device). The device's output is isolated from ground, but not from the power common.
If the current required is too high, the user must obtain 24 Vdc power from another source. Use of the model
MU-TDPR02 Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly is recommended.
Connect only one device to each fused assembly output.

362 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

The 4-20 mA output should be connected across an FTA input that does not have its range spool removed. The
zero-ohm resistor that connects the (-) side of the transmitter's output to the subsystem's common must not be
removed.

17.1.112 Allowable Field Wiring Resistance

Calculating field wiring resistance

The maximum allowable field wiring resistance between the transmitter and the FTA connection terminal is
dependent upon the voltage requirement of the transmitter and the length of the cable between the FTA and the
IOP. The cable length between the FTA and redundant IOPs may not be identical. Under worst case conditions,
this resistance is given by the following equation.
Rmax = [(13.70 - Vtx )/(.022)] - 1.336(Lcable )
where: Vtx = Voltage required at the transmitter terminal
Lcable = Length of the IOP to FTA cable in meters
The above formula is not applicable for the model MU-TAIH22 and MU-TAIH62 Enhanced Power HLAI FTAs
because the FTAs feature current-limiting circuitry. Use the following formula instead.
Rmax = [(15.60 - Vtx )/(.022)] - 1.336(Lcable )
where: Vtx = Voltage required at the transmitter terminal
Lcable = Length of the IOP to FTA cable in meters

Voltage/resistance graph
A graph of the maximum field wiring resistance versus the transmitter voltage for several FTA cable lengths is
shown in the following figure. This graph, or the equation above, should be used to ensure that field wiring
resistance and any miscellaneous circuitry between the transmitter and the FTA will not affect performance.

Attention
The CE Compliant HLAI FTA models do not require shielded field wiring, but the manufacturer of the field
transmitter may require shielded field wiring

363
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Figure 111: HLAI FTA Cable Field Resistance versus Transmitter Voltage

17.1.113 Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) Applications

Both the Smart Transmitter Interface (STI)/Smart Transmitter Interface Multivariable (STI_MV) and the High
Level Analog Input (HLAI) IOPs support the non-CE Compliant models of the High Level Analog Input FTAs.
When connecting Smart Transmitter devices to the models, MU-TAIH02, MU-TAIH12, MU-TAIH22, MU-
TAIH52, or MU-TAIH62 FTAs, use the model MU-PSTX01 or MU-PSTX02 Smart Transmitter Interface (STI)
IOP, or the model MU-PSTX03 Smart Transmitter Interface Multivariable (STI_MV) IOP.
CE Compliant HLAI FTA models MU-TAIH03, MU-TAIH13, MU-TAIH23, and MU-TAIH53 must not be
used for a Smart Transmitter device application. The model MU-PSTX01 STI, MU-PSTX02 STI, or MU-
PSTX03 STI_MV IOPs will not support these HLAI FTAs.
For Smart Transmitter device applications, use the CE Compliant STI FTA models MU-TSTX03, MU-TSTX13,
and MU-TSTX53. They are described in “Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) FTA Wiring” on page 370.

17.1.114 Model MU-TAIH22/23/62 FTAs

The model MU-TAIH23 Enhanced Power HLAI FTAs must not be used for a Smart Transmitter device
application; however, the model MU-TAIH22 and MU-TAIH62 FTAs can be used for a Smart Transmitter
device application.
Connection diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring for smart transmitter interface applications and assembly
layout drawings that show the physical layout of the HLAI FTAs are given in the following figures listed in
Table 14.

364 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Table 34: HLAI FTA Connection Drawings for STI Applications

High Level Analog Input STI Applicatons Connection Diagram

FTA Model “About This Document”*
“Model MU-TAIH02 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications
connection diagram” on page 366*
“Model MU-TAIH12 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications
connection diagram” on page 367
“Model MU-TAIH22 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications
connection diagram” on page 368
“Model MU-TAIH52 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications
connection diagram” on page 369
“Model MU-TAIH62 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications
connection diagram” on page 370
*These FTAs support a single nonredundant STI or STI_MV IOP only. All other FTAs support both nonredundant and
redundant IOP configurations.

17.1.115 Maximum allowable field resistance

See “Calculating field wiring resistance” and “Voltage/resistance graph”.

17.1.116 Model MU-TAIH01 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications connection diagram

365
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.117 Model MU-TAIH02 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications connection diagram

366 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.118 Model MU-TAIH12 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications connection diagram

367
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.119 Model MU-TAIH22 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications connection diagram

368 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.120 Model MU-TAIH52 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications connection diagram

369
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.121 Model MU-TAIH62 FTA -smart transmitter interface applications connection diagram

17.1.122 Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) FTA Wiring

The Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) FTA accepts up to 16 Smart Transmitter device high level analog inputs.
The inputs are configurable as single-ended or differential in relation to ground.
All models of the Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) FTAs are CE Compliant. Generally, CE Compliant
assemblies are identified by a part number tab number that ends in “25” or “75.”
CE Compliant FTAs have an FTA connector with a grounded body that accepts the CE Compliant model MU-
KFTSxx IOP to FTA cable.

Attention
The CE Compliant STI FTA models do not require shielded field wiring, but the manufacturer of the field transmitter
may require shielded field wiring.

370 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.123 STI FTAs and associated hardware

Table 35: Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) Standard FTA Types and Part Numbers

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-TSTX03 STI FTA with Compression Terminals N/A 51309140-125
Single IOP Interface
MC-TSTX03 STI FTA with Compression Terminals N/A 51309140-175
Single IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
MU-TSTX13 STI FTA with Compression Terminals N/A 51309142-125
Redundant IOP Interface
MC-TSTX13 STI FTA with Compression Terminals N/A 51309142-175
Redundant IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
MU-TSTX53 STI FTA with Screw Terminals N/A 51309142-225
Redundant IOP Interface
MC-TSTX53 STI FTA with Screw Terminals N/A 51309142-275
Redundant IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
Supporting IOPs
MU-PSTX02 Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) IOP 51304516-100 N/A
MC-PSTX02 Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) IOP -Conformally Coated 51304516-150 N/A
MU-PSTX03 Smart Transmitter Interface Multivariable (STI_MV) IOP N/A 51304516-200
MC-PSTX03 Smart Transmitter Interface Multivariable (STI_MV) IOP- N/A 51304516-250
Conformally Coated

17.1.124 STI_MV IOP

The model MU-PSTX02 Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) IOP and model MU-PSTX03 Smart Transmitter
Interface Multivariable (STI_MV) IOP support the Smart Transmitter Interface FTAs and can be installed in any
card file slot.

17.1.125 Connection diagrams and assembly layout

Connection diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring and assembly layout drawings that show the physical
layout of the STI FTAs are given in the following figures listed in the following table.

Table 36: STI FTA Connection Drawings

Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

FTA Model “Model MU-TSTX03 smart transmitter “Model MU-TSTX03 smart transmitter
interface (STI) FTA connection interface (STI) FTA assembly layout”
diagram” on page 372 on page 375
“Model MU-TSTX13 smart transmitter “Model MU-TSTX13 smart transmitter
interface (STI) FTA connection interface (STI) FTA assembly layout”
diagram” on page 373 on page 376

371
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

“Model MU-TSTX53 smart transmitter “Model MU-TSTX53 smart transmitter
interface (STI) FTA connection interface (STI) FTA assembly layout”
diagram” on page 374 on page 377

Because the FTA does not have a built-in shield bus, handling a large number of cable shields requires the use
of a vertical bus bar. The vertical bus bar and any cable shield connect to the local Master Reference Ground
(MRG) at the floor of the cabinet. For CE Compliance applications, Safety Ground must be used.

17.1.126 Self-powered transmitters

All transmitter loops must have a single connection to reference ground. If the loop does not have a ground
reference connection, it must be provided by the FTA's zero-ohm resistor. If this ground connection is provided
by a self-powered transmitter, the zero-ohm resistor on the FTA must be removed.
When the zero-ohm resistor is removed, the loop ground must not produce more than -7 to +5 volts of common
mode voltage onto the loop signal.
If the common mode voltage is outside the FTA's specifications, or the transmitter cannot be isolated from
ground, or stable ground conditions do not exist, the transmitter must not be connected to the FTA without the
use of an isolator. When an isolator is used, the zero-ohm resistor must not be removed.

17.1.127 Model MU-TSTX03 smart transmitter interface (STI) FTA connection diagram

372 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.128 Model MU-TSTX13 smart transmitter interface (STI) FTA connection diagram

373
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.129 Model MU-TSTX53 smart transmitter interface (STI) FTA connection diagram

374 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.130 Model MU-TSTX03 smart transmitter interface (STI) FTA assembly layout

375
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.131 Model MU-TSTX13 smart transmitter interface (STI) FTA assembly layout

376 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.1.132 Model MU-TSTX53 smart transmitter interface (STI) FTA assembly layout

377
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2 Analog Output (AO) FTA wiring

Analog Output FTAs provide either eight or sixteen 4-20 mA outputs to proportioning loads, such as valves.
There are four types of the AO FTAs:
• 8 channel (point)
• 16 channel (point) with standby manual connection
• 16 channel (point) with filtering to allow operation with HART field devices, and provide a connector for an
external HART system.
• 16 channel (point) HART-compatible
Some Analog Output (AO) Field Termination Assemblies are CE Compliant, while others are not CE
Compliant. The CE Compliant assemblies are identified by a part number tab number that ends in “25” or “75.”
They do not have a unique model number.
CE Compliant FTAs have an FTA connector with a grounded body that accepts the CE Compliant model MU-
KFTSxx IOP to FTA cable. For CE Compliant applications, the CE Compliant FTA and IOP models must be
used with the CE Compliant model shielded IOP to FTA cable and card file. In other words, CE compliant
components must be used throughout; IOP, IOP card file, IOP to FTA cable and FTA.
The model MU-PAOX03 IOP is available as a CE Compliant assembly and as a non-CE Compliant assembly.
For CE Compliance, the CE Compliant assembly must be used with the CE Compliant FTAs.
The model MU-PAOY22 Analog Output IOP and MC-PHAO01 HART Analog Output IOP are CE Compliant
assemblies. These IOPs are not available as non-CE Compliant assemblies.
Both models MU-THAO11and MC-THAO11 FTAs with a HART interface connector are CE Compliant.

CAUTION
The CE Compliant Analog Output FTA models do not require shielded field wiring, but the manufacturer of the
valve may require shielded field wiring.

Table 37: Analog Output (AO) Standard FTA Types and Part Numbers

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
8 Channel Points - FTAS and IOPs
MU-TAOX01 AO FTA with Compression Terminals 51303953-100 N/A
Single IOP Interface
MU-TAOX02 AO FTA with Compression Terminals 51304476-100 51304476-125
Single IOP Interface
MC-TAOX02 AO FTA with Compression Terminals 51304476-150 51304476-175
Single IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
MU-TAOX12 AO FTA with Compression Terminals 51304335-100 51304335-125
Redundant IOP Interface
MC-TAOX12 AO FTA with Compression Terminals 51304335-150 51304335-175
Redundant IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
MU-TAOX52 AO FTA with Screw Terminals 51304335-200 51304335-225
Redundant IOP Interface
MC-TAOX52 AO FTA with Screw Terminals 51304335-250 51304335-275
Redundant IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
Supporting IOPs

378 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-PAOX02 Analog Output IOP 51304483-100 N/A
MC-PAOX02 Analog Output IOP-Conformally Coated 51304483-150 N/A
MU-PAOX03 Analog Output IOP 51304672-100 51309152-125
MC-PAOX03 Analog Output IOP-Conformally Coated 51304672-150 51309152-175
16 Channel Points - FTAS and IOPs
MU-THAO11 AO FTA with Compression Terminals N/A 51309542-125
Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface
HART connection capability
MC-THAO11 AO FTA with Compression Terminals N/A 51309542-175
Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface
HART connection capability-Conformally Coated
MU-TAOY22 AO FTA with Compression Terminals 80366177-100 80366481-125
Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface
MC-TAOY22 AO FTA with Compression Terminals 80366177-150 80366481-175
Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
MU-TAOY23 AO FTA with Compression Terminals 80366177-200 N/A
Without Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface
MC-TAOY23 AO FTA with Compression Terminals 80366177-250 N/A
Without Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
MU-TAOY24 HART-Compatible AO FTA with Compression Terminals N/A 51305865-125
Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface (See Note)
MC-TAOY24 HART-Compatible AO FTA with Compression Terminals N/A 51305865-175
Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface-Conformally Coated (See Note)
MU-TAOY25 HART-Compatible AO FTA with Compression Terminals N/A
Without Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface (See Note)
MC-TAOY25 HART-Compatible AO FTA with Compression Terminals N/A
Without Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface-Conformally Coated (See Note)
MU-TAOY52 AO FTA with Screw Terminals 80364007-100 80366484-125
Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface

379
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MC-TAOY52 AO FTA with Screw Terminals 80364007-150 80366484-175
Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
MU-TAOY53 AO FTA with Screw Terminals 80364007-200 N/A
Without Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface
MC-TAOY53 AO FTA with Screw Terminals 80364007-250 N/A
Without Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface-Conformally Coated
MU-TAOY54 HART-Compatible AO FTA with Screw Terminals N/A 51305867-125
Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface (See Note)
MC-TAOY54 HART-Compatible AO FTA with Screw Terminals N/A 51305867-175
Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface-Conformally Coated (See Note)
MU-TAOY55 HART-Compatible AO FTA with Screw Terminals N/A
Without Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface (See Note)
MC-TAOY55 HART-Compatible AO FTA with Screw Terminals N/A
Without Standby Manual Device Connector
Redundant IOP Interface-Conformally Coated (See Note)
Supporting IOPs
MU-PAOY22 Analog Output IOP N/A 80363969-100
MC-PAOY22 Analog Output IOP-Conformally Coated N/A 80363969-150
MC-PHAO01 HART Analog Output-Conformally Coated N/A 51403476-150
Note: HART compatible FTAs, models MC/MU-TAOY24, MC/MU-TAOY25, MC/MU-TAOY54 and MC/MU-TAOY55
are suitable for use with the standard IOP, however the FTAs have not been ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1978 surge tested with
the standard (non-HART) Analog Output IOP.

The following table lists the available analog output IOPs and the compatible FTAs.

Table 38: AO IOPs and Compatible FTAs

AO IOPs Compatible AO FTAs

8 Channel Points MU-TAOX01
MU/MC-PAOX02 MU/MC-TAOX02
MU/MC-PAOX03 MU/MC-TAOX12
MU/MC-TAOX52

380 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

AO IOPs Compatible AO FTAs

16 Channel Points MU/MC-TAOY22
MU/MC-PAOY22 MU/MC-TAOY23
MU/MC-TAOY52
MU/MC-TAOY53
MU/MC-THAO11
16 Channel HART MU/MC-TAOY24
MU/MC-PHAO01 MU/MC-TAOY25
MU/MC-TAOY54
MU/MC-TAOY55
Note: Do not mismatch Analog Output IOPs.

Connection diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring and assembly layout drawings that show the physical
layout of the AO FTAs are given in the following figures listed in the following table.

Table 39: AO FTA Connection Drawings

Analog Output Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

FTA Model “Model MU-TAOX01/MU-TAOX02 “Model MU-TAOX02 analog output
analog output FTA connection FTA assembly layout” on page 386
diagram” on page 383
“Model MU-TAOX12 analog output “Model MU-TAOX12 analog output
FTA connection diagram” on page 384 FTA assembly layout” on page 387
“Model MU-TAOX52 analog output “Model MU-TAOX52 analog output
FTA connection diagram” on page 385 FTA assembly layout” on page 388
“Model MU-TAOY22 analog output
FTA connection diagram (non-CE
compliant)” on page 389
(Non-CE compliant)
“Model MU-TAOY22 analog output “Model MU-TAOY22 analog output
FTA connection diagram (CE FTA assembly layout (CE compliant)
compliant) (Reference for MU- (Reference for MU-TAOY24 and MU-
TAOY24 and MU-TAOY25 HART- TAOY25 HART-compatible FTAs)” on
compatible FTAs)” on page 390 page 395
(CE compliant) (CE compliant)
“Model MU-TAOY23 analog output “Model MU-TAOY23 analog output
FTA connection diagram (non-CE FTA assembly layout (non-CE
compliant)” on page 391 compliant)” on page 396
(Non-CE compliant) (Non-CE compliant)
“Model MU-TAOY22 analog output “Model MU-TAOY22 analog output
FTA connection diagram (CE FTA assembly layout (CE compliant)
compliant) (Reference for MU- (Reference for MU-TAOY24 and MU-
TAOY24 and MU-TAOY25 HART- TAOY25 HART-compatible FTAs)” on
compatible FTAs)” on page 390 page 395
(See Note) (See Note)

381
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Analog Output Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

“Model MU-TAOY22 analog output “Model MU-TAOY22 analog output
FTA connection diagram (CE FTA assembly layout (CE compliant)
compliant) (Reference for MU- (Reference for MU-TAOY24 and MU-
TAOY24 and MU-TAOY25 HART- TAOY25 HART-compatible FTAs)” on
compatible FTAs)” on page 390 page 395
(See Note) (See Note)
“Model MU-TAOY52 analog output “Model MU-TAOY52 analog output
FTA connection diagram (non-CE FTA assembly layout (non-CE
compliant)” on page 392 compliant)” on page 397
(Non-CE compliant) (Non-CE compliant)
“Model MU-TAOY52 analog output “Model MU-TAOY52 analog output
FTA connection diagram (CE FTA assembly layout (CE compliant)
compliant) (Reference for MU- (Reference for MU-TAOY54 and MU-
TAOY54 and MU-TAOY55 HART- TAOY55 HART-compatible FTAs)” on
compatible FTAs)” on page 393 page 398
(CE compliant) (CE compliant)
“Model MU-TAOY53 analog output “Model MU-TAOY53 analog output
FTA connection diagram (non-CE FTA assembly layout (non-CE
compliant)” on page 394 compliant)” on page 399
“Model MU-TAOY52 analog output “Model MU-TAOY52 analog output
FTA connection diagram (CE FTA assembly layout (CE compliant)
compliant) (Reference for MU- (Reference for MU-TAOY54 and MU-
TAOY54 and MU-TAOY55 HART- TAOY55 HART-compatible FTAs)” on
compatible FTAs)” on page 393 page 398
(See Note) (See Note)
“Model MU-TAOY52 analog output “Model MU-TAOY52 analog output
FTA connection diagram (CE FTA assembly layout (CE compliant)
compliant) (Reference for MU- (Reference for MU-TAOY54 and MU-
TAOY54 and MU-TAOY55 HART- TAOY55 HART-compatible FTAs)” on
compatible FTAs)” on page 393 page 398
(See Note) (See Note)
“Model MU-THAO11 analog output “Model MU-THAO11 analog output
FTA connection diagram (CE FTA assembly layout (CE compliant)”
compliant)” on page 400 on page 401
Note: For the model MU-TAOY24 and MU-TAOY25 FTAs, the model MU-TAOY22 connection diagram and assembly
layout are used for reference. For the model MU-TAOY54 and MU-TAOY55 FTAs, the model MU-TAOY52 connection
diagram and assembly layout are used for reference.

17.2.1 Standby Manual device connectors

Model MU-TAOY22, MU-TAOY24, MU-TAOY52, MU-TAOY54 and MU-THAO11 FTAs provide two
connectors, J3 and J4, for connection to an Analog Output Standby Manual device. Connector J3 supports
outputs (channels) 1 through 8, and connector J4 supports outputs (channels) 9 through 16.
A single 1 ampere fuse, F1, provides 24 Vdc power to the Standby Manual connectors.
The FTA does not have a built-in bus to accommodate field wiring cable shields. A vertical bus bar that is
installed on the FTA mounting channel is recommended as a connection point for local Master Reference
Ground (MRG), and is described in “FTA Installation Considerations” on page 192. Connect the cable shields to
the vertical bus bar and then connect the vertical bus bar to the local Master Reference Ground (MRG) with a
2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) wire. For CE Compliance applications, Safety Ground must be used.
Installations can use Power Limited Tray cable. Check the local electrical codes.

382 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.2 HART connector, MU/MC-THAO11 only

Model MC-THAO11 and MU-THAO11 FTA contain a HART connector that is used to interface to an external
HART system. The pinouts of the connector are as follows:

Pins Usage
1 through 16 Combined 4 to 20 mA / HART signals for
Channels 1 through 16, respectively
17 through 20 Ground

17.2.3 Model MU-TAOX01/MU-TAOX02 analog output FTA connection diagram

383
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.4 Model MU-TAOX12 analog output FTA connection diagram

384 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.5 Model MU-TAOX52 analog output FTA connection diagram

385
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.6 Model MU-TAOX02 analog output FTA assembly layout

386 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.7 Model MU-TAOX12 analog output FTA assembly layout

387
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.8 Model MU-TAOX52 analog output FTA assembly layout

388 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.9 Model MU-TAOY22 analog output FTA connection diagram (non-CE compliant)

389
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.10 Model MU-TAOY22 analog output FTA connection diagram (CE compliant) (Reference for MU-
TAOY24 and MU-TAOY25 HART-compatible FTAs)

390 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.11 Model MU-TAOY23 analog output FTA connection diagram (non-CE compliant)

391
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.12 Model MU-TAOY52 analog output FTA connection diagram (non-CE compliant)

392 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.13 Model MU-TAOY52 analog output FTA connection diagram (CE compliant) (Reference for MU-
TAOY54 and MU-TAOY55 HART-compatible FTAs)

393
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.14 Model MU-TAOY53 analog output FTA connection diagram (non-CE compliant)

394 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.15 Model MU-TAOY22 analog output FTA assembly layout (CE compliant) (Reference for MU-
TAOY24 and MU-TAOY25 HART-compatible FTAs)

395
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.16 Model MU-TAOY23 analog output FTA assembly layout (non-CE compliant)

396 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.17 Model MU-TAOY52 analog output FTA assembly layout (non-CE compliant)

397
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.18 Model MU-TAOY52 analog output FTA assembly layout (CE compliant) (Reference for MU-
TAOY54 and MU-TAOY55 HART-compatible FTAs)

398 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.19 Model MU-TAOY53 analog output FTA assembly layout (non-CE compliant)

399
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.20 Model MU-THAO11 analog output FTA connection diagram (CE compliant)

400 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.2.21 Model MU-THAO11 analog output FTA assembly layout (CE compliant)

401
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3 Digital Input (DI) FTA Wiring

Three types of standard FTAs accept inputs from digital field devices that use different operating voltages and
are described as:
• “24 Vdc Digital Input (DI) FTAs” on page 402
• “120 Vac Digital Input FTAs” on page 417, and
• “240 Vac Digital Input FTAs” on page 427.
Digital input model MU-PDIX02 IOP is compatible with all digital input FTA types, with the exception of
models MU-TDIY22 and MU-TDIY62 FTAs. Model MU-PDIY22 digital input IOP supports model MU-
TDIY22 and MU-TDIY62 FTAs.

17.3.1 24 Vdc Digital Input (DI) FTAs

The 24 Vdc Digital Input (DI) FTA accommodates 32 contact inputs that share an isolated common return. The
24 Vdc DI FTAs require a 24 Vdc power source for the process control contacts. See 24 Vdc power source
connections and “Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly” on page 403 for additional information.
Some 24 Vdc Digital Input (DI) Field Termination Assemblies are CE Compliant, while others are not CE
Compliant. The CE Compliant assemblies are generally identified by a part number tab number that ends in
“25” or “75.” They do not have a unique model number.
CE Compliant FTAs have an FTA connector with a grounded body that accepts the CE Compliant model MU-
KFTSxx IOP to FTA cable.

Table 40: 24 Vdc Digital Input (DI) Standard FTA Types and Part Numbers

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
32 Channel Points - FTAS and IOPs
MU-TDID11 24 Vdc DI FTA with Compression Terminals 51301201-100 N/A
MU-TDID12 24 Vdc DI FTA with Compression Terminals 51304441-100 51304441-125
MC-TDID12 24 Vdc DI FTA with Compression Terminals 51304441-150 51304441-175
Conformally Coated
MU-TDID52 24 Vdc DI FTA with Screw Terminals 51304441-200 51304441-225
MC-TDID52 24 Vdc DI FTA with Screw Terminals 51304441-250 51304441-275
Conformally Coated
MU-TDID72 24 Vdc DI FTA with Screw Terminals 51303928-100 N/A
MC-TDID72 24 Vdc DI FTA with Screw Terminals 51303928-150 N/A
Conformally Coated
Supporting IOPs
MU-PDIX02 Digital Input IOP N/A 51304485-100
MC-PDIX02 Digital Input IOP-Conformally Coated N/A 51304485-150
MU-PDIS12 Digital Input Sequence of Events IOP (DISOE) N/A 51402625-125
MC-PDIS12 Digital Input Sequence of Events IOP (DISOE) -Conformally N/A 51402625-175
Coated
32 Channel Points - FTAS and IOPs
MU-TDIY22 24 Vdc DI FTA with Compression Terminals 80366180-100 80366180-125

402 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MC-TDIY22 24 Vdc DI FTA with Compression Terminals 80366180-150 80366180-175
Conformally Coated
MU-TDIY62 24 Vdc DI FTA with Screw Terminals 80364010-100 80364010-125
MC-TDIY62 24 Vdc DI FTA with Screw Terminals 80364010-150 80364010-175
Conformally Coated
Supporting IOPs
MU-PDIY22 Digital Input IOP N/A 80363972-100
MC-PDIY22 Digital Input IOP-Conformally Coated N/A 80363972-150

The following table lists the available 24 Vdc digital input IOPs and the compatible FTAs.

Table 41: DI IOPs and Compatible FTAs

DI IOPs Compatible DI FTAs

MU/MC-PDIX02 MU-TDID11
MU/MC-TDID12
MU/MC-TDID52
MU/MC-TDID72
MU/MC-PDIS12 MU/MC-TDID12
MU/MC-TDID52
MU/MC-PDIY22 MU/MC-TDIY22
MU/MC-TDIY62
Note: Do not mismatch Digital Input IOPs.

17.3.2 Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly

An external 24 Vdc power source can be connected to the FTAs for the process control contacts. The Digital
Input Power Distribution Assembly provides fused 24 Vdc from the Power System for this purpose. The
following figure shows the Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly's cable and wiring connections.

403
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Figure 112: Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly Wiring and Cable Installation

“Figure 113: Model MU-TDPR02 Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly Layout” illustrates the physical
layout of the 12-terminal model MU-TDPR02 Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly. Pairs of terminals are
provided on the assembly for the 24 Vdc connections.
The assemblies have the same mounting dimensions as an A-size FTA.
“Figure 114: Model MU-TDPR02 Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly Schematic” is a schematic for the
12-terminal model MU-TDPR02 Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly.

404 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.3 Model MU-TDPR02 assembly layout

Figure 113: Model MU-TDPR02 Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly Layout

405
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.4 Model MU-TDPR02 assembly schematic

Figure 114: Model MU-TDPR02 Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly Schematic

17.3.5 Connection diagrams and assembly layouts

Connection diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring and assembly layout drawings that show the physical
layout of the 24 Vdc DI FTAs are given in the following figures listed in Table 17.

Table 42: 24 Vdc DI FTA Connection Drawings

24 Vdc Digital Input Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

FTA Model “Model MU-TDID11, 24 Vdc digital
input FTA connection diagram” on
page 408
“Model MU-TDID12, 24 Vdc digital “Model MU-TDID12, 24 Vdc digital
input FTA connection diagram” on input FTA assembly layout” on
page 409 page 411
“Model MU-TDID52/72, 24 Vdc “Model MU-TDID52, 24 Vdc digital
digital input FTA connection diagram” input FTA assembly layout” on
on page 410 page 412
“Model MU-TDID52/72, 24 Vdc “Model MU-TDID72, 24 Vdc digital
digital input FTA connection diagram” input FTA assembly layout” on
on page 410 page 413

406 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

24 Vdc Digital Input Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

“Model MU-TDIY22, 24 Vdc digital “Model MU-TDIY22, 24 Vdc digital
input FTA connection diagram” on input FTA assembly layout” on
page 414 page 416
“Model MU-TDIY62, 24 Vdc digital “Model MU-TDIY62, 24 Vdc digital
input FTA connection diagram” on input FTA assembly layout” on
page 415 page 417

Note that the model MU-TDID52 24 Vdc DI FTA has fixed screw terminal connectors, while the model MU-
TDID72 has removable screw terminal connectors.

17.3.6 Model MU-TDID11/12/52/72 FTAs

17.3.7 24 Vdc power source connections

The DI FTAs require a 24 Vdc power source for the process control contacts. The power can be supplied either
one of two ways:
1. From an external source using the Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly, model MU-TDPR02, or a
user-supplied auxiliary 24 Vdc source to the terminals on the 24 Vdc DI FTA. See “Digital Input Power
Distribution Assembly” on page 403 and the appropriate FTA connection diagram.
2. Using an internal source using power supplied through the DI IOP backpanel fuse.

CAUTION
When an internal 24 Vdc power source is used, be aware that if the 24 Vdc is accidently shorted to ground, power
will be removed from the Digital Input IOP because 24 Vdc power for both the IOP and FTA is sourced through
the IOP's backpanel fuse. For this reason, an external 24 Vdc source is recommended.

The input terminals on the DI FTAs for the 24 Vdc power source are described in the following table.

Table 43: DI FTA 24 Vdc Input Terminals

DI FTA Model 24 Vdc Input Terminals on FTA

MU-TDID12 TB1-65 (+)
MU-TDID52 TB1-66 (-)
MU-TDID72
MU-TDID11 TB3-17 (+)
TB4-17 (-)

The model MU-TDID12, MU-TDID52, and MU-TDID72 24 Vdc DI FTAs provide an internal source of 24
Vdc (from the IOP backpanel) at TB1-67 (+) and TB1-68 (-). If internal 24 Vdc power is desired, connect:
TB1-65 (+) to TB1-67 (+)
TB1-66 (-) to TB1-68 (-)
The model MU-TDID11 24 Vdc DI FTA does not optionally provide an internal 24 Vdc.

17.3.8 Vertical bus bar for field wiring cable shield grounding
Because the FTA does not have a built-in shield bus, the termination of each wire-pair cable shield requires the
use of a vertical bus bar on the FTA mounting channel. Except when the cable shield is already grounded at the
process, the cable shield must connect to the same local Safety Ground (CE Compliant) or Master Reference

407
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Ground (MRG) reference used by the process control contact power source. Use a 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) or larger
wire to connect the vertical bus bar to the ground reference.

17.3.9 Model MU-TDID11, 24 Vdc digital input FTA connection diagram

408 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.10 Model MU-TDID12, 24 Vdc digital input FTA connection diagram

409
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.11 Model MU-TDID52/72, 24 Vdc digital input FTA connection diagram

410 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.12 Model MU-TDID12, 24 Vdc digital input FTA assembly layout

411
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.13 Model MU-TDID52, 24 Vdc digital input FTA assembly layout

412 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.14 Model MU-TDID72, 24 Vdc digital input FTA assembly layout

17.3.15 Model MU-TDIY22/62 FTAs

24 Vdc power source

The DI FTAs require a 24 Vdc power source for the process control contacts. The power can be supplied either
one of two ways:
1. From an external source using the Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly, model MU-TDPR02, or a
user-supplied auxiliary 24 Vdc source to the terminals on the 24 Vdc DI FTA. See “Digital Input Power
Distribution Assembly” on page 403 and the appropriate FTA connection diagram.
2. Using an internal source using power supplied through the DI IOP backpanel fuse.
The Model MU-TDIY22 and MU-TDIY62 FTAs require the connection of a 24 Vdc power source to TB1-1
and TB1-2 for the process control contacts. Optionally, the positive (+) or negative (-) side of the power source
can be reversely connected to the terminals to provide either a current source or current sink application.

External 24 Vdc source

An external 24 Vdc source for the process control contacts is recommended. The external source can be
from either a Digital Input Power Distribution Assembly, model MU-TDPR02, or a user-supplied auxiliary 24
Vdc power source.

413
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Internal 24 Vdc source

The Model MU-TDIY22 FTA provides an internal source of 24 Vdc at TB1-3 and TB1-4. Connect TB1-3 to
TB1-1 and TB1-4 to TB1-2 for a current sink application. Connect TB1-4 to TB1-1 and TB1-3 to TB1-2 for a
current source application. See “Figure 115: Model MU-TDIY22 24 Vdc Digital Input FTA Assembly Layout”.
The Model MU-TDIY62 FTA provides an internal source of 24 Vdc at TB2-1 and TB2-2. Connect TB2-1 to
TB1-1 and TB2-2 to TB1-2 for a current sink application. Connect TB2-2 to TB1-1 and TB2-1 to TB1-2 for a
current source application. See “Figure 116: Model MU-TDIY62 24 Vdc Digital Input FTA Assembly Layout”.

Input power source protection

Two fuses, F1 (0.5 A) and F3 (0.5 A), provide overcurrent protection for the input 24 Vdc power source at
TB1-1 and TB1-2.

IOP protection
The internal 24 Vdc power for both the IOP and FTA is sourced through the IOP's backpanel fuse (2.0 A);
however, if the 24 Vdc is accidently shorted to ground, power will not be removed from the Digital Input IOP
because a 1.0 A fuse, F2, provides protection.

17.3.16 Model MU-TDIY22, 24 Vdc digital input FTA connection diagram

414 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.17 Model MU-TDIY62, 24 Vdc digital input FTA connection diagram

415
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.18 Model MU-TDIY22, 24 Vdc digital input FTA assembly layout

Figure 115: Model MU-TDIY22 24 Vdc Digital Input FTA Assembly Layout

416 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.19 Model MU-TDIY62, 24 Vdc digital input FTA assembly layout

Figure 116: Model MU-TDIY62 24 Vdc Digital Input FTA Assembly Layout

17.3.20 120 Vac Digital Input FTAs

The 120 Vac Digital Input (DI) FTA accommodates 32 individually isolated ac inputs.

WARNING
Risk of electrical shock: Potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4
Vpeak, or 60 VDC may be accessible.

17.3.21 CE Compliance for 120 Vac Digital Input FTAs

Some 120 Vac Digital Input (DI) FTAs are CE Compliant, while others are not. The CE Compliant assemblies
are identified by a part number tab number that ends in “25” or “75.” They do not have a unique model number.
CE Compliant FTAs have an FTA connector with a grounded body that accepts the CE Compliant model MU-
KFTSxx IOP to FTA cable.
The CE Compliant and non-CE Compliant models with their part numbers are listed in the following table.

417
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Table 44: 120 Vac Digital Input FTAs and DI IOPs

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-TDIA11 120 Vac DI FTA with Compression Terminals 51301186-100 N/A
MU-TDIA12 120 Vac DI FTA with Compression Terminals 51304439-100 51304439-125
MC-TDIA12 120 Vac DI FTA with Compression Terminals Conformally 51304439-150 51304439-175
Coated
MU-TDIA52 120 Vac DI FTA with Screw Terminals 51304439-200 51304439-225
MC-TDIA52 120 Vac DI FTA with Screw Terminals Conformally Coated 51304439-250 51304439-275
MU-TDIA72 120 Vac DI FTA with Screw Terminals 51303930-100 N/A
MC-TDIA72 120 Vac DI FTA with Screw Terminals Conformally Coated 51303930-150 N/A
Supporting IOPs
MU-PDIX02 Digital Input IOP N/A 51304485-100
MC-PDIX02 Digital Input IOP-Conformally Coated N/A 51304485-150
MU-PDIS12 Digital Input Sequence of Events IOP (DISOE) N/A 51402625-125
MC-PDIS12 Digital Input Sequence of Events IOP (DISOE) - N/A 51402625-175
Conformally Coated

17.3.22 IOP compatibility for 120 Vac Digital Input FTAs

The following table lists the digital input IOPs that are compatible with the 120 Vac Digital Input FTAs.

Table 45: DI IOPs and Compatible FTAs

DI IOPs Compatible DI FTAs

MU/MC-PDIX02 MU-TDIA11
MU/MC-TDIA12
MU/MC-TDIA52
MU/MC-TDIA72
MU/MC-PDIS12 MU/MC-TDIA12
MU/MC-TDIA52
MU/MC-TDIA72
Note: Do not mismatch Digital Input IOPs.

17.3.23 Connection diagrams and assembly layouts for 120 Vac Digital Input FTAs
Connection diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring and assembly layout drawings that show the physical
layout of the 120 Vac DI FTAs are given in the following figures listed in the following table.

Table 46: 120 Vac DI FTA Connection Drawings

120 Vac Digital Input Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

FTA Model “Model MU-TDIA11, 120 Vac digital
input FTA connection diagram” on
page 420

418 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

120 Vac Digital Input Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

“Model MU-TDIA12, 120 Vac digital “Model MU-TDIA12, 120 Vac digital
input FTA connection diagram” on input FTA assembly layout” on
page 421 page 424
“Model MU-TDIA52, 120 Vac digital “Model MU-TAOY52 analog output
input FTA connection diagram” on FTA assembly layout (CE compliant)
page 422 (Reference for MU-TAOY54 and MU-
TAOY55 HART-compatible FTAs)” on
page 398
“Model MU-TDIA72, 120 Vac digital “Model MU-TDIA72, 120 Vac digital
input FTA connection diagram” on input FTA assembly layout” on
page 423 page 426

Note that early production compression terminal-type 120 Vac DI FTA, model MU-TDIA11 FTA, provides
groups of eight inputs sharing an isolated common return as illustrated by the connection diagram “Model MU-
TDIA11, 120 Vac digital input FTA connection diagram” on page 420.
All other 120 Vac digital input FTAs provide 32 separately isolated inputs. See the connection diagrams.
The model MU-TDIA52 FTA employs fixed-screw terminal connectors, while the model MU-TDIA72 FTA
employs removable-screw terminal connectors.

17.3.24 Proper cabling for 120 Vac Digital Input FTAs

Signals from the FTA are normally considered as signals from a power circuit and therefore are subject to
electrical codes. Use only cable approved for the operating voltage and current-limiting.

17.3.25 Vertical bus bar usage

There is usually a safety/shield conductor for each circuit. Because the FTA does not have a built-in bus to
accommodate a large number of safety ground wires, use a vertical bus bar. Connect each shield/ground to the
vertical bus and connect the vertical bus to the local Safety Ground bus bar with a 2.5 mm2(14 AWG) wire. Any
cable shield/ground connects to the local Safety Ground at the cabinet entry.

17.3.26 Excessive cable capacitance

Excessive “Cable Capacitance” on page 426 can prevent the FTA from detecting a valid open contact condition.
Capacitance depends on the insulation materials and cable length.

419
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.27 Model MU-TDIA11, 120 Vac digital input FTA connection diagram

420 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.28 Model MU-TDIA12, 120 Vac digital input FTA connection diagram

421
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.29 Model MU-TDIA52, 120 Vac digital input FTA connection diagram

422 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.30 Model MU-TDIA72, 120 Vac digital input FTA connection diagram

423
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.31 Model MU-TDIA12, 120 Vac digital input FTA assembly layout

424 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.32 Model MU-TDIA52, 120 Vac digital input FTA assembly layout

425
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.33 Model MU-TDIA72, 120 Vac digital input FTA assembly layout

17.3.34 Cable Capacitance

Cable capacitance increases with cable length to where an ac input FTA senses a false closed-contact condition.
The maximum acceptable cable length is calculated as follows.

Cable capacitance calculation

If eight 120 Vac contact signals with a common neutral return are sent to the FTA, similar to Group 1 in Model
MU-TDIA11 FTA connection diagram, assume all the conductors are twisted together in one cable and assume
all contacts but one is closed. The FTA will have a minimum hold-off current of 1.15 mA, leakage in excess of
1.15 mA, and a channel may be activated. The capacitance that can cause this current flow is calculated as
I = E/Xc
where: I = 1.15 x 10-3 amperes
since: Xc = 1/(2pfC),
E/Xc = E2pfC = 1.15 x 10-3 amperes
or, for 120 Vac at 60 Hz,
120 x 2 x p x 60 x C = 1.15 x 10-3 amperes
thus: C = 2.54 x 10-8 farads.
The capacitance of a conductor insulated with Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) can exceed 394 pf/m (120 pf/ft) for all
other conductors in the cable. The total cable length that gives 2.54 x 10-8 farads of capacitance is calculated as

426 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

pf x length = 2.54 x 10-8 farads

3.94 x 10-10 x L = 2.54 x 10-8 farads
L = 64.5 meters (211.5 feet)
This calculated length will almost certainly cause a false closure indication. The value of 1.15 mA is a worst-
case value at -40 0C. The typical worst-case value at 25 0C is 1.37 mA estimated.

Lower capacitance cable

Cable is available with much lower capacitance insulation, such as polycarbonate. When a lower cable
capacitance still is not acceptable for the desired distance, individually shielded contact conductors are required.

17.3.35 240 Vac Digital Input FTAs

The 240 Vac Digital Input (DI) FTA is similar to the 120 Vac Digital Input FTA, except it accommodates a
higher operating voltage and a lower sense current. The inputs of all 240 Vac DI FTA models are arranged in
groups of eight channels, each with a common return for the group.

WARNING
Risk of electrical shock: Potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4
Vpeak, or 60 VDC may be accessible.

17.3.36 CE Compliance for 240 Vac Digital Input FTAs

Some 240 Vac Digital Input (DI) FTAs are CE Compliant, while others are not CE Compliant. The CE
Compliant assemblies are identified by a part number tab number that ends in “25” or “75.” They do not have a
unique model number.
CE Compliant FTAs have an FTA connector with a grounded body that accepts the CE Compliant model MU-
KFTSxx IOP to FTA cable.
The CE Compliant and non-CE Compliant models with their part numbers are listed in the following table

Table 47: 240 Vac Digital Input FTAs and DI IOPs

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-TDIA21 240 Vac DI FTA with Compression Terminals 51304219-100 N/A
MU-TDIA22 240 Vac DI FTA with Compression Terminals 51304431-100 51304431-125
MC-TDIA22 240 Vac DI FTA with Compression Terminals 51304431-150 51304431-175
Conformally Coated
MU-TDIA62 240 Vac DI FTA with Screw Terminals 51304431-200 51304431-225
MC-TDIA62 240 Vac DI FTA with Screw Terminals Conformally 51304431-250 51304431-275
Coated
Supporting IOPs
MU-PDIX02 Digital Input IOP N/A 51304485-100
MC-PDIX02 Digital Input IOP-Conformally Coated N/A 51304485-150
MU-PDIS12 Digital Input Sequence of Events IOP (DISOE) N/A 51402625-125
MC-PDIS12 Digital Input Sequence of Events IOP (DISOE) - N/A 51402625-175
Conformally Coated

427
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.37 IOP compatibility for 240 Vac Digital Input FTAs

The model MU-PDIX02 and MU-PDIS12 Digital Input IOPs are compatible with all 240 Vac Digital Input FTA
models.

17.3.38 Connection diagrams and assembly layouts for 240 Vac Digital Input FTAs
Connection diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring and assembly layout drawings that show the physical
layout of the 240 Vac DI FTAs are given in the following figures listed in the following table.

Table 48: 240 Vac DI FTA Connection Drawings

240 Vac Digital Input Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

FTA Model “Model MU-TDIA21, 240 Vac digital
input FTA Connection Diagram” on
page 429
“Model MU-TDIA22, 240 Vac digital “Model MU-TDIA22, 240 Vac digital
input FTA Connection Diagram” on input FTA assembly layout” on
page 430 page 432
“Model MU-TDIA62, 240 Vac digital “Model MU-TDIA62, 240 Vac digital
input FTA Connection Diagram” on input FTA assembly layout” on
page 431 page 433

428 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.39 Model MU-TDIA21, 240 Vac digital input FTA Connection Diagram

429
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.40 Model MU-TDIA22, 240 Vac digital input FTA Connection Diagram

430 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.41 Model MU-TDIA62, 240 Vac digital input FTA Connection Diagram

431
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.42 Model MU-TDIA22, 240 Vac digital input FTA assembly layout

432 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.3.43 Model MU-TDIA62, 240 Vac digital input FTA assembly layout

433
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4 Digital Output (DO) Wiring

Various types of digital output FTAs provide low voltage isolated or nonisolated outputs, solid-state dc power
outputs, and high voltage ac and dc relay closures to process field devices. Model number groups and a brief
description is given in the following table.

Table 49: Digital Output FTA Model Numbers and Types

Model Number Group Output Type Description

MU/MC-TDONxx “24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital 24 Vdc nonisolated Digital Output (DO) FTAs provide 16
Output (DO) FTAs” on nonisolated digital outputs for low current loads such as lamps
page 434 and relays.
MU/MC-TDOYxx “24 Vdc Isolated Digital 24 Vdc isolated Digital Output (DO) FTAs provide 32 isolated
Output FTAs” on page 440 digital outputs. The output drivers in the IOP are optically
isolated from PM common and can drive loads requiring up to
500 mA at 24 Vdc.
MU/MC-TDODxx “3-30 Vdc Solid-State 3-30 Vdc solid-state Digital Output (DO) FTA provides 16
Digital Output (DO) FTAs” direct current power outputs that are optically isolated from
on page 445 each other and the subsystem.
MU/MC-TDODxx “31-200 Vdc Solid-State 31-200 Vdc solid-state Digital Output (DO) FTAs provide 16
Digital Output (DO) FTAs” optically isolated dc power outputs.
on page 458
MU/MC-TDOAxx “120/240 Vac Solid-State The 120/240 Vac solid-state Digital Output (DO) FTAs
Digital Output (DO) FTAs” provide 16 independent solid-state ac power outputs.
on page 468
MU/MC-TDORxx “120 Vac/125 Vdc Relay 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay Digital Output (DO) FTAs have 16
Digital Output (DO) FTAs” independent electromechanical relays for ac or dc power
on page 478 outputs.
MU/MC-TDOYxx “240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay 240 Vac/125 Vdc relay Digital Output (DO) FTAs have 16
Digital Output (DO) FTAs” independent electromechanical relays for ac or dc power
on page 486 outputs.

17.4.1 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output (DO) FTAs

The 24 Vdc nonisolated Digital Output (DO) FTA provides 16 nonisolated digital outputs for low current loads
such as lamps and relays.

17.4.2 CE Compliance for 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output (DO) FTAs

None of the 24 Vdc nonisolated Digital Output (DO) FTAs are CE Compliant. The model MU-TDOD14 and
MU-TDOD54 3-30 Vdc Digital Output FTAs are recommended for CE Compliance applications.
The following table is a list of 24 Vdc nonisolated Digital Output FTA Models and compatible digital output
IOPs.

Table 50: 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output FTAs and DO IOPs

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-TDON11 24 Vdc Nonisolated DO FTA 51401220-100 N/A
Compression Terminals

434 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-TDON12 24 Vdc Nonisolated DO FTA 51304446-100 N/A
Compression Terminals
MC-TDON12 24 Vdc Nonisolated DO FTA 51304446-150 N/A
Compression Terminals-Conformally Coated
MU-TDON52 24 Vdc Nonisolated DO FTA-Screw Terminals 51304446-200 N/A
MC-TDON52 24 Vdc Nonisolated DO FTA 51304446-250 N/A
Screw Terminals-Conformally Coated
Supporting IOPs
MU-PDOX02 Digital Output IOP N/A 51304487-100
MC-PDOX02 Digital Output IOP-Conformally Coated N/A 51304487-150

17.4.3 IOP compatibility for 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output (DO) FTAs
The model MU-PDOX02 Digital Output IOP is compatible with all 24 Vdc nonisolated DO FTA models.

CAUTION
The output terminals of the FTA are directly connected to the electronics in the associated Digital Output IOP
through the IOP to FTA cable. With no isolation between the FTA field terminals and the electronics in the IOP,
any noise or voltage induced into the field wiring will be injected into the IOP electronics. This could result in
temporary or permanent failure in the IOP. A worst case scenario would be a voltage spike that propagates to the
card file backplane and damages other cards, possibly causing the IOLIM to fail. It's also possible that a redundant
IOP configuration could fail.

Because there is no isolation, the FTA output terminals must not be wired directly to a field device. An isolation
relay must be used between the FTA output terminals and a field device.

Table 51: 24 Vdc Nonisolated DO FTA Connection Drawings

24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

FTA Model “Model MU-TDON11/MU-TDON12,
24 Vdc nonisolated DO FTA
connection diagram” on page 437
“Model MU-TDON11/MU-TDON12, “Model MU-TDON12, 24 Vdc
24 Vdc nonisolated DO FTA nonisolated digital output FTA
connection diagram” on page 437 assembly layout” on page 439
“Model MU-TDON52, 24 Vdc “Model MU-TDOA52, 24 Vdc
nonisolated digital output FTA nonisolated digital output FTA
connection diagram” on page 438 assembly layout” on page 440

17.4.4 Recommended installation practices

The IOP and FTA must be located in the control room, or some similar structure, and connected only to other
isolated components. The FTA outputs are designed to drive only light duty relays, solenoids, and small lamps.
The IOP drivers are open collector (current sinking) transistors connected to logic ground. Only the low side of
the load should be connected to the driver. The high side of the load must be connected to +24 Vdc. The
maximum current must not exceed 100 mA.

435
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.5 Signals internally referenced to ground

The signals are internally referenced to logic common and local Master Reference Ground (MRG).

17.4.6 Diode suppression

An inductive load, such as a relay or solenoid, must be suppressed by installing a diode across the load
connection at the load as illustrated for Load 16 in “Figure 117: Model MU-TDON11/MU-TDON12 24 Vdc
Nonisolated DO FTA Connection Diagram” and “Figure 118: Model MU-TDON52 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital
Output FTA Connection Diagram”.
The vertical bus bar illustrated in “Figure 117: Model MU-TDON11/MU-TDON12 24 Vdc Nonisolated DO
FTA Connection Diagram” and “Figure 118: Model MU-TDON52 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output FTA
Connection Diagram” that provides grounding for the signal cable shields is attached to the FTA mounting
channel that the FTA is mounted on. Use a 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) wire to ground the bus bar to Master Reference
Ground. For a CE Compliance application, Safety Ground must be used.

17.4.7 Field circuit fuses

The branch circuit fuses in “Figure 117: Model MU-TDON11/MU-TDON12 24 Vdc Nonisolated DO FTA
Connection Diagram” and “Figure 118: Model MU-TDON52 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output FTA
Connection Diagram” are not standard Honeywell assemblies. Mount the outside vendor-purchased fuse blocks
on the side of the cabinet beside the FTA.

17.4.8 Use approved cable

Use only cable approved for circuit current limiting and proper operating voltage.

17.4.9 24 Vdc connections

The FTA has internal clamping diodes to clamp inductive loads such as relays and solenoids. The diodes have a
common bus that is available at TB1-18.
“Figure 117: Model MU-TDON11/MU-TDON12 24 Vdc Nonisolated DO FTA Connection Diagram” and
“Figure 118: Model MU-TDON52 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output FTA Connection Diagram” illustrate how
the clamping bus at TB1-18 is connected to TB1-17 when using the internal 24 Vdc that is available in the
FTA.
It also demonstrates how the clamping bus at TB1-18 can be connected to an external 24 Vdc power source
when not using the FTA's internal 24 Vdc power.

CAUTION
When using an external 24 volt power source, a ground return is an absolute requirement.

17.4.10 TB1-18 connection

Connection of the 24 Vdc power source to TB1-18 is important and is required internally by the 24 Vdc Digital
Output IOP as a reference voltage when the digital outputs are checked by the IOP during a readback
diagnostic. Without the proper TB1-18 connection to the 24 Vdc power source, the IOP will not operate
correctly.

436 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

CAUTION
The FTA will not operate properly unless connections to TB1-17, TB1-18, and TB1-19 are made according to
“Figure 117: Model MU-TDON11/MU-TDON12 24 Vdc Nonisolated DO FTA Connection Diagram” and “Figure
118: Model MU-TDON52 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output FTA Connection Diagram”.

17.4.11 Model MU-TDON11/MU-TDON12, 24 Vdc nonisolated DO FTA connection diagram

Figure 117: Model MU-TDON11/MU-TDON12 24 Vdc Nonisolated DO FTA Connection Diagram

437
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.12 Model MU-TDON52, 24 Vdc nonisolated digital output FTA connection diagram

Figure 118: Model MU-TDON52 24 Vdc Nonisolated Digital Output FTA Connection Diagram

438 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.13 Model MU-TDON12, 24 Vdc nonisolated digital output FTA assembly layout

439
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.14 Model MU-TDOA52, 24 Vdc nonisolated digital output FTA assembly layout

17.4.15 24 Vdc Isolated Digital Output FTAs

The 24 Vdc isolated Digital Output (DO) FTAs provide 32 isolated digital outputs. The output drivers in the
IOP are optically isolated from PM common and can drive loads requiring up to 500 mA at 24 Vdc.
None of the 24 Vdc isolated DO FTAs are CE Compliant. For CE Compliance applications, the model MU-
TDOD14 and MU-TDOD54 3-30 Vdc Digital Output FTAs are recommended.
The following table is a list of 24 Vdc isolated Digital Output FTA Models and compatible digital output IOPs.

Table 52: 24 Vdc Isolated Digital Output (DO) Standard FTA Types and Part Numbers

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-TDOY22 24 Vdc Isolated DO FTA 80366183-100 80366183-125
Compression Terminals
MC-TDOY22 24 Vdc Isolated DO FTA 80366183-150 80366183-175
Compression Terminals-Conformally Coated
MU-TDOY62 24 Vdc Isolated DO FTA-Screw Terminals 80364013-100 80364013-125
MC-TDOY62 24 Vdc Isolated DO FTA 80364013-150 80364013-175
Screw Terminals-Conformally Coated

440 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
Supporting IOPs
MU-PDOY22 Digital Output IOP N/A 80363975-100
MC-PDOY22 Digital Output IOP-Conformally Coated N/A 80363975-150

17.4.16 External 24 Vdc power source

An external 24 Vdc power source must be provided by the user and connected to TB1-1 (+) and TB1-2 (-) for
the FTA output loads.
To guarantee signal isolation, the 24 Vdc external power source must be an independent power supply. It must
not be the PM Power System that provides power to the FTA through the IOP. The external power source must
be capable of providing up to 5 amperes for the 32 channels (points).

17.4.17 FTA fuse protection

Model MU-TDOY22 FTA fuse protection is provided by sixteen fast-action 1.6 A fuses for each pair of output
circuits. See “Model MU-TDOY22, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA connection diagram” on page 442.
Model MU-TDOY62 FTA fuse protection is provided by four fast-action 1.6 A fuses for each group of eight
output circuits. See “Model MU-TDOY62, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA connection diagram” on
page 443.
Connection diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring and assembly layout drawings that show the physical
layout of the 24 Vdc DO FTAs are given in the following figures listed in the following table.

Table 53: 24 Vdc DO FTA Connection Drawings

24 Vdc Isolated Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

Digital Output
FTA Model “Model MU-TDOY22, 24 Vdc isolated “Model MU-TDOY22, 24 Vdc isolated
digital output FTA connection digital output FTA assembly layout” on
diagram” on page 442 page 444
“Model MU-TDOY62, 24 Vdc isolated “Model MU-TDOY62, 24 Vdc isolated
digital output FTA connection digital output FTA assembly layout” on
diagram” on page 443 page 445

The vertical bus bar illustrated in “Model MU-TDOY22, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA connection
diagram” on page 442 and “Model MU-TDOY62, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA connection diagram” on
page 443that provides grounding for the signal cable shields is attached to the FTA mounting channel that the
FTA is mounted on. Use a 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) wire to ground the bus bar to Master Reference Ground. For CE
Compliance applications, Safety Ground must be used.
Use only cable approved for circuit current limiting and proper operating voltage.

CAUTION
An inductive load, such as a relay or solenoid, must be suppressed by installing a diode across the load connection
at the load as illustrated for Load 2 in “Model MU-TDOY22, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA connection
diagram” on page 442 and “Model MU-TDOY62, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA connection diagram” on
page 443.
Also see “Contact Arc Suppression” on page 493.

441
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.18 Model MU-TDOY22, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA connection diagram

Figure 119: Model MU-TDOY22, 24 Vdc Isolated Digital Output FTA Connection Diagram

442 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.19 Model MU-TDOY62, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA connection diagram

Figure 120: Model MU-TDOY62, 24 Vdc Isolated Digital Output FTA Connection Diagram

443
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.20 Model MU-TDOY22, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA assembly layout

444 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.21 Model MU-TDOY62, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA assembly layout

17.4.22 3-30 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output (DO) FTAs

The 3-30 Vdc solid-state Digital Output (DO) FTA provides 16 direct current power outputs that are optically
isolated from each other and the subsystem.
Some 3-30 Vdc solid-state Digital Output (DO) FTAs are CE Compliant, while others are not CE Compliant.
Generally, CE Compliant assemblies are identified by a part number tab number that ends in “25” or “75.”
CE Compliant FTAs have an FTA connector with a grounded body that accepts the CE Compliant model MU-
KFTSxx IOP to FTA cable. The CE Compliant and non-CE Compliant 3-30 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output
FTA models with their part numbers are listed in the following table.

Table 54: 3-30 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output FTA and DO IOP Models

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-TDOD11 3-30 Vdc SS DO FTA-Compression Terminals 51301220-100 N/A
MU-TDOD12 3-30 Vdc SS DO FTA-Compression Terminals 51304423-100 N/A
MC-TDOD12 3-30 Vdc SS DO FTA 51304423-150 N/A
Compression Terminals-Conformally Coated
MU-TDOD13 3-30 Vdc SS DO FTA-Compression Terminals 51304650-100 N/A

445
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MC-TDOD13 3-30 Vdc SS DO FTA 51304650-150 N/A
Compression Terminals-Conformally Coated
MU-TDOD14 3-30 Vdc SS DO FTA-Compression Terminals N/A 51309153-125
MC-TDOD14 3-30 Vdc SS DO FTA N/A 51309153-175
Compression Terminals-Conformally Coated
MU-TDOD52 3-30 Vdc SS DO FTA-Screw Terminals 51304423-200 N/A
MC-TDOD52 3-30 Vdc SS DO FTA 51304423-250 N/A
Screw Terminals-Conformally Coated
MU-TDOD53 3-30 Vdc SS DO FTA-Screw Terminals 51304650-200 N/A
MC-TDOD53 3-30 Vdc SS DO FTA 51304650-250 N/A
Screw Terminals-Conformally Coated
MU-TDOD54 3-30 Vdc SS DO FTA -Screw Terminals N/A 51309153-225
MC-TDOD54 3-30 Vdc SS DO FTA N/A 51309153-275
Screw Terminals-Conformally Coated
Supporting IOPs
MU-PDOX02 Digital Output IOP N/A 51304487-100
MC-PDOX02 Digital Output IOP-Conformally Coated N/A 51304487-150

The model MU-PDOX02 Digital Output IOP is compatible with all 3-30 Vdc solid-state DO FTA models.

Table 55: 3-30 Vdc SS DO FTA Connection Drawings

3 - 30 Vdc Solid-State Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

Digital Output
FTA Model “Model MU-TDOD11/MU-TDOD12,
3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA
connection diagram” on page 447
“Model MU-TDOD11/MU-TDOD12, “Model MU-TDOD12, 3-30 Vdc solid-
3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA state digital output FTA assembly
connection diagram” on page 447 layout” on page 453
“Model MU-TDOD13, 3-30 Vdc solid- “Model MU-TDOD13, 3-30 Vdc solid-
state digital output FTA connection state digital output FTA assembly
diagram” on page 448 layout” on page 454
“Model MU-TDOD14, 3-30 Vdc solid- “Model MU-TDOD14, 3-30 Vdc solid-
state digital output FTA connection state digital output FTA assembly
diagram” on page 449 layout” on page 455
“Model MU-TDOD52, 3-30 Vdc solid- “Model MU-TDOD52, 3-30 Vdc solid-
state digital output FTA connection state digital output FTA assembly
diagram” on page 450 layout” on page 456
“Model MU-TDOD53, 3-30 Vdc solid- “Model MU-TDOD53, 3-30 Vdc solid-
state digital output FTA connection state digital output FTA assembly
diagram” on page 451 layout” on page 457
“Model MU-TDOD54, 3-30 Vdc solid- “Model MU-TDOD54, 3-30 Vdc solid-
state digital output FTA connection state digital output FTA assembly
diagram” on page 452 layout” on page 458

446 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

The + and - output polarity must be strictly observed for each output. Signals from the FTA are normally
considered as power circuits and, therefore, are subject to electrical codes. Check your site planning drawings
and use only cable approved for the voltage and current limiting.
The vertical bus bar illustrated in “Model MU-TDOY22, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA connection
diagram” on page 442 and “Model MU-TDOY62, 24 Vdc isolated digital output FTA connection diagram” on
page 443that provides grounding for the signal cable shields is attached to the FTA mounting channel that the
FTA is mounted on. Use a 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) wire to ground the bus bar to Master Reference Ground. For CE
Compliance applications, Safety Ground must be used.
Any cable shield/ground connects to the local Safety Ground at the cabinet entry.
In the connection diagrams, two different load connection schemes are shown. For loads 1 through 8, a 5 Vdc
load power source is used and the FTA solid-state switches source current to the loads. For loads 9 through 16, a
24 Vdc load power source is used and the FTA solid-state switches sink current from the loads. Either type of
connection is satisfactory as long as the + and - output polarity of each output is observed for both the FTA
solid-state relay and the load. As examples, the proper direction of current flow is shown for loads 8 and 16.

Attention
Each solid-state relay is a normally open power transistor switch with load switching characteristics. Surge current
ratings for inductive loads are normally nonrepetitive, meaning that sufficient recovery time must occur between
successive surges to allow the power transistor junction temperature to return to normal. The recovery time is longer
for larger surge currents and/or higher ambient temperatures. Typical recovery time is about 30 seconds for an 8 amp,
50 millisecond surge, and about five minutes for a 5 amp, 1 second surge.

17.4.23 Model MU-TDOD11/MU-TDOD12, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram

447
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.24 Model MU-TDOD13, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram

448 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.25 Model MU-TDOD14, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram

449
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.26 Model MU-TDOD52, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram

450 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.27 Model MU-TDOD53, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram

451
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.28 Model MU-TDOD54, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram

452 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.29 Model MU-TDOD12, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout

453
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.30 Model MU-TDOD13, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout

454 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.31 Model MU-TDOD14, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout

455
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.32 Model MU-TDOD52, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout

456 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.33 Model MU-TDOD53, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout

457
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.34 Model MU-TDOD54, 3-30 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout

17.4.35 31-200 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output (DO) FTAs

The 31-200 Vdc solid-state Digital Output (DO) FTAs provide 16 optically isolated dc power outputs.

WARNING
Risk of electrical shock: Potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4
Vpeak, or 60 VDC may be accessible.

Some 31-200 Vdc solid-state Digital Output (DO) Field Termination Assemblies are CE Compliant, while
others are not CE Compliant. Generally, CE Compliant assemblies are identified by a part number tab number
that ends in “25” or “75.”
CE Compliant FTAs have an FTA connector with a grounded body that accepts the CE Compliant model MU-
KFTSxx IOP to FTA cable.
The CE Compliant and non-CE Compliant 31-200 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output FTA models with their part
numbers are listed in the following table.

Table 56: 31-200 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output FTAs and DO IOPs

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-TDOD21 31-200 Vdc SS DO FTA Compression Terminals 51301223-100 N/A
MU-TDOD22 31-200 Vdc SS DO FTA Compression Terminals 51304428-100 N/A

458 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MC-TDOD22 31-200 Vdc SS DO FTA Compression Terminals- 51304428-150 N/A
Conformally Coated
MU-TDOD23 31-200 Vdc SS DO FTA Compression Terminals N/A 51309154-125
MC-TDOD23 31-200 Vdc SS DO FTA Compression Terminals- N/A 51309154-175
Conformally Coated
MU-TDOD62 31-200 Vdc SS DO FTA-Screw Terminals 51304428-200 N/A
MC-TDOD62 31-200 Vdc SS DO FTA Screw Terminals-Conformally 51304428-250 N/A
Coated
MU-TDOD63 31-200 Vdc SS DO FTA-Screw Terminals N/A 51309154-225
MC-TDOD63 31-200 Vdc SS DO FTA Screw Terminals-Conformally N/A 51309154-275
Coated
Supporting IOPs
MU-PDOX02 Digital Output IOP N/A 51304487-100
MC-PDOX02 Digital Output IOP-Conformally Coated N/A 51304487-150

The model MU-PDOX02 Digital Output IOP is compatible with all 31-200 Vdc solid-state DO FTA models.

Table 57: 31-200 Vdc Solid-State DO FTA Connection Drawings

13 - 200 Vdc Solid-State Digital Output Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

FTA Model “Model MU-TDOD21/MU-TDOD22,
31-200 Vdc SS DO FTA connection
diagram” on page 461
“Model MU-TDOD21/MU-TDOD22, “Model MU-TDOD22, 31-200 Vdc
31-200 Vdc SS DO FTA connection solid-state digital output FTA assembly
diagram” on page 461 layout” on page 465
“Model MU-TDOD23, 31-200 Vdc “Model MU-TDOD23, 31-200 Vdc
solid-state digital output FTA solid-state digital output FTA assembly
connection diagram” on page 462 layout” on page 466
“Model MU-TDOD62, 31-200 Vdc “Model MU-TDOD62, 31-200 Vdc
solid-state digital output FTA solid-state digital output FTA assembly
connection diagram” on page 463 layout” on page 467
“Model MU-TDOD63, 31-200 Vdc “Model MU-TDOD63, 31-200 Vdc
solid-state digital output FTA solid-state digital output FTA assembly
connection diagram” on page 464 layout” on page 468

17.4.36 Observe polarity

The + and - output polarity must be strictly observed for each output.

17.4.37 Signals subject to electrical codes

Signals from the FTA are normally considered as power circuits and therefore are subject to electrical codes.
Check your site planning drawings and use only cable approved for the voltage and current limiting.

459
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.38 Vertical bus bars

The vertical bus bar shown in the connection diagrams is a Honeywell part. The bar is mounted on an FTA
mounting channel. Use a 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) wire to connect the Safety Ground bus to local Safety Ground.

17.4.39 Cable shield connections

Any cable shield/ground connects to the local Safety Ground at the cabinet entry.

17.4.40 Connection schemes

In the following connection diagrams, two different load-connection schemes are shown. For loads 1 through 8,
the FTA solid-state switches source current to the loads. For loads 9 through 16, the FTA solid-state switches
sink current from the loads. Either type of connection is satisfactory as long as the + and - output polarity of
each output is observed for both the FTA solid-state relay and the load. As examples, the proper direction of
current flow is shown for loads 9 and 16.

Attention
Each solid-state relay is a normally open power transistor switch with load switching characteristics. Surge current
ratings for inductive loads are normally nonrepetitive, meaning that sufficient recovery time must occur between
successive surges to allow the power transistor junction temperature to return to normal. The recovery time is longer
for larger surge currents and/or higher ambient temperatures. Typical recovery time is about 30 seconds for an 8 amp,
50 millisecond surge and about five minutes for a 5 amp, 1 second surge.

460 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.41 Model MU-TDOD21/MU-TDOD22, 31-200 Vdc SS DO FTA connection diagram

461
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.42 Model MU-TDOD23, 31-200 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram

462 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.43 Model MU-TDOD62, 31-200 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram

463
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.44 Model MU-TDOD63, 31-200 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram

464 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.45 Model MU-TDOD22, 31-200 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout

465
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.46 Model MU-TDOD23, 31-200 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout

466 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.47 Model MU-TDOD62, 31-200 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout

467
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.48 Model MU-TDOD63, 31-200 Vdc solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout

Modules M1 through M16 contain 1.0 A time-delay fuses.

17.4.49 120/240 Vac Solid-State Digital Output (DO) FTAs

The 120/240 Vac solid-state Digital Output (DO) FTA provides 16 independent solid-state ac power outputs.
The compatible IOP and FTA support 16 control points (channels).

468 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

WARNING
Risk of electrical shock: Potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4
Vpeak, or 60 VDC may be accessible..

Some 120/240 Vac solid-state Digital Output (DO) Field Termination Assemblies are CE Compliant, and others
are not. CE Compliant assemblies are identified by a part number tab number that ends in “25” or “75.” They do
not have a unique model number.
CE Compliant FTAs have an FTA connector with a grounded body that accepts the CE Compliant model MU-
KFTSxx IOP to FTA cable.
The CE Compliant and non-CE Compliant models with their part numbers are listed in the following table.

Table 58: 120/240 Vac Solid-State Digital Output FTAs and DO IOPs

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-TDOA11 120/240 Vac SS DO FTA Compression Terminals 51301157-100 N/A
MU-TDOA12 120/240 Vac SS DO FTA Compression Terminals 51304408-100 N/A
MC-TDOA12 120/240 Vac SS DO FTA Compression Terminals- 51304408-150 N/A
Conformally Coated
MU-TDOA13 120/240 Vac SS DO FTA Compression Terminals 51304648-100 51304648-125
MC-TDOA13 120/240 Vac SS DO FTA Compression Terminals- 51304648-150 51304648-175
Conformally Coated
MU-TDOA52 120/240 Vac SS DO FTA-Screw Terminals 51304408-200 N/A
MC-TDOA52 120/240 Vac SS DO FTA Screw Terminals-Conformally 51304408-250 N/A
Coated
MU-TDOA53 120/240 Vac SS DO FTA-Screw Terminals 51304648-200 51304648-225
MC-TDOA53 120/240 Vac SS DO FTA Screw Terminals-Conformally 51304648-250 51304648-275
Coated
Supporting IOPs
MU-PDOX02 Digital Output IOP N/A 51304487-100
MC-PDOX02 Digital Output IOP-Conformally Coated N/A 51304487-150

The model MU-PDOX02 Digital Output IOP is compatible with all 120/240 Vac solid-state DO FTA models.

Table 59: Table 24 120/240 Vac Solid-State Digital Output FTA Connection Drawings

120/240 Vac Solid-State Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

Digital Output
FTA Model “Model MU-TDOA11/MU-TDOA12,
120/240 Vac solid-state digital output
FTA connection diagram” on page 471
“Model MU-TDOA11/MU-TDOA12, “Model MU-TDOA12, 120/240 Vac
120/240 Vac solid-state digital output solid-state digital output FTA assembly
FTA connection diagram” on page 471 layout” on page 475
“Model MU-TDOA13, 120/240 Vac “Model MU-TDOA13, 120/240 Vac
solid-state digital output FTA solid-state digital output FTA assembly
connection diagram” on page 472 layout” on page 476
“Model MU-TDOA52, 120/240 Vac “Model MU-TDOA52, 120/240 Vac
solid-state digital output FTA solid-state digital output FTA assembly
connection diagram” on page 473 layout” on page 477

469
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

120/240 Vac Solid-State Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

Digital Output
“Model MU-TDOA53, 120/240 Vac “Model MU-TDOA53, 120/240 Vac
solid-state digital output FTA solid-state digital output FTA assembly
connection diagram” on page 474 layout” on page 478

17.4.50 Power phase

Out-of-phase 120 Vac load power can be used for adjacent outputs because inter-output circuitry is rated for 240
Vac rms. When using 240 Vac load power, adjacent channels must use the same load power phase to avoid
exceeding the 240 Vac inter-channel limit.

17.4.51 Surge current and recovery time

Each solid-state relay is a normally open triac switch with 0 voltage turn-on and 0 current turn-off load
switching characteristics. Surge current ratings for inductive loads are normally nonrepetitive, meaning that
sufficient recovery time must occur between successive surges to allow the triac junction temperature to return
to normal. The recovery time is longer for larger surge currents and/or higher ambient temperatures. Typical
recovery times vary between 30 seconds for 10 amp surges to 5 minutes for 50 amp surges.

17.4.52 Solid-state relay ratings

Below 500C ambient (outside the cabinet), each solid-state relay is rated for 2 amps for 120 Vac or 240 Vac rms
loads. Above 500C ambient, the total rating for a pair of adjacent outputs, such as outputs 1 and 2 and outputs 2
and 3, etc., must be limited to no more than 2.5 amperes, although the individual limit of 2 amperes remains.

CAUTION
Loads with a power factor less than 0.5 can damage the solid-state relays used on the FTA and cause improper
operation of the loads. For such loads, additional snubbing must be provided across the FTA (solid-state relay)
terminals to protect the solid-state switch (a snubber placed across the load terminals may not protect as well). A
recommended snubber is a 100-ohm resistor in series with a 0.1-microfarad capacitor (400 Vdc rating for 120 Vac
loads, or 600 Vdc rating for 240 Vac loads).

17.4.53 Power Factor calculation

EXAMPLE
A 120 Vac motor starter load has a measured dc resistance of 55 ohms and a specified steady-state running
current equal to 230 milliamps; therefore, the total impedance is 120 Vac divided by 230 milliamps or 522
ohms. The reactive component of impedance (X) can be found from the equation:
X = √(Z2-R2)
where: R = DC resistance
Z = Total impedance
In this example, X is calculated to be 519 ohms.
The Power Factor (PF) is then calculated as:
PF = cosine (arctanX/R) = cosine (arctan 519/55) = cosine 83.90 = 0.105.
Therefore, the calculated power factor is below the minimum recommended 0.5 and additional snubbing must
be added as described in the CAUTION above.

470 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.54 Vertical bus bar

There is usually a safety conductor for each circuit. A vertical bus bar is usually also required to handle the
volume of Safety Ground conductors used with these FTAs. Connect each Safety Ground to the vertical bus and
connect the vertical bus bar to the local Safety Ground bus bar with a 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) wire.

17.4.55 Model MU-TDOA11/MU-TDOA12, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA connection
diagram

471
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.56 Model MU-TDOA13, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram

472 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.57 Model MU-TDOA52, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram

473
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.58 Model MU-TDOA53, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA connection diagram

474 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.59 Model MU-TDOA12, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout

475
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.60 Model MU-TDOA13, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout

476 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.61 Model MU-TDOA52, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout

477
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.62 Model MU-TDOA53, 120/240 Vac solid-state digital output FTA assembly layout

17.4.63 120 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Digital Output (DO) FTAs

The 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay Digital Output (DO) FTA has 16 independent electromechanical relays for ac or dc
power outputs. The compatible IOP and the FTA support 16 control points (channels).

WARNING
Risk of electrical shock: Potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4
Vpeak, or 60 VDC may be accessible..

Some 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay Digital Output (DO) Field Termination Assemblies are CE Compliant, while
others are not CE Compliant. The CE Compliant assemblies are identified by a part number tab number that
ends in “25” or “75.” They do not have a unique model number.
CE Compliant FTAs have an FTA connector with a grounded body that accepts the CE Compliant model MU-
KFTSxx IOP to FTA cable.
The CE Compliant and non-CE Compliant models with their part numbers are listed in the following table.

Table 60: 120 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Digital Output FTAs and DO IOPs

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-TDOR11 120 Vac/125 Vdc Relay DO FTA Compression Terminals 51301191-100 N/A
MU-TDOR12 120 Vac/125 Vdc Relay DO FTA Compression Terminals 51304443-100 51309148-125

478 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MC-TDOR12 120 Vac/125 Vdc Relay DO FTA Compression Terminals- 51304443-150 51309148-175
Conformally Coated
MU-TDOR52 120 Vac/125 Vdc Relay DO FTA Screw Terminals 51304443-200 51309148-225
MC-TDOR52 120 Vac/125 Vdc Relay DO FTA Screw Terminals- 51304443-250 51309148-275
Conformally Coated
Supporting IOPs
MU-PDOX02 Digital Output IOP N/A 51304487-100
MC-PDOX02 Digital Output IOP-Conformally Coated N/A 51304487-150

17.4.64 IOP compatibility

The model MU-PDOX02 Digital Output IOP is compatible with all 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay Digital
Output ;FTAs models.

Table 61: 120 Vac/125 Vdc Relay DO FTA Connection Drawings

120 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

Digital Output
FTA Model “Model MU-TDOR11/MU-TDOR12,
120 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output
FTA connection diagram” on page 481
“Model MU-TDOR11/MU-TDOR12, “Model MU-TDOR12, 120 Vac/125
120 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly
FTA connection diagram” on page 481 layout -non-CE compliant” on
page 483
(Non-CE compliant)
“Model MU-TDOR12, 120 Vac/125
Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly
layout -CE compliant” on page 484
(CE compliant)
“Model MU-TDOR52, 120 Vac/125 “Model MU-TDOR52, 120 Vac/125
Vdc relay digital output FTA Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly
connection diagram” on page 482 layout -non-CE compliant” on
page 485
(Non-CE compliant)
“Model MU-TDOR52, 120 Vac/125
Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly
layout -CE compliant” on page 486
(CE compliant)

17.4.65 Electrical codes

Signals from the FTA are normally considered as signals from power circuits and therefore are subject to
electrical codes. Use only cable approved for the operating voltage and current limiting.

479
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.66 Out of phase power

Out of phase 120 Vac load power can be used with adjacent outputs because the inter-output circuitry is rated
for 240 Vac rms.

17.4.67 Vertical bus bar

There is usually a safety conductor for each circuit. A vertical bus bar is usually also required to handle the
volume of Safety Ground conductors used with these FTAs. Connect each Safety Ground to the vertical bus and
connect the vertical bus bar to the local Safety Ground bus bar with a 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) wire.

17.4.68 Cable shield grounding

Any cable shield/ground connects to Safety Ground at the cabinet entry.

17.4.69 Contact Arc Suppression

See “Contact Arc Suppression” on page 493 for a discussion of noise suppression and contact arc suppression.
Design calculations for the component values also can be found there.

17.4.70 Normally open/closed relay contact selection

The orientation of a pair of wire jumpers on the FTA for each relay, K1 (channel 1) through K16 (channel 16),
determines the relay's normal (deenergized) contact output to the channel's terminals. When the jumpers are
positioned horizontally, the normally open (N/O) relay contacts are selected. If the jumpers are positioned
vertically, the relay's normally closed (N/C) contacts are connected to the channel's terminals. The connection
diagrams illustrate examples of relay contact selection.

Attention
The 51301191-100 assembly and some older versions of the 51304443-xxx assembly have noninsulated (bare) wire
jumpers. The bare wire jumpers are more easily handled by using long nose pliers and must be handled only when no
load power is present at the FTA terminals.
All CE-compliant FTA assemblies (51309148-xxx) have insulated wire jumpers; however, as a safety precaution, the
wire jumpers should only be handled when no load power is present at the field terminals.

480 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.71 Model MU-TDOR11/MU-TDOR12, 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA connection diagram

481
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.72 Model MU-TDOR52, 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA connection diagram

482 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.73 Model MU-TDOR12, 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly layout -non-CE
compliant

483
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.74 Model MU-TDOR12, 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly layout -CE compliant

484 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.75 Model MU-TDOR52, 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly layout -non-CE
compliant

485
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.76 Model MU-TDOR52, 120 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly layout -CE compliant

17.4.77 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Digital Output (DO) FTAs

CAUTION
CAUTION, RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

The 240 Vac/125 Vdc relay Digital Output (DO) FTA has 16 independent electromechanical relays for ac or dc
power outputs. The compatible IOP and the FTA support 16 control points (channels). These FTA models and
part numbers are listed in the following table.
Some 240 Vac/125 Vdc relay Digital Output (DO) Field Termination Assemblies are CE Compliant, while
others are not CE Compliant. The CE Compliant assemblies are identified by a part number tab number that
ends in “25” or “75.” They do not have a unique model number.
CE Compliant FTAs have an FTA connector with a grounded body that accepts the CE Compliant model MU-
KFTSxx IOP to FTA cable. The CE Compliant and non-CE Compliant models with their part numbers are listed
in the following table.

Table 62: 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Digital Output FTAs and Part Numbers

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-TDOY23 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay ;DO FTA 80366189-100 80366189-125
Compression Terminals

486 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MC-TDOY23 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay ;DO FTA 80366189-150 80366189-175
Compression Terminals-Conformally Coated
MU-TDOY63 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay ;DO FTA 80366186-100 80366186-125
Screw Terminals
MC-TDOY63 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay ;DO FTA 80366186-150 80366186-175
Screw Terminals-Conformally Coated
Supporting IOPs
MU-PDOY22 Digital Output IOP N/A 80363975-100
MC-PDOY22 Digital Output IOP-Conformally Coated N/A 80363975-150

17.4.78 Electrical codes

Signals from the FTA are normally considered as signals from power circuits and therefore are subject to
electrical codes. Use only cable approved for the operating voltage and current limiting.
Adjacent channels must use the same load power phase to avoid exceeding the 240 Vac interchannel circuitry
limit.

17.4.79 Vertical bus bar and cable shield grounding

There is usually a safety wire for each circuit. A vertical bus bar is usually required to handle the volume of
Safety Ground wires used with the FTAs. Connect each Safety Ground wire to the vertical bus bar and then
connect the vertical bus bar to the local Safety Ground bus bar with a 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) wire.
Any cable shield/ground must connect to Safety Ground at the cabinet entry.

17.4.80 Contact Arc Suppression

See “Contact Arc Suppression” on page 493 for a discussion of noise suppression and contact arc suppression.
Design calculations for the component values also can be found there.

17.4.81 Model MU-TDOY23/63 FTAs

CAUTION
CAUTION, RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

The model MU-PDOY22 IOP supports 32 points (output circuits). Because the model MU-TDOY23 and MU-
TDOY63 FTAs provide only 16 output circuits, two FTAs must be used to take advantage of the IOP's 32-point
capability.

17.4.82 FTA configuration pinning

Because the model MU-PDOY22 IOP supports 32 channels and the FTA supports only 16 channels, a method
of pinning is provided to signal the IOP(s) that an FTA is present or absent.
In a configuration where two FTAs are required, the “FTA Missing” status must be detected when only one FTA
is present; however, in a configuration where only one FTA is required, the “FTA Missing” status must not be
detected when only one FTA is present. A pinning method on the FTA(s) signals whether one or two FTA are
required.

487
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Four jumper positions are provided on the FTA to indicate the FTA configuration. The jumper positions are P17,
P18, P19, and P36. The jumper combinations are listed in the following table.

Table 63: Model MU-TDOY23/63 FTA Configuration Jumper Selection

Single FTA Configuration Dual FTA Configuration

(Position Selection) (Position Selection)
FTA 1 P17 and P18 P19 and P36
FTA 2 None P17 and P18

17.4.83 FTA cabling diagram

“Figure 121: Model MU-TDOY23/63 FTA Cabling Diagram” is a typical IOP to FTA cabling diagram. An
interface between the two FTAs is provided by a bridge cable. Two lengths, model MU-KBFT01 (1.0 meter) or
model MU-KBFT02 (2 meters), are available. The Honeywell part numbers are 80366198-100 and
80366198-200, respectively. J3 is the FTA bridge connector.
Connect the IOP, or IOPs when redundant, to only one FTA. The FTA selected is assigned channels 1 through
16 by the IOP. The “bridged” FTA is assigned channels 17 through 32.
When FTA A cable is disconnected, IOP A detects an “FTA Missing status. When FTA B cable is disconnected,
IOP B detects an “FTA Missing” status. When the bridge cable is disconnected in a dual FTA configuration,
both IOP A and IOP B detect an “FTA Missing” status. IOP B must be configured as redundant to detect an
“FTA Missing” status.

Figure 121: Model MU-TDOY23/63 FTA Cabling Diagram

17.4.84 Normally open/closed relay contact selection

The orientation of a wire jumper on the FTA for each relay, K1 (channel 1 or 17) through K16 (channel 16 or
32), determines the relay's normal (deenergized) contact output to the channel's field terminals. The jumper
positioners are designated P20 through P35, respectively. When the jumper is positioned horizontally, the
normally open (NO) relay contacts are selected. If the jumper is positioned vertically, the relay's normally

488 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

closed (NC) contacts are connected to the channel's field terminals. The following connection diagrams for
model MU-TDOY23 and MU-TDOY63 illustrate examples of the relay contact selection.

17.4.85 Reverse voltage suppression

The FTA offers optional reverse voltage suppression when the relay output load includes a large inductance. It
can be selected individually for each channel by inserting a jumper in positions P1 through P16 for channels 1
through 16 (17 through 36), respectively. Installing the jumper places a resistor-capacitor (RC) network across
the relay contacts.

CAUTION
The bare-wire jumpers are easily inserted by using long nose pliers, but only when no load power is present at the
FTA terminals.

Connection diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring and assembly layout drawings that show the physical
layout of 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay DO FTAs are given in the following figures listed in the following table.

Table 64: 240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay DO FTA Connection Drawings

240 Vac/125 Vdc Relay Connection Diagram Assembly Layout

Digital Output
FTA Model “Model MU-TDOY23, 240 Vac/125 “Model MU-TDOY23, 240 Vac/125
Vdc relay digital output FTA Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly
connection diagram” on page 490 layout” on page 492
“Model MU-TDOY63, 240 Vac/125 “Model MU-TDOY63, 240 Vac/125
Vdc relay digital output FTA Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly
connection diagram” on page 491 layout” on page 493

489
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.86 Model MU-TDOY23, 240 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA connection diagram

490 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.87 Model MU-TDOY63, 240 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA connection diagram

491
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.88 Model MU-TDOY23, 240 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly layout

492 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

17.4.89 Model MU-TDOY63, 240 Vac/125 Vdc relay digital output FTA assembly layout

17.4.90 Contact Arc Suppression

Before deenergizing an inductive load, such as a relay or solenoid coil, a certain amount of energy is stored in
the load. When the relay contact opens, deenergizing the load, a high voltage transient is produced. As
illustrated in the following figure, a MOV or RC circuit in parallel with the load that is as physically close to the
load as possible provides a place where this transient energy can be dissipated.
If there is no MOV or RC snubber circuit, however, the transient energy can create a visible arc across the
opening contacts. The arc contributes to electrical noise in the installed environment and degrades the life of the
relay contacts.

493
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Figure 122: Inductive Load Transient Overvoltage and EMI Suppression

One way to suppress an arc is to connect an MOV or RC circuit across the relay contacts as illustrated in the
following figure. The arc suppression network component values on the FTA have been properly coordinated
for use with the ac power mains to maximize relay contact life for load currents of up to 1 ampere for 120 Vac
models and 0.5 amperes for 240 Vac models.
If the relay contacts are used for higher load currents without additional suppression, contact life will be
reduced. For higher load currents, extra arc suppression with a resistor and capacitor (RC) is required as
illustrated in the following figure. The design calculations for the additional external component values are
found in Contact arc suppressor selection.
Both the 120 Vac/125 Vdc and 240 Vac/125 Vdc relay Digital Output FTAs can also accommodate dc loads of
up to 125 Vdc, and both types of FTAs use relays that are rated for 240 Vac. The RC snubber values are
different on the two types of FTA assemblies.

Figure 123: Relay Contacts Transient Overvoltage and EMI Suppression

17.4.91 Contact arc suppressor selection

Calculation for a resistor-capacitor contact arc suppressor is as follows:
Let Ip be the contact current immediately before opening, either average dc or peak ac.
Let Ep be the supply voltage before the closing of the contacts, either average dc or peak ac.

494 www.honeywell.com
 17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

Capacitor selection formula

Calculate the suppression capacitor C from the formula:
C = Ip2/10 microfarads
The current used in the calculation should be reduced by 1 ampere (120 Vac FTA) or 0.5 ampere (240 Vac FTA)
because the suppression circuit on the FTA already accommodates this level. Should a capacitance less than
0.001 microfarads be calculated, use 0.001 microfarads instead.

Resistor selection formula

Calculate the suppression resistor R from the formula
R = Ep/(10 x Ip(1 + 50/Ep)) ohms
As above, deduct 0.5 ampere before performing the calculation because the suppression circuit on the FTA
already accommodates this level. Should a resistance of less than 0.5 ohms be calculated, use 0.5 ohms instead.
An example
A 2-ampere ac rms 240 Vac load has a peak current of 2 x √2 = 2.83 amperes. Because the FTA already has 0.5
ampere peak of contact suppression on the FTA, calculate the suppressor for 2.83 - 0.5 = 2.33 amperes. The
peak voltage for 240 Vac is 240 x √2 = 339 volts.
C = 2.332/10
= 0.54 microfarad
R = 339/(10 x 2.33(1 + 50/339))
= 12.85 ohms
Install the arc suppressor across the FTA terminals to protect the relay contacts from excessive arcing.

495
17 APPENDIX C - PM I/O FTA REFERENCE

496 www.honeywell.com
18 Appendix D - GI FTA Reference

Galvanically Isolated (GI) FTAs can be used to provide an intrinsically safe interface directly to hazardous-area
processes. A variety of GI FTAs are available for analog output, analog input, digital input and digital output
and are described in the following table.

Model Number Group Signal Type Description

MU/MC-GAIHxx “High Level Analog Input High Level Analog Input (HLAI) galvanically isolated FTAs
(HLAI) GI FTA Wiring” on accommodate up to 16 high level dc signals. The FTAs provide dc
page 498 power to energize a 2-wire or 3-wire, 4-20 mA transmitter in a
hazardous area and repeat the current accurately in another circuit
to drive a range spool in the safe area, generating a 1 to 5 Vdc
signal to the associated IOP.
MU/MC-GAOXxx “Analog Output (AO) GI Galvanically isolated Analog Output (AO) FTAs isolate up to
FTA Wiring” on page 508 eight 4-20 mA signals that can drive current-to-pressure (I/P)
MU/MC-GHAOxx
transducers, position actuators, or any load of 750-ohms or less
from the associated Analog Output IOP.
MU/MC-GDIDxx “Digital Input (DI) GI FTA Digital Input (DI) galvanically isolated FTAs accommodate up to
Wiring” on page 516 32 switch or proximity detector inputs from a hazardous area,
isolates the signals, and presents them to the associated Digital
Input IOP in a safe area.
MU/MC-GDODxx “Digital Output (DO) GI Digital Output (DO) galvanically isolated FTA can drive up to 16
FTA Wiring” on page 522 certified intrinsically safe loads in a hazardous area. The load can
MU/MC-GDOLxx
be a solenoid or an alarm, as well as a nonenergy-storing “simple
apparatus,” such as an LED.

497
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.1 High Level Analog Input (HLAI) GI FTA Wiring

All High Level Analog Input (HLAI) Galvanically Isolated FTAs accommodate up to 16 high level dc signals.
The FTAs provide dc power to energize a 2-wire or 3-wire, 4-20 mA transmitter in a hazardous area and repeat
the current accurately in another circuit to drive a range spool in the safe area, generating a 1 to 5 Vdc signal to
the associated IOP.

18.1.1 FTA Compatibility

All FTAs are suitable for conventional field transmitters, while some FTA models also support HART and other
“smart” transmitters whose digital communication signals are superimposed on a standard 4-20 mA signal. The
available HLAI galvanically isolated FTA models are listed in the following table with a brief description and
the listed part numbers for both CE compliant and non-CE compliant versions.
Review Appendix F of the Control Hardware Planning Guide for more detailed descriptions of each FTA.

Table 65: Analog Input Galvanically Isolated FTA Types and Part Numbers

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-GAIH12 High Level Analog Input FTA- voltage outputs to 51304636-100 N/A
both the IOP and an auxiliary connector
MC-GAIH12 High Level Analog Input FTA- voltage outputs to 51304636-150 N/A
both the IOP and an auxiliary connector -
Conformally coated
MU-GAIH82 High Level Analog Input FTA- voltage outputs to 51304636-300 N/A
both the IOP and an auxiliary connector
MC-GAIH82 High Level Analog Input FTA- voltage outputs to 51304636-350 N/A
both the IOP and an auxiliary connector -
Conformally coated
MU-GAIH13 High Level Analog Input/HART/Smart Transmitter 51304718-100 51304718-125
Interface FTA- voltage outputs to both the IOP and an
auxiliary connector (See Note)
MC-GAIH13 High Level Analog Input/HART/Smart Transmitter 51304718-150 51304718-175
Interface FTA- voltage outputs to both the IOP and an
auxiliary connector - Conformally coated (See Note)
MU-GAIH83 High Level Analog Input/Smart Transmitter Interface 51304718-300 51304718-325
FTA- voltage outputs to both the IOP and an auxiliary
connector
MC-GAIH83 High Level Analog Input/Smart Transmitter Interface 51304718-350 51304718-375
FTA- voltage outputs to both the IOP and an auxiliary
connector - Conformally coated
MU-GAIH14 High Level Analog Input/HART/Smart Transmitter 51304730-100 51304730-125
Interface FTA- with device high drive and voltage
outputs to both the IOP and an auxiliary connector
(See Note)
MC-GAIH14 High Level Analog Input/HART/Smart Transmitter 51304730-150 51304730-175
Interface FTA- with device high drive and voltage
outputs to both the IOP and an auxiliary connector -
Conformally coated (See Note)
MU-GAIH84 High Level Analog Input/Smart Transmitter Interface 51304730-300 51304730-325
FTA- with device high drive and voltage outputs to
both the IOP and an auxiliary connector

498 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MC-GAIH84 High Level Analog Input/Smart Transmitter Interface 51304730-350 51304730-375
FTA- with device high drive and voltage outputs to
both the IOP and an auxiliary connector -
Conformally coated
MU-GAIH22 High Level Analog Input/HART Transmitter FTA- 51304748-100 51304748-125
with voltage outputs to the IOP and current outputs to
an auxiliary connector (Auxiliary receiver output)
(See Note)
MC-GAIH22 High Level Analog Input/HART Transmitter FTA- 51304748-150 51304748-175
with voltage outputs to the IOP and current outputs to
an auxiliary connector (Auxiliary receiver output) -
Conformally coated (See Note)
MU-GAIH92 High Level Analog Input FTA- with voltage outputs 51304748-300 51304748-325
to the IOP and current outputs to an auxiliary
connector (Auxiliary receiver output)
MC-GAIH92 High Level Analog Input FTA- with voltage outputs 51304748-350 51304748-325
to the IOP and current outputs to an auxiliary
connector (Auxiliary receiver output) - Conformally
coated
Note: HART compatible FTAs, models MC/MU-GAIH13, MC/MU-GAIH14 and MC/MU-GAIH22 are suitable for use
with the standard IOP, however the FTAs have not been ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1978 surge tested with the standard (non-
HART) HLAI IOP.

FTA Connector Connection Used For . . .

J17 FTA Cable A
J18 FTA Cable B (for redundant IOPs)
J19 Marshalling Panel
J20 and J21 24V dc input from Power Distribution Assembly

18.1.2 Field wiring input signals for High Level Analog Input (HLAI)
<replace with short description>
Each Galvanic Isolation Module on the HLAI FTA provides a floating dc source for energizing conventional 2-
wire or 3-wire 4-20 mA transmitters. The Galvanic Isolation Module accurately repeats the input current. The
module's 4-20 mA output current is converted into a 1 to 5 volt signal across a 250-ohm high precision resistor
and presented to the associated IOP.
Connection diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring and assembly layout drawings that show the physical
layout of the HLAI GI FTAs are given in the following figures listed in the following table.

Table 66: HLAI GI FTA Connection Drawings

High Level Analog Input Assembly Layout Connection Diagram

Galvanically Isolated
High Level Analog Input “Model MU-GAIH12/82 high level “Model MU-GAIH12/82 high level
Galvanically Isolated analog input GI FTA assembly layout” analog input GI FTA connection
on page 500 diagram” on page 501
“Model MU-GAIH13/83 high level “Model MU-GAIH13/83 high level
analog input GI FTA assembly layout” analog input GI FTA connection
on page 502 diagram” on page 503

499
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

High Level Analog Input Assembly Layout Connection Diagram

Galvanically Isolated
“Model MU-GAIH14/84 high level “Model MU-GAIH13/83 high level
analog input GI FTA assembly layout” analog input GI FTA connection
on page 504 diagram” on page 503
“Model MU-GAIH22/92 high level “Model MU-GAIH22/92 high level
analog input GI FTA assembly layout” analog input GI FTA connection
on page 506 diagram” on page 507

18.1.3 Model MU-GAIH12/82 high level analog input GI FTA assembly layout

500 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.1.4 Model MU-GAIH12/82 high level analog input GI FTA connection diagram

501
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.1.5 Model MU-GAIH13/83 high level analog input GI FTA assembly layout

502 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.1.6 Model MU-GAIH13/83 high level analog input GI FTA connection diagram

503
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.1.7 Model MU-GAIH14/84 high level analog input GI FTA assembly layout

504 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.1.8 Model MU-GAIH14/84 high level analog input GI FTA connection diagram

505
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.1.9 Model MU-GAIH22/92 high level analog input GI FTA assembly layout

506 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.1.10 Model MU-GAIH22/92 high level analog input GI FTA connection diagram

507
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.2 Analog Output (AO) GI FTA Wiring

The Galvanically Isolated Analog Output (AO) FTAs isolate up to eight 4-20 mA signals that can drive current-
to-pressure (I/P) transducers, position actuators, or any load of 750-ohms or less from the associated Analog
Output IOP.
Review Appendix F of the Control Hardware Planning Guide for more detailed descriptions of each FTA.

Table 67: Analog Output Galvanically Isolated FTA Types and Part Numbers

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-GAOX02 Analog Output (Single IOP) FTA- with Line Fault 51304638-100 51304638-125
Detection in the IOP
MC-GAOX02 Analog Output (Single IOP) FTA- with Line Fault 51304638-150 51304638-175
Detection in the IOP- Conformally Coated
MU-GAOX72 Analog Output (Single IOP) FTA- with Line Fault 51304638-500 51304638-525
Detection in the IOP
MC-GAOX72 Analog Output (Single IOP) FTA- with Line Fault 51304638-550 51304638-575
Detection in the IOP- Conformally Coated
MU-GHAO11 Analog Output FTA- with HART connection N/A 51309540-125
capability
MC-GHAO11 Analog Output FTA- with HART connection N/A 51309540-175
capability- Conformally Coated
MU-GHAO21 HART Analog Output FTA (See Note) N/A 51305869-125
MC-GHAO21 HART Analog Output FTA- Conformally Coated N/A 51305869-175
(See Note)
MU-GAOX12 Analog Output FTA- with Line Fault Detection in the 51304638-300 51304638-325
IOP
MC-GAOX12 Analog Output FTA- with Line Fault Detection in the 51304638-350 51304638-375
IOP- Conformally Coated
MU-GAOX82 Analog Output FTA- with Line Fault Detection in the 51304638-700 51304638-725
IOP
MC-GAOX82 Analog Output FTA- with Line Fault Detection in the 51304638-750 51304638-775
IOP- Conformally Coated
Note: HART compatible FTAs, models MC/MU-GAOX21 are suitable for use with the standard IOP, however the FTAs
have not been ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1978 surge tested with the standard (non-HART) AO_16 IOP.

FTA Connector Connection Used For . . .

J9 FTA Cable A
J10 FTA Cable B (for redundant IOPs)
J11 Standby Manual device
J12 and J13 24V dc input from Power Distribution Assembly

18.2.1 Field wiring input signals for Analog Output (AO)

The FTA provides 4-20 mA for control of field devices that are Galvanically Isolated from all other circuits.
The load resistance can be no greater than 750-ohms. The signal output dynamic impedance is greater than 1
megohm.

508 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

Model MC-GHAO11and MU-GHAO11 FTAs contain a HART connector that is used to interface to an external
HART system.
Model MC-GHAO21 and MU-GHAO21 FTAs support HART transmitters whose digital communication
signals are superimposed on a standard 4-20 mA signal.
Connection diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring and assembly layout drawings that show the physical
layout of the AO GI FTAs are given in the following figures listed in the following table.

Table 68: AO GI FTA Connection Drawings

Analog Output Assembly Layout Connection Diagram

Galvanically Isolated
FTA Model “Model MU-GAOX02, MU-GAOX72, “Model MU-GAOX12 and MU-
MU-GAOX12 and MU-GAOX82 GAOX82 analog output GI FTA
analog output GI FTA assembly layout” connection diagram” on page 512
on page 510
“Model MU-GAOX02, MU-GAOX72, “Model MU-GAOX12 and MU-
MU-GAOX12 and MU-GAOX82 GAOX82 analog output GI FTA
analog output GI FTA assembly layout” connection diagram” on page 512
on page 510
“Model MU-GHAO11 analog output/ “Model MU-GHAO11 analog output/
HART GI FTA assembly layout -CE HART GI FTA connection diagram -
compliant” on page 514 CE compliant” on page 513
“MU/MC-GHAO21 analog output/ “MU/MC-GHAO21 analog output/
HART GI FTA assembly layout and HART GI FTA assembly layout and
connection diagram -CE compliant” on connection diagram -CE compliant” on
page 515 page 515

509
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.2.2 Model MU-GAOX02, MU-GAOX72, MU-GAOX12 and MU-GAOX82 analog output GI FTA
assembly layout

510 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.2.3 Model MU-GAOX02 and MU-GAOX72 analog output GI FTA connection diagram

511
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.2.4 Model MU-GAOX12 and MU-GAOX82 analog output GI FTA connection diagram

18.2.5 Model MC-GHAO11 and MU-GHAO11 FTAs

The Galvanically Isolated Analog Output (AO) FTAs isolate up to sixteen 4-20 mA signals that can drive
current-to-pressure (I/P) transducers, position actuators, or any load of 870-ohms or less from the associated
Analog Output IOP. Model MC-GHAO11and MU-GHAO11 FTAs incorporate filters to allow connection to
HART field devices, and provide a connector for use with an external HART multiplexer system.
Model MC-GHAO11and MU-GHAO11 FTAs contain a HART connector (J3) that is used to interface to an
external HART system. The pinouts of the J3 connector are as follows:

Pins Usage
1 through 16 Combined 4 to 20 mA / HART signals for
Channels 1 through 16, respectively
17 through 20 Ground

512 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.2.6 Model MU-GHAO11 analog output/HART GI FTA connection diagram -CE compliant

513
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.2.7 Model MU-GHAO11 analog output/HART GI FTA assembly layout -CE compliant

18.2.8 Model MC-GHAO21 and MU-GHAO21 FTAs

The Galvanically Isolated Analog Output (AO) FTA, model MU-GHAO21, isolates up to sixteen 4-20 mA
signals from the associated analog output IOP. When used with the AO16HART IOP, model MC-PHAO01, the
FTA also supports HART communications between connected HART-enabled field devices and the
AO16HART IOP.

514 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.2.9 MU/MC-GHAO21 analog output/HART GI FTA assembly layout and connection diagram -CE
compliant

515
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.3 Digital Input (DI) GI FTA Wiring

The Digital Input (DI) galvanically isolated FTAs accommodate up to 32 switch or proximity detector inputs
from a hazardous area, isolates the signals, and presents them to the associated Digital Input IOP in a safe area.
The available DI galvanically isolated FTA models are listed in the following table with a brief description and
the listed part numbers for both CE compliant and non-CE compliant versions
Review Appendix F of the Control Hardware Planning Guide for more detailed descriptions of each FTA.

Table 69: Digital Input Galvanically Isolated FTA Types and Part Numbers

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-GDID12 Digital Input FTA with Compression Terminals, 51304640-100 51304640-125
Individual line-fault detection and auxiliary connector
MC-GDID12 Digital Input FTA with Compression Terminals, 51304640-150 51304640-175
Individual line-fault detection and auxiliary connector-
Conformally Coated
MU-GDID13 Digital Input FTA with Compression Terminals 51304728-100 51304728-125
MC-GDID13 Digital Input FTA with Compression Terminals- 51304728-150 51304728-175
Conformally Coated
MU-GDID82 Digital Input FTA with Crimp Terminals, Individual 51304640-300 51304640-325
line-fault detection and auxiliary connector
MC-GDID82 Digital Input FTA with Crimp Terminals, Individual 51304640-350 51304640-375
line-fault detection and auxiliary connector-
Conformally Coated
MU-GDID83 Digital Input FTA with Crimp Terminals 51304728-300 51304728-325
MC-GDID83 Digital Input FTA with Crimp Terminals-Conformally 51304728-350 51304728-375
Coated

18.3.1 Input signal phase and FTA features

The phase of the input signals is selectable on the model MU-GDID12 and MU-GDID82 FTAs, allowing the
alarm condition to be chosen for either state of the sensor. This is accomplished with two switches, one for each
input on the top of the Galvanic Isolation Modules.
The phase of the input signals is NOT selectable on the model MU-GDID13 and MU-GDID83 FTAs. The phase
of the Galvanic Isolation Module's input to output signals are not selectable on the module, and the module's
signal outputs are solid-state, instead of contacts. Also, the models MU-GDID13 and MU-GDID83 FTAs have
no auxiliary output connector.

FTA Connector Connection Used For . . .

J17 FTA Cable A
J18 FTA Cable B (for redundant IOPs)
J19 Marshalling Panel connector*
J20 and J21 24V dc input from Power Distribution Assembly
* Model MU-GDID12 and MU-GDID82 only.

516 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.3.2 Field wiring input signals

Field source can be the input from a contact or proximity switch. The following input parameters for the source
must be considered:
• A sensed current of less than 2 k ohms resistance is interpreted as a closure.
• A sensed current of more than 10 k ohms resistance is interpreted as an open.
• The hysteresis is nominally 650 ohms.
• The voltage applied to the sensor is 7.7 to 9.0 Vdc from 1 k ohm resistance.
Each Galvanic Isolation Module accepts two field devices. The two inputs connect to terminals 1 and 2, and 4
and 5.
Connection diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring and assembly layout drawings that show the physical
layout of the DI GI FTAs are given in the following figures listed in the following table.

Table 70: DI GI FTA Connection Drawings

Digital Input Assembly Layout Connection Diagram

Galvanically Isolated
FTA Model “Model MU-GDID12 and MU- “Model MU-GDID12 and MU-
GDID82 digital input GI FTA assembly GDID82 digital input GI FTA
layout” on page 518 connection diagram” on page 519
“Model MU-GDID13 and MU- “Model MU-GDID13 and MU-
GDID83 digital input GI FTA assembly GDID83 digital input GI FTA
layout” on page 520 connection diagram” on page 521

517
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.3.3 Model MU-GDID12 and MU-GDID82 digital input GI FTA assembly layout

518 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.3.4 Model MU-GDID12 and MU-GDID82 digital input GI FTA connection diagram

519
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.3.5 Model MU-GDID13 and MU-GDID83 digital input GI FTA assembly layout

520 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.3.6 Model MU-GDID13 and MU-GDID83 digital input GI FTA connection diagram

521
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.4 Digital Output (DO) GI FTA Wiring

The Digital Output (DO) Galvanically Isolated FTA can drive up to 16 certified intrinsically safe loads in a
hazardous area. The load can be a solenoid or an alarm, as well as a nonenergy-storing “simple apparatus,” such
as an LED.
An auxiliary connector on the model MC-GDOD12 and MC-GDOD82 FTAs provide an input for control
signals from an emergency shutdown subsystem that is user-supplied. The shutdown system must provide
potential-free floating sets of contacts. When one of the contacts is closed, a corresponding FTA output is
disabled (deenergized), regardless of the output state command from the IOP
The model MU-GDOL12 and MC-GDOL82 FTAs do not have the capability to accept output override signals
from a shutdown device. Instead, each input channel has line fault detection circuitry that causes a contact
closure that is present at an auxiliary connector.
The available DO galvanically isolated FTA models are listed in Table 1 with a brief description and the listed
part numbers for both CE compliant and non-CE compliant versions
Review Appendix of the Control Hardware Planning Guide for more detailed descriptions of each FTA.

Table 71: Digital Output Galvanically Isolated FTA Types and Part Numbers

Model No. FTA Description Non-CE Compliant CE Compliant Part

Part Number Number
MU-GDOD12 DO FTA with Compression Terminals with 16 output 51304642-100 51304642-125
override inputs from an auxiliary connector
MC-GDOD12 DO FTA with Compression Terminals with 16 output 51304642-150 51304642-175
override inputs from an auxiliary connector -
Conformally Coated
MU-GDOD82 DO FTA with Crimp Terminals with 16 output 51304642-300 51304642-325
override inputs from an auxiliary connector
MC-GDOD82 DO FTA with Crimp Terminals with 16 output 51304642-350 51304642-375
override inputs from an auxiliary connector -
Conformally Coated
MU-GDOL12 DO LFD FTA with Compression Terminals and Line 51304736-100 51304736-125
Fault Detection
MC-GDOL12 DO LFD FTA with Compression Terminals and Line 51304736-150 51304736-175
Fault Detection- Conformally Coated
MU-GDOL82 DO LFD FTA with Crimp Terminals and Line Fault 51304736-300 51304736-325
Detection
MC-GDOL82 DO LFD FTA with Crimp Terminals and Line Fault 51304736-350 51304736-375
Detection- Conformally Coated

FTA Connector Connection Used For . . .

J17 FTA Cable A
J18 FTA Cable B (for redundant IOPs)
J19 Marshalling Panel connector
J20 and J21 24V dc input from Power Distribution Assembly

522 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.4.1 Field wiring output signals

Terminals 1 and 4 on each Galvanic Isolation Module provide a maximum of 25.5 volts with a source resistance
of 232-ohms for model MU-GDOD12/MU-GDOD82, (or 176 ohms for model MU-GDOL12/MU-GDOL82).
The minimum output voltage varies from 22 volts at 0 current to 10 volts at 50 milliamps.
Connection diagrams to aid in connecting field wiring and assembly layout drawings that show the physical
layout of the DO GI FTAs are given in the following figures listed in the following table.

Table 72: DO GI FTA Connection Drawings

Digital Output Galvanically Isolated Assembly Layout Connection Diagram

FTA Model “Model MU-GDOD12 and MU- “Model MU-GDOD12 and MU-
GDOD82 digital output GI FTA GDOD82 digital output GI FTA
assembly layout” on page 523 connection diagram” on page 524
“Model MU-GDOL12 and MU- “Model MU-GDOL12 and MU-
GDOL82 digital output GI FTA GDOL82 digital output GI FTA
assembly layout” on page 525 connection diagram” on page 526

18.4.2 Model MU-GDOD12 and MU-GDOD82 digital output GI FTA assembly layout

523
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.4.3 Model MU-GDOD12 and MU-GDOD82 digital output GI FTA connection diagram

524 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.4.4 Model MU-GDOL12 and MU-GDOL82 digital output GI FTA assembly layout

525
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.4.5 Model MU-GDOL12 and MU-GDOL82 digital output GI FTA connection diagram

526 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.5 Combiner Panel, Model MU-GLFD02

The model MU-GLFD02 Combiner Panel combines the Line Fault Detection (LFD) outputs (16) of two Digital
Output FTAs and provides these signals (32) to redundant Digital Input IOPs for integration.
The Combiner Panel is similar in shape and appearance to an “A” size FTA and contains four 50-pin phone-type
connectors and a single green LED indicator. The Combiner Panel's assembly layout is illustrated in “Figure
124: Model MU-GLFD02 Combiner Panel Assembly Layout”.

18.5.1 Combiner panel assembly layout

Figure 124: Model MU-GLFD02 Combiner Panel Assembly Layout

18.5.2 LFD input connectors

Two connectors, J1 (LFD-A) and J2 (LFD-2), connect to the MARSHALLING PANEL CABLE connector, J19,
on two Digital Output FTAs that have line fault-detection capability. Presently, the model MU-GDOL12 and
MU-GDOL82 FTAs provide this feature. The standard IOP to FTA cable (MU-KFTAxx) is used to provide the
connections.

18.5.3 IOP output connectors

The combined 32 LFD outputs are available at both the J3 and J4 connectors. J3 connects to IOP A and J4
connects to its redundant partner, IOP B, if one exists. The standard IOP to FTA cable is used to provide the
connections.

527
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.6 Marshalling Panel, Model MU-GMAR52

The model MU-GMAR52 Marshalling Panel was developed primarily to provide user-accessibility to the
signals from the auxiliary connectors on the Galvanically Isolated FTAs, but it can be used as a general purpose
marshalling panel in the subsystem.
The Marshalling Panel is similar in shape and appearance to a “B” size FTA, except it is void of electronic
circuitry, but does provide surge and ESD protection for the field wiring terminals. A 50-pin connector is
provided on the assembly that receives or sends signals to the safe side of the FTA to which it is connected. The
suffix “MC” of the model number indicates that the marshalling panel or FTA is conformally coated.

Attention
Although the Marshalling Panel is used with the FTAs, the signals present are not intrinsically safe or inherently
Galvanically Isolated. Therefore, the signals on the Marshalling Panel cannot be exposed to a Division 1, Zone 0 or
Zone 1 environment.

Screw terminal connectors are available for the connection of the field wiring. See “Figure 125: Model MU-
GMAR52 Marshalling Panel Assembly Layout” for an illustration of the assembly layout. “Figure 126: Typical
Marshalling Panel Cabinet Interconnections” illustrates the typical interconnections when a Marshalling Panel
is mounted on a horizontal FTA mounting channel that does not contain a Galvanically Isolated FTA in a
cabinet. Marshalling Panels can also be mounted on a vertical, non-inverted, FTA mounting channel.

18.6.1 Marshalling panel assembly layout

Figure 125: Model MU-GMAR52 Marshalling Panel Assembly Layout

528 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.6.2 Marshalling panel cabinet interconnection

Figure 126: Typical Marshalling Panel Cabinet Interconnections

18.6.3 Signals available at screw terminals

The screw terminals of the Marshalling Panel assume various configurations, which are dependent upon the
model of FTA (HLAI, AO, DI, DO) to which it is connected. Model MU-KFTAxx cable (the suffix “xx” in the
model number represents the length of the cable in meters) is used to connect the FTA auxiliary connector to J1
of the marshalling panel.
The following subsections describe the various configurations that are available at the marshalling panel screw
terminals when the marshalling panel is connected to a given FTA.

18.6.4 High level analog input FTAs

When used with High Level Analog Input (HLAI) FTA or High Level Analog Input/Smart Transmitter Interface
(HLAI/STI) FTA, the Marshalling Panel provides either 1 to 5 volt or 4 to 20 mA PV signals.
The 1 to 5 volt signals are the same signals that the HLAI or STI IOP receives.
The 4 to 20 mA signals must be returned to the FTA to produce the 1 to 5 volt signal across a spool resistor that
the IOP requires.
The following FTAs provide 1 to 5 volt signals to the marshalling panel:
• Model MU-GAIH12/82 HLAI FTA

529
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

• Model MU-GAIH13/83 HLAI/STI FTA

• Model MU-GAIH14/84 HLAI/STI FTA
The following table provides a list of the signals available at the screw terminals of the Marshalling Panel when
it is connected to one of the above FTAs through its 50-pin auxiliary connector.
The signals are intended to be connected to a user-provided recording or monitoring device.

Attention
The recording or monitoring device must have an input impedance of 1 megohm, or greater, to avoid loading down the
signals and introducing errors into the IOP.
The signal wires must be separated from other wires or cables that might induce noise onto the signals. It is suggested
that you use a properly grounded, shielded, twisted-pair cable to carry the signals to the recording or monitoring
device.

Table 73: HLAI/STI FTA Marshalling Panel Signals (1 to 5 Vdc)

Terminal Numbers Description

1 and 2 Channel 1 + Channel 1 -
3 and 4 Channel 2 + Channel 2 -
5 and 6 Channel 3 + Channel 3 -
7 and 8 Channel 4 + Channel 4 -
9 and 10 Channel 5 + Channel 5 -
11 and 12 Channel 6 + Channel 6 -
13 and 14 Channel 7 + Channel 7 -
15 and 16 Channel 8 + Channel 8 -
17 and 18 Channel 9+ Channel 9 -
19 and 20 Channel 10 + Channel 10 -
21 and 22 Channel 11 + Channel 11 -
23 and 24 Channel 12 + Channel 12 -
25 and 26 Channel 13 + Channel 13 -
27 and 28 Channel 14 + Channel 14 -
29 and 30 Channel 15 + Channel 15 -
31 and 32 Channel 16 + Channel 16 -
33 Not used
34 Not used
35 Not used
36 Not used
37 Signal ground
38 Signal ground

18.6.5 4-20 mA HLAI FTA signals

The model MU-GAIH22 and model MU-GAIH92 HLAI FTAs provide 4 to 20 mA signals to the marshalling
panel. The signals are intended to be connected to a user-provided recording or monitoring device.

530 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

Attention
The recording or monitoring device must have an input impedance of 250-ohms or less.
The signal wires must be separated from other wires or cables that might induce noise onto the signals. It is suggested
that you use a properly grounded, shielded, twisted-pair cable to carry the signals to the recording or monitoring
device

The following table contains the list of the signals available at the screw terminals of the Marshalling Panel
when it is connected to the Model MU-GAIH22/92 FTA through its 50-pin auxiliary connector.

Table 74: HLAI/STI FTA Marshalling Panel Signals (4 to 20 mA)

Terminal Numbers Description

1 Channel 1 (4-20 mA return)
2 Channel 1 (4-20 mA)
3 Channel 2 (4-20 mA return)
4 Channel 2 (4-20 mA)
5 Channel 3 (4-20 mA return)
6 Channel 3 (4-20 mA)
7 Channel 4 (4-20 mA return)
8 Channel 4 (4-20 mA)
9 Channel 5 (4-20 mA return)
10 Channel 5 (4-20 mA)
11 Channel 6 (4-20 mA return)
12 Channel 6 (4-20 mA)
13 Channel 7 (4-20 mA return)
14 Channel 7 (4-20 mA)
15 Channel 8 (4-20 mA return)
16 Channel 8 (4-20 mA)
17 Channel 9 (4-20 mA return)
18 Channel 9 (4-20 mA)
19 Channel 10 (4-20 mA return)
20 Channel 10 (4-20 mA)
21 Channel 11 (4-20 mA return)
22 Channel 11 (4-20 mA)
23 Channel 12 (4-20 mA return)
24 Channel 12 (4-20 mA)
25 Channel 13 (4-20 mA return)
26 Channel 13 (4-20 mA)
27 Channel 14 (4-20 mA return)
28 Channel 14 (4-20 mA)
29 Channel 15 (4-20 mA return)
30 Channel 15 (4-20 mA)
31 Channel 16 (4-20 mA return)
32 Channel 16 (4-20 mA)
33 Not used

531
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

Terminal Numbers Description

34 Not used
35 Not used
36 Not used
37 Signal ground
38 Signal ground

18.6.6 Digital input FTAs

The model MU-GDID12/82 Digital Input FTA Marshalling Panel configuration provides an interface to the
potential-free sets of contacts that are isolated from the inputs to the IOP to which the FTA is connected. The
contact rating is 10 W, 0.5 A at 35 Vdc.
Each Galvanic Isolation Module on the FTA has two double-pole on/off reed relays, one for each channel. One
set of relay contacts is connected to the IOP and the second set of relay contacts is connected to the Marshalling
Panel through the FTA's auxiliary connector. The contact closure interface to the Marshalling Panel mimics the
FTA's contact closure interface to the IOP.
The typical applications for the sets of contacts are inputs to sequence of events recorders, monitoring systems,
and shutdown systems.
The following table provides a list of the signals available at the screw terminals of the Marshalling Panel when
it is connected to the model MU-GDID12/82 FTAs through its 50-pin auxiliary connector.

Table 75: Digital Input Marshalling Panel Signals (Relay contacts)

Terminal Numbers Description

1 Channel 1 contact
2 Channel 2 contact
3 Channel 3 contact
4 Channel 4 contact
5 Channel 5 contact
6 Channel 6 contact
7 Channel 7 contact
8 Channel 8 contact
9 Channel 9 contact
10 Channel 10 contact
11 Channel 11 contact
12 Channel 12 contact
13 Channel 13 contact
14 Channel 14 contact
15 Channel 15 contact
16 Channel 16 contact
17 Channel 17 contact
18 Channel 18 contact
19 Channel 19 contact
20 Channel 20 contact
21 Channel 21 contact

532 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

Terminal Numbers Description

22 Channel 22 contact
23 Channel 23 contact
24 Channel 24 contact
25 Channel 25 contact
26 Channel 26 contact
27 Channel 27 contact
28 Channel 28 contact
29 Channel 29 contact
30 Channel 30 contact
31 Channel 31 contact
32 Channel 32 contact
33 Contact common
34 Contact common
35 Contact common
36 Contact common
37 Signal ground
38 Signal Ground

18.6.7 Digital output FTAs

The marshalling panel configuration for the model MU-GDOD12/82 Digital Output FTA provides an interface
by which a contact closure can individually deenergize a Galvanic Isolation Module digital output. For example,
an “ON” output signal from the IOP for a channel can be “overwritten” by a control signal input from the
Marshalling Panel.
The inputs can be control signals from an emergency shutdown subsystem that is user-supplied.
The control signal cannot force an output “ON, only “OFF.” The shutdown subsystem must provide potential-
free floating sets of contacts. When a contact is closed, a corresponding FTA channel output is disabled
(deenergized), regardless of the output state command from the IOP.
The following table provides a list of the signals available at the screw terminals of the Marshalling Panel when
it is connected to a model MU-GDOD12/82 Digital Output FTA through its 50-pin auxiliary connector.

Table 76: Digital Output Marshalling Panel Signals (Contact Closure)

Terminal Numbers Description

Short between 1 and 2 Disables Channel 1
Short between 3 and 4 Disables Channel 2
Short between 5 and 6 Disables Channel 3
Short between 7 and 8 Disables Channel 4
Short between 9 and 10 Disables Channel 5
Short between 11 and 12 Disables Channel 6
Short between 13 and 14 Disables Channel 7
Short between 15 and 16 Disables Channel 8
Short between 17 and 18 Disables Channel 9
Short between 19 and 20 Disables Channel 10

533
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

Terminal Numbers Description

Short between 21 and 22 Disables Channel 11
Short between 23 and 24 Disables Channel 12
Short between 25 and 26 Disables Channel 13
Short between 27 and 28 Disables Channel 14
Short between 29 and 30 Disables Channel 15
Short between 31 and 32 Disables Channel 16
33 Not used
34 Not used
35 Not used
36 Not used
37 Signal ground
38 Signal ground

18.6.8 Model MU-GDOL12/82 configuration

The marshalling panel configuration for the model MU-GDOL12/82 Digital Output FTA is an interface that
represents input-channel line fault detection from the FTA. Line Fault Detection (LFD) circuitry in each
Galvanic Isolation Module controls a solid-state switch output at the FTA's auxiliary connector. Upon detection
of a line fault, the Galvanic Isolation Module deenergizes the solid-state switch that has its emitter connected to
logic ground.
The collector of the solid-state switch is the output to the auxiliary connector and is not terminated in the
module or on the FTA assembly.
The following table provides a list of the signals available at the screw terminals of the Marshalling Panel when
it is connected to a model MU-GDOL12/82 Digital Output FTA through its 50-pin auxiliary connector.

Table 77: Digital Output Marshalling Panel Signals (Solid-state switch inputs)

Terminal Numbers Description

1 Channel 1 contact
2 Channel 2 contact
3 Channel 3 contact
4 Channel 4 contact
5 Channel 5 contact
6 Channel 6 contact
7 Channel 7 contact
8 Channel 8 contact
9 Channel 9 contact
10 Channel 10 contact
11 Channel 11 contact
12 Channel 12 contact
13 Channel 13 contact
14 Channel 14 contact
15 Channel 15 contact
16 Channel 16 contact

534 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

Terminal Numbers Description

17 Channel 17 contact
18 Channel 18 contact
19 Channel 19 contact
20 Channel 20 contact
21 Channel 21 contact
22 Channel 22 contact
23 Channel 23 contact
24 Channel 24 contact
25 Channel 25 contact
26 Channel 26 contact
27 Channel 27 contact
28 Channel 28 contact
29 Channel 29 contact
30 Channel 30 contact
31 Channel 31 contact
32 Channel 32 contact
33 Contact common
34 Contact common
35 Contact common
36 Contact common
37 Signal ground
38 Signal Ground

535
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

18.7 Power Distribution Assembly, Model MU-GPRD02

The model MU-GPRD02 Power Distribution Assembly (PDA) provides individually fused 24 Vdc power for
the Galvanically Isolated FTAs. The dc power is supplied to the power distribution assembly by the same type
of 6-pin connector cable, model MU-KDPRxx (the suffix “xx” in the model number represents the length of the
cable in meters), used to supply power to the card files from the Power System. An assembly layout drawing of
the PDA is shown in “Figure 127: Galvanic Isolation Power Distribution Assembly Layout”. The power
distribution assembly has two input power connectors (J9 and J10) that provide for redundancy cables and
protects the system from a single cable or connector failure.
The power distribution assembly has the same mounting dimensions as an A-size FTA.

Figure 127: Galvanic Isolation Power Distribution Assembly Layout

The power distribution assembly has eight 2-pin connectors (J1 through J8) into which 2-wire power cables,
model MU-KGPRxx, can be connected to supply the 24 Vdc power to the power connectors on the Galvanically
Isolated FTAs.

18.7.1 Power Cables

Two power cable lengths can be ordered by model number. Model MU-KGPR05 is a 5-meter cable and model
MU-KGPR10 is a 10-meter cable. Other lengths are available, but the cable must be ordered by part number.
The available lengths are 20, 30, 40, 50, 80, 120, 160, 195, and 395 inches. Order by Honeywell part number
51109620-xxx, where “xxx” represents the length of the cable in inches. An illustration of the cable is shown in
the following figure.

536 www.honeywell.com
 18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

Figure 128: Model MU-KGPRxx (51109620-xxx) Power Cable

18.7.2 CE Compliant power cable

When the Galvanic Isolation Power Distribution Assembly is located external to the cabinet or cabinet complex
that contains the power source (Power System), the CE Compliant version of the 6-connector cable must be
used (Model MU-KSPRxx).
Model MU-KSPRxx ;(the suffix “xx” in the model number represents the length of the cable in meters) power
cables are shielded cables. They are identified by shield drain wires terminated in lugs at each end of the cable.
The drain wire at the far end of the cable shield must be attached to the FASTON terminal on the model MU-
GPRD02 power distribution assembly. The Power System end of the cable shield must not be grounded and the
drain wire must be either clipped or taped to the cable.

18.7.3 Power cable model list summary

Power Cable Model No. Description Use

MU-KDPRxx 6-pin connector cable Connects power system to IOP card file,
and
Connects power system to Power Distribution
Assembly
MU-KSPRxx * 6-pin connector cable Connects power system to externally located Power
(shielded) Distribution Assembly only.
CE Compliant installations.
MU-KGPRxx 2-pin connector cable Connects Power Distribution Assembly to
Galvanically isolated FTAs.
Part No. (51109620-xxx)
*Do not use to connect power system to IOP card file.

18.7.4 Power distribution assembly mounting

See “Marshalling Panel, Model MU-GMAR52” on page 528 for a typical cabinet installation illustration. See
“Power Distribution Assembly mounting” on page 209 for additional installation information.

537
18 APPENDIX D - GI FTA REFERENCE

538 www.honeywell.com
19 Notices

Trademarks
Experion®, PlantScape®, SafeBrowse®, TotalPlant®, and TDC 3000® are registered trademarks of Honeywell
International, Inc.
OneWireless™ is a trademark of Honeywell International, Inc.

Other trademarks
Microsoft and SQL Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Trademarks that appear in this document are used only to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention
of trademark infringement.

Third-party licenses
This product may contain or be derived from materials, including software, of third parties. The third party
materials may be subject to licenses, notices, restrictions and obligations imposed by the licensor. The licenses,
notices, restrictions and obligations, if any, may be found in the materials accompanying the product, in the
documents or files accompanying such third party materials, in a file named third_party_licenses on the media
containing the product, or at http://www.honeywell.com/ps/thirdpartylicenses.

539
19 NOTICES

19.1 Documentation feedback

You can find the most up-to-date documents on the Honeywell Process Solutions support website at:
http://www.honeywellprocess.com/support
If you have comments about Honeywell Process Solutions documentation, send your feedback to:
hpsdocs@honeywell.com
Use this email address to provide feedback, or to report errors and omissions in the documentation. For
immediate help with a technical problem, contact your local Honeywell Process Solutions Customer Contact
Center (CCC) or Honeywell Technical Assistance Center (TAC) listed in the “Support and other contacts”
section of this document.

540 www.honeywell.com
 19 NOTICES

19.2 How to report a security vulnerability

For the purpose of submission, a security vulnerability is defined as a software defect or weakness that can be
exploited to reduce the operational or security capabilities of the software.
Honeywell investigates all reports of security vulnerabilities affecting Honeywell products and services.
To report a potential security vulnerability against any Honeywell product, please follow the instructions at:
https://honeywell.com/pages/vulnerabilityreporting.aspx
Submit the requested information to Honeywell using one of the following methods:
• Send an email to security@honeywell.com.
or
• Contact your local Honeywell Process Solutions Customer Contact Center (CCC) or Honeywell Technical
Assistance Center (TAC) listed in the “Support and other contacts” section of this document.

541
19 NOTICES

19.3 Support and other contacts

For support, contact your local Honeywell Process Solutions Customer Contact Center (CCC).

North America
Country Phone Facsimile Email
Canada and United States 800-822-7673 973-455-5000 askssc@honeywell.com

Northern Europe
Country Local Time Phone Facsimile Email
Business
Hours
Denmark 07:00 – 18:00 80–252165 +45 6980 2349 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Finland 08:00 – 19:00 0800–9–15938 +358 (0)9 2319 4396 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Ireland 06:00 – 17:00 1800939488 +353 (0)1 686 4905 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Netherlands 07:00 – 18:00 0800 020 3498 +31 (0)20 524 1609 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Norway 07:00 – 18:00 800–11478 47–852–287–16 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Sweden 07:00 – 18:00 0200883167 +46 (0)8 509 097 84 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
United 06:00 – 17:00 08002797226 +44 (0)20 3031 1064 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Kingdom

Southern Europe
Country Local Time Phone Facsimile Email
Business
Hours
Belgium 07:00 – 18:00 080048580 +32 (0)2 791 96 02 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
France 07:00 – 18:00 0805100041 +33 (0)1 72 74 33 44 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Luxembourg 07:00 – 18:00 8002–8524 +352 24611292 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Spain 07:00 – 18:00 800099804 +34 91 791 56 25 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Portugal 06:00 – 17:00 800–8–55994 +34 91 791 56 25 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com

Eastern Europe
Country Local Time Phone Facsimile Email
Business
Hours
Bulgaria 08:00 – 19:00 700 20771 +359 (0)2 489 7384 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Croatia 07:00 – 18:00 0800 80 6392 +420 227 204 957 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Czech 07:00 – 18:00 800 142 784 +420 227 204 957 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Republic
Hungary 07:00 – 18:00 06 800 20 699 +36 (06) 1 577 7371 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Poland 07:00 – 18:00 00 800 121 50 46 +48 22 485 35 10 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Romania 08:00 – 19:00 0 800 800 178 +40 (0)31 710 7590 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Russia 09:00 – 20:00 8.10.80 02-412 50 11 +7 495 796 98 94 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Federation

542 www.honeywell.com
 19 NOTICES

Country Local Time Phone Facsimile Email

Business
Hours
Slovakia 07:00 – 18:00 0800 002 340 +421 (0)2 3301 0376 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com

Central Europe
Country Local Time Phone Facsimile Email
Business
Hours
Austria 07:00 – 18:00 0800 006438 +43 (0)1 253 6722 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
4904
Germany 07:00 – 18:00 0800 7239098 +49 (0)30 6908 8463 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Greece 08:00 – 19:00 00800 12 9493 +30 21 1 268 6973 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Israel 08:00 – 19:00 1 809 407 309 +972 (0)2 591 6148 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Italy 07:00 – 18:00 8000 35205 +39 06 96681356 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Switzerland 07:00 – 18:00 00 080 035 +41 (0)31 560 41 60 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com

Middle East and South Africa

Country Local Time Business Hours Phone Email
Bahrain 08:00 – 19:00 8008 1343 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Oman 08:00 – 19:00 8007 7595 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Qatar 08:00 – 19:00 800 5460 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Saudi Arabia 08:00 – 19:00 800 844 5309 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
South Africa 07:00 – 18:00 0800 983 634 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Turkey 08:00 – 19:00 00800 448823587 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
United Arab 09:00 – 20:00 8000 444 0300 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Emirates

Other regions
In other regions, contact your local Honeywell Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for support.
Region Phone Facsimile Email
Pacific 1300-364-822 (toll free +61-8-9362-9564 GTAC@honeywell.com
within Australia)
+61-8-9362-9559 (outside
Australia)
India +91-20-6603-2718 / 19 +91-20-6603-9800 Global-TAC-India@honeywell.com
1800-233-5051
Korea +82-80-782-2255 (toll free +82-2-792-9015 Global-TAC-Korea@honeywell.com
within Korea)
People’s Republic +86-21-2219-6888 Global-TAC-China@honeywell.com
of China
800-820-0237
400-820-0386
Singapore +65-6823-2215 +65-6445-3033 GTAC-SEA@honeywell.com
Japan +81-3-6730-7228 Global-TAC-
JapanJA25@honeywell.com

543
19 NOTICES

World Wide Web

Honeywell Process Solutions support website:
http://www.honeywellprocess.com/support

Elsewhere
Contact your nearest Honeywell office.

544 www.honeywell.com
 19 NOTICES

19.4 Training classes

Honeywell holds technical training classes on Experion PKS. These classes are taught by experts in the field of
process control systems. For more information about these classes, contact your Honeywell representative, or
see http://www.automationcollege.com.

545
19 NOTICES

546 www.honeywell.com